01388666 8 Oo eb 2 2) c 2) eb es a > = wn rc w = 2 a 3 1761 I) Handle with EXTREME CARE| This volume is damaged or brittle and CANNOT be repaired! - photocopy only if necessary - return to staff ¢ do not put in bookdrop Gerstein Science Information Centre * ae a ; emer 2 _" a om 0 neha pT fer NIT TT tT OY Oy Fae v 8h er Lae nae Digitized by the rt cad mY ie thst mee Fae ~~ ae es Amel —e : ah Pe ineUrs a hn PaRat at ms nT d C. rae! my 2; BRET eS ie { NA r: ; sail ay ¥ ype 4k ne gs rere. pe ee Ae MANUALS FOR STUDENTS OF MEDICINE ~ - Sa? ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. BY E. KLEIN, M._D., F.BS., JOINT-LECTURER ON GENERAL ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY IN THE MEDICAL SCHOOL OF ST. BARTHOLOMEW’S HOSPITAL, LONDON, ILLUSTRATED WITH 181 ENGRAVINGS. FOURTH EDITION, s = CASSELL & comet LONDON, PARIS & [ALL RIGHTS RS 1884. F @ Five My x o “a ur) SIR WILLIAM BOWMAN, BART., LL.D., F.R.S., ETC. ETC., THIS BOOK IS DEDICATED, IN ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF HIS MANY AND GREAT DISCOVERIES IN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY. a oe i | - — vet : ~ wd v. we tsb raat a book ' a ‘ < » : * + ; ie +. ie ae 2 - ~ = . - : é LZ j a “ a . ' : —_ ie : c ’ eOTe . - ve “QATTAINISE “SF i SRE TOOALR yu rary SYHOTEATHT ira aps Oe TAL ROR hat £4 4 ACN Wi yr ~ YHROT Ss a. PREFACE. So Tus Work is intended as a Manual for Medical Students. The original plan was to embody in it only such matter as was absolutely required for the first year’s student in the Medical Schools; but this plan was not carried out, since the book would then have been, in some measure, incomplete as a Manual -of Histology. The work contains a’ good deal that will be acceptable to the advanced student, as well as to the beginner. My best thanks are due to Mr. Charles Berjeau, F.LS,, for the readiness and artistic skill with which he has executed the illustrations on wood. Some of the figures are reproduced from my “ Atlas of Histology,” others from the “Handbook for the Physiological Laboratory.” The former are marked “ Atlas,” the latter “* Handbook.” E. KLEIN. May, 1883. PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION. _ In the present Edition I have made several altera- tions in the illustrations and in the text. Figures 4, 43, 78, 129; 132, and 160 have been re-drawn, so as to represent more satisfactorily the structures intended to be delineated. In the text a good many verbal corrections. have been introduced, and for many of these my thanks are due to my friend, Dr. Pye-Smith. E. KLEIN. January, 1884. CONTENTS. —~e— CHAPTER L PAGE CHAPTER I. BLOOD . . . . . . . . . . 10 CHAPTER It. EPITHELIUM . ‘ Fs = = = - . “ r a oe CHAPTER IV. ENDOTHELIUM ‘ - i . F 7 . an snetr ne’) -oirae CHAPTER V. FIBROUS CONNECTIVE TISSUES . é 6 ‘ é r aie | CHAPTER VI. CARTILAGE . ‘ : 3 P ; ; ; 4 é 3 ~ CHAPTER VIL. BONE . . . . . . . . . . . . b-* We 50 CHAPTER VILL NON-STRIPED MUSCULAR TISSUE . F d F . 6 CHAPTER IX. STRIPED MUSCULAR TISSUE . E . : t . P66 CHAPTER X. THE HEART AND BLOOD-VESSELS . : - j ; ‘ © 74 CHAPTER XL THe LYMPHATIC VESSELS. ree F528 dal G Lk eee x * Evementrs or HistTorocy. CHAPTER XI. SIMPLE LYMPHATIC GLANDS ©. " CHAPTER XII. CoMPOUND LYMPHATIC GLANDS CHAPTER XIV. NERVE-FIBRES . . ‘ . . : CHAPTER XV. PERIPHERAL NERVE-ENDINGS 5 CHAPTER XVI. THE SPINAL CORD f ; 3 ‘ CHAPTER XVIL THE MEDULLA OBLONGATA ; ‘ CHAPTER XVIII THE CEREBRUM AND CEREBELLUM ‘ CHAPTER XIX. THE CEREBRO-SPINAL GANGLIA. CHAPTER XX, THE SYMPATHETIC SYSTEM CHAPTER XXL THE TEETH . 5 CHAPTER XXII. THe SALIVARY GLANDS . ; j CHAPTER XXIII. THE MoutTH, PHARYNX, AND TONGUE . CHAPTER XXIV. THE CG2SOPHAGUS AND STOMACH CHAPTER XXV. THE SMALL AND LARGE INTESTINE r - 103 - 115 - 127 - 142 . 149 - 163 - 166 - 171 . 178 - 187 . 194 + 201 CONTENTS. CHAPTER XXVI. THE GLANDS OF BRUNNER, AND THE PANCREAS CHAPTER XXVII. THE LIVER . e CHAPTER XXVIII. THE ORGANS OF RESPIRATION . e z A CHAPTER XXIX. THE SPLEEN . ‘ : Z ‘ . : CHAPTER XXX. THE KIDNEY, URETER, AND BLADDER . .* CHAPTER XXXII. THE MALE GENITAL ORGANS . CHAPTER XXXII. THE FEMALE GENITAL ORGANS ‘ CHAPTER XXXIII. THE MAMMARY GLAND 7 CHAPTER XXXIV. THE SKIN ‘ ; : CHAPTER XXXV. THE CONJUNCTIVA AND ITS GLANDS . : CHAPTER XXXVI. THE CORNEA, SCLEROTIC, LIGAMENTUM PECTINATUM, CILIARY MUSCLE . ‘ CHAPTER XXXVI. THE Iris, CILIARY PROCESSES, AND CHOROID CHAPTER XXXVIHI. THE LENS AND VITREOUS Bopy . P > CHAPTER XXXIX. THE RETINA . . : ‘ $ : a . - 215 xii ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. © CHAPTER XL. ‘THE OUTER AND MIDDLE EAR. wet; CHAPTER XLIL CHAPTER XLII. THE NASAL Mucous MEMBRANE . : - A CHAPTER XLII. THE DUCTLESS GLANDS . , B cane ‘ : INDEX e . . . 7 . . € e ‘eit ~ a ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. CHAPTER I. _ CELLS. ? 1, THE ripe ovum (Fig. 1) of man and mammals is a minute spherical mass of a soft, gelatinous, trans- ‘parent, granular looking auteiknas. containing nume- rous minute particles—yolk globules. It is invested by a radially striated deli- cate membrane, called the zona pellucida. Inside this clump, and situated more or less excentrically, is a vesicle—the germinal vesicle —and inside this, one or more solid spots — the germinal spot or spots. The gela- Fis-1. —Ripe Ovum of Cat. tinous transparent substance “ “Vesidie; « protoplasm. of the ovum, containing a very large percentage of proteid material, is called Protoplasm. Before and immediately after fertilisa- tion, the protoplasm of the ovum shows distinct move- ment, consisting in contraction and expansion. These movements are spontaneous—+7.e., not caused by any directly visible external influence. The diameter of the pre ovum ; man and domestic animals varies between zo and 73, of an inch. But before it ripens the ovum is considerably smaller—in B—1 2 ELEMENTS oF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. L fact, its size is in proportion to its state of develop- ment. 2. Fertilisation causes marked changes in the contractions of the protoplasm of the ovum; these € Fig. 2.—From a Section through the Blastoderm of Chick, unincubated. a, Cells forming the ectoderm ; 4, cells forming the endoderm ; ¢, large formative cells; /, segmentation cavity. (Handbook.) lead to cleavage or division of its body into two parts, the germinal vesicle having previously split up into two bodies or nuclei; so that we now find the ovum ep co, Fig. 3a.—From a Section through the Rudiment of the Embryo Chick, © e, Primitive groove; f, dorsal lamine of epiblast ; @, mesoblast. The thin layer of spindle-shaped cells is the hypoblast. (Handbook.) has originated two new elements, each of which con- sists of protoplasm, of the same substance as that. of the original ovum, and each contains one nucleus or kernel. The investment of the ovum takes no part in Chap. I.] CELLS. 3 this process of division. Not long after, each of the two daughter elements undergoes cleavage or division <, Co OX Fig. 38.—Vertieal Section through the Ovum of Bufo Cinereus, in the early stage of the Eabryo Development. a, Tegmental layer of epiblast; 4, dorsal groove; ec, rudiment of central neryous system; d, notochord; e, deep layer of epiblast; f, mesoblast; g, hypoblast; hk, cavity of alimentary canal - Rusconi's cavity ; H, central yolk ; &, remainder of yon Baer's or segmentation cavity. (Handbowk.) into two new elements, the nucleus having previously divided into two, so that each of the new offsprings possesses its own nucleus. This process of division is continued in the same manner for many generations 4 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. L (Figs. 2, 3a, 3B), so that after a few days we find within the original investment of the ovum a large number of minute elements, each consisting of protoplasm, and each containing a nucleus. 3. From these elements, which become smaller as the process of cleavage progresses, all parts and organs of the embryo and its membranes are formed. It can be easily shown that the individual elements possess the power of contractility. Either spontaneously or under the influence of moderate heat, electricity, mechanical or chemical stimulation, they throw out processes and withdraw them again, their substance ‘flowing slowly but perceptibly along. Hence they can change their position. In this respect they com- pletely resemble those lowest organisms which are known as amcebe, each of these being likewise a nucleated mass of protoplasm. Wherefore this move- ment is termed ameboid movement. It can be further shown that they, like amcebe, grow in size and divide —that is to say, the individuals of a generation grow in size before each gives rise to two new daughter individuals. 4, Although for some time during embryonic life the elements constituting the organs of the embryo are possessed of these characters, a time arrives when only a limited number of them retain the power of contractility in any marked degree. At birth only the white corpuscles of the blood and lymph, many of the elements of the lymphatic organs, and the muscular tissues, possess this power, while the others lose it, or at any rate do not show it except when dividing into two new elements. Some of these elements retain their protoplasmic basis ; as a rule, each con- tains one nucleus (but some two or more) and is capable of giving origin by division to a new genera- tion. Others, however, change their nature altogether, their protoplasm and nucleus disappear, and they Chapel] “CELLS. 5 give origin to material other than protoplasm—e.g., collagenous, osseous, elastic, and other substances. 5. Beginning with the ovum, and ending with the protoplasmic nucleated elements found in the organs and tissues of the embryo and adult, we have, then, one uninterrupted series of generations of elements, which with Schwann we call cel/s and with Briicke elementary organisms. Of these it can be said that not only is each of them derived from a cell (Virchow : omnis cellula a cellula), but each consists of the protoplasm of Max Schultze (Sarcode of Dujardin), Fig. 4.—Amceboid movement of a White Blood Corpuscle of Man; various phases of movement. (Handbook.) is without any investing membrane, and includes generally one nucleus, but may contain two or more. We can further say that each of these cells shows the phenomenon of growth, which presupposes nutrition, and reproduction. All of them in an early stage of their life history, and some of them throughout it, show the phenomenon of contractility, or ameeboid movement (Fig. 4.) Cells differ in shape according to kind, locality, and functign, being spherical, irregular, polygonal, Squamous, branched, spindle-shaped, cylindrical, pris- “matic, or conical. These various shapes will be more fully described when dealing in detail with the various kinds of cells. Cells in man and mammals differ in size within considerable limits: from the size of a small white blood corpuscle of about ;4,, of an inch to that of a large ganglion cell in the anterior horns of the spinal cord of about 54, of an inch, or to that of a 6 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. I. multinucleated cell of the bone marrow—myeloplax— some of which surpass in size even the ganglion cells. The same holds good of the nucleus. Between the nucleus of a ganglion cell of about =2, to ys5q of an inch in diameter and the nucleus of a white blood eorpuscle of about z)55 tO podop Of an inch and less there are all intermediate sizes. 6. Protoplasm is a transparent homogeneous or granular-looking substance. On very careful examina- tion with good and high powers, and especially when examined with certain reagents, in many instances it shows a more or less definite structure, composed of fibrils, more or less regular, and in some instances grouped into a honeycombed or fibrillar reticulum in the meshes of which is a homogeneous interstitial substance (Heitzmann). The closer the meshes of the reticulum, the less of this interstitial substance, and the more regularly granular does it appear. In the meshes of the reticulum, however, may be included larger or smaller granules of fat, pigment, or other material. Water makes protoplasm swell up, and ultimately become disintegrated ; so do dilute acids and alkalies. All substances that coagulate proteids have the same effect on protoplasm. 7. The mucleus, the size of which is generally in _ proportion to that of the cell, is usually spherical or oval. It is composed of a more or less distinct invest- ing cuticle and the nuclear contents, which are in the ripe state arranged as an irregular or regular network, the parts of which may be uniform fibrils or septa, or irregularly-shaped trabecule. In the life history of ° each nucleus there may be stages in which one or more clumps or nucleoli are present in the nuclear network. The substance of the nucleus differs chemically from that of the cell, the former consisting of nwclein, Immediately before division the nuclear membrane disappears, and also immediately after division the. Chap.I.] CELLS. % 7 nuclear matter shows no definite boundary. The nuclear membrane when present is a condensed outer stratum of the nuclear matter. In some instances it can be shown that the nuclear fibrils are in continuity with the fibrils of the cell substance. In the moving white blood corpuscles Stricker and Unger have seen the nucleus becoming — one with the cell substance, and again afterwards differentiated by the appearance of a membrane. 8. During division of the cell the nucleus generally divides before the cell protoplasm. This division of the nucleus was until lately supposed to occur in the same manner as that of the cell pro- toplasin—i.e., by simple cleavage. This mode is called the direct division, or Remak’s mode of division. In this division the nucleus is supposed to become constricted, kidney-shaped and hour-glass shaped, and if the division is into more than two, lobed. Nuclei of these shapes are not uncommon ; but they need not necessarily indicate direct division, because, being yery soft structures, pressure exerted from outside, or the motion of the cell protoplasm, may produce these shapes; and, further, the contractility of the nucleus may and occasionally has been observed to cause these changes of shape. From the observations of recent investigators—Biitschli, Hertwig, Strassburger, Mayzel, van Beneden, Balfour, Eberth, Schleicher, Peremeschko, Flemming, Klein, Arnold, Pfiitzner, Retzius, Bizzozero, and many others—it is now known that in the embryo and adult, in plant and animal, vertebrates and invertebrates, all kinds of cells, before their protoplasm undergoes division, show complicated changes of their nucleus. This manner of division is called the indirect division or hkaryokinesis. It has: been observed by Mayzel, Schleicher, and Flemming,: that the nuclear fibrils show movement, hence the name karyokinesis, 7.¢., ‘kernel-movement.” This: $ . Exements or HISTOLOGY. [Chap. I. process of karyokinesis is represented in the adjoin- ing figure, 5, and it consists of the following phases : (a) The nuclear network become very pronounced, while the nuclear membrane disappears, and the fibrils of the nuclear network becomes twisted and bent into a more or less dense convolution; at the same time the nucleus, as a whole, is considerably enlarged. (b) The fibrils unravel into loops, arranged Fig, 5.—Karyokinesis. 4, Ordinary nucleus of a columnar epithelial cell; B, c, the same nucleus in the stage of convolution; D, the wreath, or rosette form ; F, the aster, or single star; F, a nuclear spindle from the Descemet’'s endothelium of the frog's cornea; G, H, I, diaster; K, two daughter nuclei, around the centre as a wreath or rosette. (c) The peripheral points of the loops become broken, and we obtain a star-shaped figure of single loops—the aster. (d) The loops separate into two groups or new centres: this is the diaster, or double star. (e) The two groups of threads become further apart, — as if attracted by opposite poles; but the two groups — remain still connected with one another by fine pale threads. These latter differ from the others in not staining with certain dyes, and representing the in- Chap. I.] CELLS. 9 terstitial substance of the nuclear matter—z.e., the pale substance contained in the original reticulum of the nucleus. Flemming calls this substance achromatin, whereas the threads forming the original network, the convolution, aster and diaster, he calls chromatin, on account of its readily staining with dyes. In this stage the whole figure resembles a spindle, the nuclear spindle of Biitschli (Fig. 5, F). Further, all connection between the two sets of threads is broken—~.e., between the stars of the diaster. (g) The threads of each set become greatly convoluted. (i) A membrane appears for each set. In this stage we speak of two new or daughter nuclet. The cell protoplasm may commence to divide at any stage between the one when the threads aggregate round twe centres, and the one when two distinct daughter nuclei are present; or the division of the nucleus may not be followed by the division of the cell protoplasm, in which case we have a two-nucleated cell. In some instances, especially of invertebrates and lower vertebrates, a peculiar sun-like arrangement of fibrils of the cell protoplasm towards each of the two stars of the above nuclear fibrils has been observed. Martin has noticed, in pathological new growths, a simultaneous division into three and four daughter nuclei, after the mode of karyokinesis. Although this indirect mode of division of the nucleus has been observed in all kinds of cells in the embryo, and toa limited degree also in the adult, it is not proved to be the universal-mode of nuclear division. On the contrary, there is strong evidence that in ameboid corpuscles division of the nucleus follows the direct mode, and it is also probable that other nuclei, under certain conditions, may undergo the direct mode of division. be) CHAPTER IL. BLOOD. 9. UNDER the microscope blood appears as a trans- parent fluid, the Liquor sanguinis or plasma, in which float vast numbers of formed bodies, the blood cor- puscles. ‘The great majority of these are coloured: afew of them are colourless. The latter are called ~ white or colourless blood corpuscles, or leucocytes. The former are called red or colowred blood corpuscles, or blood-discs. They appear red only when seen in a thick layer ; when in a single layer they appear of a yellow-greenish colour, more yellow if of arterial, more green if of venous blood. The proportions of plasma and blood corpuscles are sixty-four of the former and thirty-six of the latter in one hundred volumes of blood. By measurement it has been found that there are a little over five millions of blood cor- puscles in each cubic millimétre (-;1,, of a cubic inch) of human blood. There appears to be in healthy human blood one white corpuscle for 600-1200 red ones. In man and mammals the relative number of blood corpuscles is greater than in birds, and in birds greater than in lower vertebrates. 10. The red blood corpuscles (Fig. 6) of man and mammals are homogeneous bi-concave dises (except in the camelide, where they are elliptical), and do not possess any nucleus. Being bi-concave in shape,-they are thinner and more transparent in the centre than at the periphery. In other vertebrates they are oval and more or less flattened from side to side, and each. possesses a central oval nucleus. The diameter of the human red blood corpuscles is - Chap. I] BLOOD. II about s50 af an inch on the broad, and their thick- ness about +355 of an inch. But there are always corpuséles present which are much smaller by about one-third to one-half’ than the others. In ¥ O 9 normal blood these small red corpuscles A are scarce; in certain *%8- SrFeciay Rint of Red Blood abnormal conditions, A, Two human, one seen fiat, the other especially anemia, or GEV B,tqTed,compuséle of the poorness of blood, they one seen from Pek broad, the other from are more numerous. According to Gulliver, Welcker, and others, the following are the average diameters of the —_ blood corpuscles of various vertebrates :—man, 3; ‘00 ; dog, 58005 cat, zo'50 3 sheep, 5000.3 eee, BTTsS horse, z¢503 = deer, +53; 3 3 pigeon, SIT ; toad, srs; hewt, 51,; proteus, 74,; pike, 5355; shark, 11. In a microscopic specimen of fresh unaltered blood (Fig. 7) the red blood corpuscles form peculiar shorter ~ or longer rolls, like so many coins, from be- coming adherent to one another by their broad surfaces. Under various conditions — such as when isolated, or when blood is diluted with sa- line solution or solutions of other salts (sulphate of Fig. 7._Human Blood, fresh. sodium or magnesium) A, Rouleaux of red les ; B, isolated red earpubele poner int promi le; ©, iso- —the corpuscles lose on ol A ay taper seen flat ; Dd, white their ‘smooth circular outline, shrinking and becoming crenate (Fig. 8, A). Ina further stage of this process of shrinking they lose their discoid form, and 12 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. II. become smaller and spherical, but beset all over their surface with minute processes. This shape is called the sa horse-chestnut shape (Fig. 8, b,c). It'is pro- 00 bably due to the corpuscles losing carbonic acid, as its addition brings back their discoid shape and smooth circular outline. On ab- @ © stracting the carbonic acid they return to = 6 :. the horse-chestnut shape. Water, acid, fied Blood alcohol, ether, the electric current, and uuscie*: many other reagents, produce discoloration hhorse-chestiut of the red blood corpuscles; the coloured matter— generally the combination of tthe blood-colouring matter with globulin known as hemoglobin—becoming dissolved in the plasma. What is left of the corpuscles is called the stroma. In newts’ and frogs’ blood a separation of the stroma from the nucleus and hemoglobin can be effected by means of boracic acid (Fig. 9, B) ; the former is called by Briicke the Cikoid, the _. latter Zooid. This sions ae: 9. Red Seo). Coane s contains amongst other , Human red corpuscles after the action things much para- _ fromwhich the hemogiobin 1s passing > : out; 5, Roberts’s corpuscles. globulin. The stroma .s,, rgd red yey etter he action of the corpuscles of — Sriekes'zooid and oikold; 0, a corpus <4.\h A cle showing the reticulated stroma ; amnphibinns 1s" Been, fySieabdocps aiknctuneloes pening under certain reagents, out. % to be of a reticulated structure, but in the fresh state appears homo- geneous and pale. Discoloration of the blood cor- puscles can also be observed to take place in blood without the addition of any reagents or with that of indifferent fluids, such as the aqueous humour of the eye, hydrocele fluid, etc. The number of corpuscles undergoing discoloration is, however, small. Chap. II.] BLoop. 13 The elements of the blood described by Dr. Richard Norris, of Birmingham, as the invisible, pale, or third corpuscle, are red blood corpuscles that have be- come discoloured by the mode of preparation (Alice Hart). | 12. The hzemoglobin of the red blood corpuscles forms crystals (Fig. 10), which differ in shape in various mammals. They are always of microscopic size, and of a bright red colour. In man and most mammals they are of the shape of prismatic needles, or rhom- bie plates; in the squirrel they are lvexagonal plates, and in the guinea- pig they are tetrahedral or octahedral. The blood pigment itself is an amorphous dark- brown or black powder—the hematin; but it can be obtained in a crystalline form as_ hydro- chlorate of hematin(Fig.11). These crystals 4 Su also are of microscopic size, of a nut-brown 4, | colour, of the shape of narrow rhombic / plates, and are called hemin crystals, or DSUs, Teichmann’s crystals. In ‘extravasated human blood crystals of a bright yellow or orange colour are occasionally met with; they are called by Virchow, their discoverer, hematoidin. . They are supposed to be identical with bilirubin, obtainable from human bile. 13. The white or colourless blood cor- puscles are in human blood of about 54,5 to sos of an inch in diameter, and are spherical in the Fig. 10.—Hemoglobin crystals. A, Of guinea-pig ; B, of squirrel ; c, D, human. > 4 14 Exemenrs or Hisrovocy. [Chap. IT. circulating blood or in blood that has just been removed from the vessels. Their substance is trans- parent granular-looking protoplasm, containing larger or smaller bright granules. These granules, though usually of a fatty nature, are in some kinds of blood, notably horses’, of a reddish colour, and these corpuscles are supposed by some observers (Semmer and Alexander Schmidt) to be inter- mediate between red and white corpuscles. The protoplasm of the colourless corpuscles contains glycogen (Ranvier, Schafer). In the blood of the lower vertebrates the colourless corpuscles are much larger than in mammals. But in all cases they consist of protoplasm, include one, two, or more nuclei, and show ameeboid movement. This may be observed in corpuscles without any addition to a fresh microscopic specimen of blood, but it always becomes much more pronounced on applying artificial heat of about the degree of mammals’ blood. It is then seen that they throw out longer or shorter filamentous processes, which may gradually lengthen or be withdrawn, appearing again at another point of the surface. The corpuscle changes its position either by a flowing movement of its protoplasm as a whole, thus rapidly creeping along the field of the microscope, or it may push out a filamentous process and shift the rest of its body into it. During this movement the corpuscle may take up granules from the surrounding fluid. 14. The white corpuscles of the same sample of _ blood differ in size and aspect within considerable limits, some being half the size of others, some much paler than others. The smaller examples generally possess one nucleus occupying the greater part of the corpuscle, the larger ones usually include two, three, or -even more nuclei, and show more decided amceboid movement than the others. Division by Chap. I1.J - BLoop. ; 15 cleavage of the white corpuscles of the blood of lower vertebrates has been directly observed by Klein and Ranvier. . 15. In every microscopic specimen of the blood of man and mammals are found a variable number of large granules, more or less angular, singly or in groups, which have been specially studied by Osler. According to Bizzozero they are, when observed in the living and fresh blood, © a. pale, circular, or slightly oval discs O (Fig.12, 5).!» Their size is only 2.to)2....O of that of the red blood corpuscles. b They are called by him blood -plates, and © °° — he supposes them to be of essential im- “* Biooa portance in the coagulation of the blood, = Red blood cor. originating the fibrin ferment. Hayem _ Plates of Bizzo described them previously as being in- termediate forms in the development of red blood . corpuscles, and called them hzmatoplasts. 16. Development of Blood Corpuscles.— At an early stage of embryonic life, when blood makes its appearance it is a colourless fluid, contain- ing only white corpuscles (each with a nucleus), which are derived from certain cells of the mesoblast. These white corpuscles change into red ones, which become flattened, and their protoplasm gets homogeneous and of a yellowish colour. All through embryonic life new white corpuscles are transformed into red ones. In the embryo of man and mammals these red corpuscles retain their nuclei for some time, but ultimately lose them. New nucleated red blood corpuscles are, how- ever, formed by division of old red corpuscles. Such division has been observed even in the adult blood of certain lower vertebrates (Peremeschko) as well as in the red marrow of mammals (Bizzozero and Torre). An important source for the new formation of red corpuscles in the embryo and adult is the red marrow 16 ELEMENTS oF HISTOLOGY: (Chap. III. of bones (Neumann, Bizzozero, Rindfleisch), in which numerous nucleated protoplasmic cells (marrow cells) are converted into nucleated red blood corpuscles. The protoplasm of the eorpuscle becomes homogeneous and tinged with yellow, the nucleus being ultimately lost. The spleen is also assumed to be a place for the forma- tion of red blood corpuscles. Again, it is assumed that ordinary white blood corpuscles are transformed into red ones, but of this there is no conclusive evidence. In all these instances the protoplasm becomes homo- geneous and filled with hemoglobin, while the cell grows flattened, discoid, and the nucleus in the end disappears. Schafer described iecedoedialan’ (endogenous) for- mation of red blood corpuscles at first as small heemo- globin particles, but soon growing into red blood cor- puscles, in certain cells of the subcutaneous tissue of young animals. Malassez describes the red blood cor- puscles originating by a process of continued budding from the marrow cells. The white corpuscles appear to be derived from the lymphatic organs, whence they are carried by the lymph into the circulating blood. CHAPTER ITI, EPITHELIUM. 17. Epithelial cells (Fig. 13a) are nucleated proto- plasmic cells, forming continuous masses on the surface of the skin, of the lining membrane of the alimentary canal, the respiratory organs, the urinary and genital organs, the free surface of the conjunctiva, and the anterior surface of the cornea, The lining of the tubes and us Chap. III.] EPITHELIUM. 17 alveoli of secreting and excreting glands, such as the kidney, liver, mammary gland, testis and ovary, the salivary glands, mucous, peptic, and Lieberkiihn’s glands, the sweat and sebaceous glands, the hair follicles, &c., consists of epithelial cells. Such is the ease also with the sensory or terminal parts of the organs of the special senses. And, finally, epithelial cells occur in other organs, such as the thyroid, the pitui- tary body, &c. The hairs and nails, the-cuticle of the skin, certain parts of the rods and cones of the retina, and the rods of Corti in the organ of hearing, are modi- fied epithelial struc- tures. Epithelial cells : “are grouped together pig, 134, Various kinds of Epithelial Cel’s. ~ by exceedingly thin A, Columnar cells of intestine; B, polyhedra layers of an albu- Celis ofthe tracheas Dy ciliated cell of ftoe's inoue intoraitiad Patna ctw neck cement substance, eageways. a ae er which during life is of a semi-fluid nature, and belongs to the group of bodies kknewn as globulins. 18. As regards shape we distinguish two kinds of epithelial cells—columnar and squamous. The columnar cells are short or long, cylindrical or pris- matic, pyramidal, conical, club-shaped, pear-shaped, or spindle-shaped ; their nucleus is always more or less oval, their protoplasm more or less longitudinally striated. On the free surface of the cells—.e., the c—l | 18 Exementrs or Hisrotocy. (Chap. IIT. part facing a cavity, canal, or general surface—in many instances a bright thinner or thicker cuticular struc- ture is seen, with more or less distin¢t vertical striation. The conical or spindle-shaped, club-shaped, and pear- shaped cells are drawn out into longer or shorter single or branched extremities. The squamous or pavement cells are cubical, polyhedral or scaly. The nucleus of the former is almost spherical that of the latter flattened in propor- tion to the thinness of the scales. In _ polyhedral cells it can be occasionally perceived that the granula- tion is due to the regular honeycombed nature of the cell protoplasm. 19. As regards size, the epithelial cells differ considerably from one another in different parts, and even in the same part. Thus, the columnar cells, covering the surface of the villi of the small in- testine, are considerably longer than those lining the mucous membrane of the uterus ; the columnar cells lining the larger Fig. 138.—Three Mucus-secreting ducts of the kidney are eset barca considerably longer than A, From the stomach of newt; B, from ae amucous gland; 0,from the surface those lining the small Pg heen membrane of the in ee tas F the polyh waived cells covering the anterior surface of the cornea are considerably smaller than those on the surface of the lining membrane of the urinary bladder; the scales lining the ultimate recesses of the bronchial tubes—the air cells—are considerably smaller than those on the surface of the membrane lining the human oral cavity and cesoph 20. As regards arrangement, the epithelial cells are either arranged as a single layer or are stratified, forming several superposed layers ; in the former case Re Pe Pa Chap. TII.J EPITHELIUM. 19 we have a single-layered, in the latter a stratified epi- thelium. The simple epithelium may be composed of squamous cells, simple squamous oF simple pavement epithelium ; or it may be composed of columnar cells, sumple columnar epithelium. The stratified epithelium may be stratified pavement, or stratified columnar ; in the former case all or the majority of the layers consist of squamous or polyhedral cells, in the latter all cells belong to the columnar kind. Simple squamous epithelium is that which lines the air cells, certain urinary tubules of the kidney (the looped tubes of Henle, the cortical parts of the collecting tubes), the acini of the milk-gland, the inner surface of the iris and choroid membrane of the eyeball. Simple columnar epritheluum is that on the inner surface of the stomach, small and large intestine,. uterus, small bronchi, ducts and acini of mucous and salivary glands, of some kidney tubules, &e. Stratified pavement epithelium is that on the epidermis, the epithelium lining the cavity of the mouth, pharynx, and cesophagus in man and mammals, the anterior surface of the cornea, &c. 21. The epidermis (Fig. 14) consists of the fol- lowing layers :—(a) Stratum corneum: this is the super- ficial horny layer, and it consists of several layers of horny scales, without any nucleus. The layers, which are separated from one another by narrow clefts con- taining air, are then in process of desquamation. This stratum is thickest on the palm of the hand and fingers, and the sole of the foot. (b) The stratum lucidum, composed of several dense layers of horny scales, in which traces: of an exceedingly flattened nucleus may be perceived. (c) Then follow many layers of nucleated cells, forming the stratum or rete Malpighii or rete mucosum. The most super- ficial layer or layers of it are flattened scales, which are characterised by the presence around the nucleus 20 Excemenrs or HISTOLOGY. (Chap. III. of globular or elliptical granules of the nature inter- mediate between protoplasm and keratin. Their sub- stance is called eleidin by Ran- vier, keratohy- alin by Walde- . yer; these cells form the stra- tum granulo- sum of Langer- hans, Deeper down the cells are less flat- Lig tees ATE crt tenedand more Fig. 14.—From a Vertical Section through the polyhedral,and SS —e Epidermis. a, The stratum Malpighii; 4, the stratum granulosum; the deepest Been lucidum; d@, the stratum corneum. form a layer of more ortess columnar eells, placed vertically on the surface of the subjacent corium. The substance of the hairs, nails, claws, hoofs, consists of horny scales. (See chapter on Skin.) 22. The stratified pavement epithe- lium (Fig. 15) lining the cavity of the mouth, the surface of the tongue, the pharynx and cesophagus of man and mammals, and the anterior surfaceof the cornea, dc., is, as regards y.. 15 rom a Vertical Section the style and arrange- through the anterior layers of the — f the cells, identi- ment oO ’ a,“bhe stratified pavement epithelium; “ cal with the stratum ‘’s, the substantia propria, with the corneal corpuscles between itslamella = Malpighii of the epider- (Handbook. Chap. III.] EPITHELIUM. 21 mis. The cell protoplasm is more transparent in the former, and the granular cells of the stratum granu- losum are not always present, but they generally are in the epithelium of the tongue and of the rest of the oral cavity. The most superficial scales show more or less horny transformation. 23. Stratified columnar epithelium is met with on the lining membrane of the respiratory organs, as larynx, trachea, and large bronchi. It consists of several layers of columnar cells: a super- ficial layer of conical or prismatic cells, with a more or less pointed extremity directed towards the depth ; between these are inserted spindle-shaped cells, and finally inverted conical cells. The epithelium of the ureter and bladder is called transitional epithelium. It is stratified, and the most superficial layer consists of squamous cells. Under- neath this is a layer of club-shaped cells, between which extend one or more layers of small spindle- shaped cells. Amongst the columnar epithelial cells occurring in man and mammals the ciliated cells and the goblet cells, and amongst the squamous cells the prickle cells, deserve special attention. 24. Ciliated cells are characterised by possess- ing a bundle of very fine longer or shorter hairs or cilia on their free surface. These cilia are direct pro- longations of the cell protoplasm. More correctly _ speaking, the cilia are continuous with the filaments or striz of the cell protoplasm. The superficial layer of conical cells of the epithelium in the respiratory organs, the columnar cells lining the uterus and ovi- ~ duct, and the columnar cells lining the tubes of the epididymis possess such cilia. In lower vertebrates the ciliated cells are much more frequently observed ; in Batrachia the epithelial cells lining the mouth, _- pharynx, ‘and cesophagus are ciliated. fe a y 22 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. LI. While fresh in contact with the membrane which they line, or even after removal from it, provided the cells are still alive, the ciliated cells show a rapid synchronous whip-like movement of their cilia, the cilia of all cells moving in the same direction. The movement ceases on the death of the cell, but may become slower and may cease owing to other causes than death, such as coagulation of mucus on the surface, want of sufficient oxygen, presence of car- bonic acid, low temperature, &c. Under these circum- stances, removal of the impediment, as by dilute alkalies, will generally restore the activity of the cilia. ‘Moderate electric currents and heat stimulate the movement, strong electric currents and cold retard it. Reagents fatally affecting cell protoplasm also stop permanently the ciliary action. 25. Goblet or chalice cells (Figs. 13s, 16) are cells uf the shape of a conical: cup. The pointed part is directed away from the free surface, and contains a compressed triangular nucleus, surrounded by a_ trace of protoplasm. The body of the ee ah goblet contains mucus. This latter From a Vertical Sec- ti through the i ; tion, through the may be in various states of forma- of th i i prions ot Gd mn. tion, and may at any time be poured the large intestine. out of the cell. Goblet cells are Neen pouring out their MOSt commonly met with amongst ordinary edlumaar the epithelium lining the respiratory fat organs, the surface of the stomach and ’ intestines, and especially in mucous glands, in whose secreting portion all cells are goblet cells. The protoplasm of columnar eells facing a free surface, no matter whether in simple or stratified epithelium, ciliated or non-ciliated, may undergo such alteration as will lead to the transforma- tion of the cell into a goblet cell. This takes place during life, and corresponds to an im- Chap. 111.} EPITHELIUM. 23 portant function of columnar epithelial cells—viz., the formation of mucus. In mucus-secreting glands all the epithelial cells have this function permanently, but in ordinary columnar epithelium only a comparatively small number of the cells, as a rule, undergo this change, and then only temporarily ; for a cell subject to it.at one time may shortly afterwards resume the original shape and aspect of an ordinary protoplasmic, cylindrical, or conical epithelial cell, and vice versa. If ciliated cells undergo this change, the cilia are generally first detached. It can be shown that in this change of an ordinary columnar epithelial cell into a goblet cell, the inter- stitial substance of the cell reticulum increases in amount, the meshes enlarging and distending the body of the cell. The interstitial substance probably under- goes the change into mucin. 26. Prickle Celis (Fig.14).—Amongst themiddle and deeper layers of the stratified pavement epithelium, such as is present in the epidermis and on the surface of the oral cavity and pharynx, we meet with a close, more or less distinct and regular striation, extending from the margin of one cell to that of each of its neighbours, by means of fine transverse short fibrils which, passing from protoplasm to protoplasm, connect _ the surfaces of the cells. 27. Pigmented epithelial cells—z.e., epithelial cells filled with black pigment particles (crystals)—are found on the internal surface of the choroid and iris of the eyeball. In coloured skins, and in coloured patches of skin — and mucous membrane, such as occur in man and animals, pigment in the shape of dark granules is found in the protoplasm of the deeper epithelial cells, as well as in branched cells situated between the epithelial cells of the deeper layers. Minute 24 ELEMENTS OF HlisTOLOGY. —_[Chap. III. branched non-pigmented nucleated cells are met with in the interstitial or cement substance of various kinds of epithelium, simple and stratified, e.g., epidermis, epithelium of oral cavity, cornea, &c. 28. Epithelial cells undergo division, and by this means a constant regeneration takes place. In those parts where the loss of the superficial layers of cells is conspicuous, such as the epidermis, the stratified epi-~ thelium of the tongue and oral cavity, the sebaceous follicles of hairs, the regeneration goes on more copiously than at places where no such conspicuous loss . occurs—as, for instance, in the stomach and intestines, ~the secreting glands, or sense organs. In the stratified pavement epithelium it is the cells of the deepest layer which chiefly divide ; the next layer thereby becomes gradually shifted towards the surface, and more flattened, and on reaching the surface dries up owing to rapid loss of water. 29. The interstitial substance between the epi- thelial cells being soft and semi-fluid, and the proto- plasm of the epithelial cells themselves being a soft flexible material, it is possible for the cells to change their shape and arrangement after pressure and tension, exerted on them by the contraction or distension of the membrane on which they are situated. Thus, for in- stance, the epithelium lining a middle-sized bronchus may appear at one time as composed of long, thin, columnar epithelial cells in two layers ; at another, as a single layer of long columnar cells; or again as a single layer of polyhedral or short columnar cells: the first is the case when the bronchus is contraeted, the second when it is in a medium state of distension, _ the third when it is much distended. Similar changes may be noticed on the epithelium lining the mucous ~ membrane of the bladder, gland tubes, the epidermis, and various other epithelial structures 25 CHAPTER IV. ENDOTHELIUM. 30. THE free surfaces of the serous and synovial membranes, and of those of the brain and spinal cord, the posterior surface of the cornea and anterior surface of the iris, the surfaces of tendon and tendon- sheaths, the lymph sinuses or lymph sacs of amphibian animals, the cavity of the heart, of blood-vessels and of lymphatic-vessels are lined with a continuous endothelial membrane, composed of a single layer of flattened trans- parent squamous cells, called endo- thelial cells (Fig. 17). Each contains an oval nucleus, situated as a rule excentrically. Just as in the case . of epithelium, the endothelial cell Fig: 17—Bndothelium plates are joined by a fluid or semi- at. fluid“ homogeneous inéerstitial or ‘thelial cells, ‘and’ the cement substance of the nature of — aevwellshown, globulin. When examining any of the above structures fresh, the endothelial cells are not, as a rule, visible, owing to their great trans- parency; but by staining the structures with a dilute solution of nitrate of silver, and then ex- ‘posing them to the influence of the light, the cement substance appears stained black, whereby thé shape and size of the cell plates become evident. By various dyes also the nucleus of each cell plate may be brought into view. On careful examination, and with suitable re- agents, it can be shown that each endothelial cell consists of a homogeneous grouwnd-plate. In it 26 Exrements or HisTouocy. [Chap. IV. lies the nucleus, and around it is a substance which appears granular, but which is of a fibrillar nature, the fibrille being arranged in a network, and extend- ; ty y : Y fi \ e SAK . + la Y pp NW iS fy Gy a Ante "WYZEZZZ 2 SIG WANNA WNW IIGEELLZZZAR OH MS J NS CHAR EGE kN i wey ZE—S KAA Sa r ig oe fox Uj ly © f L y Vie if if WW _ so ES |\ \ Zee SSS) NS ele eZ Nth) 2 ‘3 VOU »\ Nin M)\ Kh) WP YSN HAN Hy A) Fig. 18.—Network of Lymphatics in the Central Tendon of the Diaphragm of Rabbit, prepared with nitrate of silver, so as to show the outlines of the Endothelial Cells forming the wall of the Lymphatics, a, Large lymphatic vessels; , lymphatic capillaries; ¢, apparent en "capillaries. "Handbook. Pe 5 Sa » 3 ¢, apparent ends of the S ing in many places up to the margin of the ground-_ plate. The nucleus is limited by a membrane, and contains a well-developed reticulum. ‘The fibrille of the cell substance appear to be connected with the nuclear reticulum, 31. As regards shape, endothelial cells differ considerably. Those of the pleura, pericardium, peritoneum, and endocardium of man and mammals Chap. IV.] ENDOTHELIUM. Loa are more or less polygonal, or slightly elongated. Their outlines vary ; in the lining of the lymph sacs of the frog they are much larger, and of very sinuous out- line ; while those of the posterior surface of the cornea Fig. 19.—Omentum of Rabbit, stained with Nitrate of Silver. a, Ordinary flat endothelial cells ; 6, germinating cells. (Atlas.) are very regular, pentagonal, or hexagonal, having straight outlines in the perfectly normal and well-pre- served condition, but serrated and sinuous after they have been prepared with various reagents and in the abnormal state ; the endothelial plates lining the blood- vessels and lymphatic vessels (Fig. 18) are narrow and elongated, with more or less sinuous outlines) In the lymphatic capillaries the endothelial plates are poly- gonal, but their outline serrated. 32. As a rule the endothelial cells are flattened, 28 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. IV. i.e., scaly—but in some places they are polyhedral, or even Short columnar. Such cells occur isolated or in small groups, or covering large and small patches, nodular, villous, or cord-like structures of the pleura Fig. 20.—Part of Peritoneal Surface of the Central Tendon of Diaphragm ‘ of Rabbit, prepared with Nitrate of Silver. s, Stomata; 7, lymph-channels; ¢, tendon bundles. The surface is covered with eo ae e stomata are surrounded by germinating endothelial cells. 100 and omentum, on the synovial membranes, tunica vaginalis, testis, &c. They are especially observable! in considerable numbers in the pleura and omentum) (Fig. 19) of all normal subjects (in man, ape, dog, cat, and rodent animals); their number and frequency of occurrence are increased in pathological conditions: (chronic inflammations, tuberculosis, cancer, &c.). These endothelial cells are the germinating endo- thelial cells, and they can be shown to be in an Chap. IV.] ENDOTHELIUM. 29 active state of division. They thus produce small spherical lymphoid (ameboid) cells, which ultimately are absorbed by the lymphatics, and carried into the blood system as white blood corpuscles. On the sur- Fig. 21.—Part of Omentum of Cat, stained with Nitrate of Silver. #, Fenestre or holes ; 4, trabeculae covered with endothelium. Only the outlines * (@ilver-lines) of the endothelial cells are shown. face of the serous membranes, especially the diaphragm (Fig. 20) and pleura, there exist minute openings, stomata, leading from the serous cavity into a lym- phatic vessel of the serous membrane, These stomata are often lined by germinating cells. 33. In the frog, germinating cells occur in great abundance on the mesogastrium and the part of the peritoneum which separates the peritoneal cavity from the cisterna lymphatica magna, This part of 30 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. IV. the peritoneum is called the septum cisterne lym- phaticee magne, and on it occur numerous holes or stomata, by which a free communication is established between the two cavities. On the peritoneal surface of this septum the stomata are often bordered by germinating cells. Im the female frog, these and other germinating endothelial cells of the peritoneum (mesogastrium, mesenterium, septum cistern) are ciliated. ~ 34, The omentum and parts of the pleura are, in the adult human subject, ape, dog, cat, guinea-pig, rat, &c., of the nature of a fenestrated membrane (Fig 21), bands of fibrous tissue of various sizes dividing and reuniting, and leaving between them larger or smaller holes, in shape oblong or circular. These holes or fenestre are not covered with anything, the endo- thelial cells adhering only to the surfaces of the bands without bridging over the fenestrae. On the peritoneal surface of the diaphragm the endothelial cells possess a different arrangement from that on the pleural side; on the former surface a number of lymph channels (that is, clefts between the bundles of tendon and muscle) radiate towards the middle of the central tendon. The endothelium of the free surface over these lymph channels is composed of much smaller cells than at the places between, so that the endothelium of the peritoneal surface of the diaphragm shows numbers of radiating streaks of small endothelial cells. Many of these-.small cells are not flattened, but polyhedral, and of the nature of germinating cells (Fig. 20.) The above-mentioned stomata occur amongst these small endothelial cells. 3t CHAPTER. V. - FIBROUS CONNECTIVE TISSUES. 35, By the name of “connective tissues” we desig- nate a variety of tissues which have in common with one another, that they are developed from the same embryonic elements ; that they all serve as supporting tissue or connecting substance, for nervous, muscular, glandular, and vascular tissues ; that they are capable of taking one another’s place in the different classes of animals; that in the embryo and in the growing normal and morbid condition one may be changed into the other ; that in the adult they gradually shade off one into the other ; and that they yield allied chemical products. Connective tissues are divided into the three great groups of (1) fibrous connective tissue; (2) cartilage ; (3) bone, to which may be added dentine. Each of these is subdivided into several varieties, as will appear farther on, but in all instances the ground substance, or matrix, or wntercellular substance, is - to be distinguished from the cells. In the fibrous con- nective tissue the matrix yields collagen or gelatin, and the cells are called connective tissue cells, or con- nective tissue corpuscles. In the cartilage the ground substance yields chondrin, and the cells are called car- tilage cells. In the third group the ground substance contains inorganic lime salts, intimately connected with a fibrous matrix, and the cells are called bone cells. 36. The fibrous connective tissue, or white fibrous tissue, occurs in the skin and mucous membranes, in the serous and synovial membranes, in the membranes of the brain and spinal cord, in 32 E-LEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. V. tendons and tendon sheaths, in fascize and aponeuroses, _ in the intermuscular tissue, and in the tissue con- necting neighbouring organs, &c. It consists of microscopic band-like or cylindrical bundles or fasciculi of exceedingly fine homogeneous fibrils (Fig. 22), which are known as the elementary connective tissue fibrils. Fig. 22.—Plexus of Bundles of roc Tissue from the Omentum of Rat. a, A capillary blood vessel ; 6, bundles of fibrous tissue; ¢, the connective-tissue F corpuscles; d, plasma cells, (Atlas. According to the number of these the bundles differ in size. The bundles, and also their constituent fibrils, may be of very great length—-several inches. Where the fibrous tissue forms continuous masses— as in tendon, fascia, aponeurosis, skin, and mucous membrane—the microscopic bundles are aggregated into smaller or larger groups, the trabecule, and these are again associated into groups. The fibrils are held together by an albwminous (globulin), semi-fluid, homo- geneous cement substance, which is also present between the bundles forming a trabecula. ; On adding an acid or an alkali to-a bundle of ee Chap. V.] iBRoUS CONWECTIVE TISSUES. 33 fibrous tissue, it is seen to swell up and to become glassy-looking, homogeneous, and gelatinous. Sub- jected to boiling in water, or to digestion by dilute _ acids, the bundles of fibrous tissue yield collagen or gelatin. 37. According to the arrangement of the bundles, the fibrous connective tissue varies in different locali- ties. (1) In tendons and fascize the bundles are arranged parallel to one another. (2) In the true skin and mucous, serous, and synovial membranes, in the dura mater and tendon sheaths, the, trabecule of bundles divide repeatedly, cross and interlace very intimately with one another, so that thereby a dense felt-work is produced. (3) In the subcutaneous, sub- mucous, or subserous tissue, in the intermuscular tissue, in the tissue connecting with one another different - organs or the parts of the same organ—z.e., interstitial connective tissue—the texture of the fibrous tissue is more or less loose, the trabecule dividing and re- uniting and crossing one another, but leaving between them larger or smaller spaces, cellule or areolz, so that the tissue assumes the character of a loose plexus, which is sometimes called “ areolar” or “ cel- lular tissue.” Such tissue can be more or less easily separated into larger or smaller lamellz, or plates of _ trabecule. (4) In the omentum and parts of the pleura of man, ape, dog, cat, and some rodents, and in the subarachnoidal tissue of the spinal cord and brain, the trabecule form a fenestrated membrane, with larger or smaller oval or circular holes or fenestra. 38. The connective tissue cells or corpuscles occurring in white fibrous tissue are of several varie- ties. (a) In tendon and fasciz the cells are called tendon cells or tendon corpuscles; they are flattened nucleated protoplasmic cells of a square or oblong shape (Fig. 23a), forming continuous rows (singie files), situated on the surface of groups of bundles of fibrous p—l 34 Exvemenrs or HisTovocy. [Chap. V. tissue. Between these groups are wider or narrower channels—the interfascicular spaces—running parallel with the long axis of the tendon (Fig. 238). The cells in each row are separated from one another by a narrow line of albuminous cement substance, and the round nucleus of the cell is generally situated at one end, in such a way that in two adjacent cells of the grow- ing» tendon the nuclei face each other. ‘This indicates that the indi- vidual cells undergo divi- sion, Corresponding to the margin of each row, the cells possess minute processes. The cell plate is not quite flat, but pos- sessed of one, two, or even three membranous projec- tions, by which it is wedged in between the Fig. 23a,—From a Tendon of Tai! dividual bundles of the of Mouse, showing the Tendon group to which the row cells. (The tendon is viewed in : the long axis), of cells belongs. a, The tendon cells seen from their 39. (6) In the serous broad surface ; 5, the same seen side- ways. (Handbook) membranes, cornea, subeu- taneous tissue, and loose connective tissues, the cells are flattened transparent corpuscles, each with an oblong flattened nucleus, and more or less branched and connected by their processes. In the cornea they are spoken of as the corneal cor- puscles, and are very richly branched (Fig. 25). They are situated between the lamelle of fibrous bundles of which the ground substance of the cornea consists. These corpuscles are also situated in the interfasci- cular spaces, or spaces left between the bundles of the fibrous matrix, which are cavities in the interstitial ° Chap. V.] LIBROUS CONNECTIVE TISSUES. 35 cement cementing the bundles and trabecule together (von Recklinghausen). In the cornea and serous mem- branes these spaces possess the shape of branched lacu- ne, each lacuna being the home of the body of the cell, while the branches or cana- liculi contain its o processes. These canaliculi form the channels by which neighbouring lacu- ne anastomose with one another (Fig. 26). The cell and its processes do not fill up the la- cuna and its canali- Fig.238.—From a Transverse Section through the Tendons of the Tail of a Mouse, stained with gold chloride, Several fine tendons are shown here. The dark branched corpuscles correspond to albuminous cement substance stained with gold chloride; they are the channels between the bundles of fibrous tissue, constituting the tendon, and seen here as the clear spaces in cross section. In each of these channels is a row of tendon cells—not discernible here, the long axis of these rows being parallel with the long axis of the tendon. (Handbook.) culi. In loose connective tissue the lacuna may be of considerable size, and may co Fig, 24.—From the Tail of a Tadpole. ec, Branched connective: tissue cells; m, @ Migratory cell. (Atlas.) ntain several connective cells, which make as it were a lining for it. These in some places are very little branched, and almost form a continuous endotheloid membrane of flattened cells. Such is the subepithelial endothe- lium of Debove, occur- ring underneath the epi- thelium on the surface of the mucous membrane of the bronchi, bladder, and intestines. 40. (c) In the true skin and. mucous membranes 36 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. V. the connective tissue cells are also branched flattened Fig. 25.—From the Cornea of Kitten, showing the Networks of theBranched Corneal Corpuscles. a, The network of their pro- cesses; 5, nucleus of the corpuscle. (Atlas.) cells of the skin and mucous membranes, but only in a very limited degree by those of the cornea and serous mem- branes, and somewhat better by some of those of the subcuta- neous and other loose connective tissues. In the skin and mucous membranes also the cells and their processes are situated in the in- terfascicular spaces. 41. The connec- tive tissue corpuscles corpuscles, and by their longer or shorter processes are con- nected into a network (Fig. 24). Each cell has a flattened oblong nucleus. As a rule, some of the processes are membranous prolongations coming off under an angle from the body of the cell, which is then called the chief plate, the processes being the secondary plates. By the latter the cell is wedged in | between the bundles of the tra- becula to which it belongs. This character of the cells (t.¢., possession of secondary plates) is well shown by the Fig. 26.—From the Cornea of Kitten, stained with Nitrate of Silver, show- ing the Lymph-canal System. a, The lacune, each containing the nucleated cell-body, just indicated here; 6, the canaliculi for the cell processes. Atlas.) Chap. V.] /7BROUS CONNECTIVE TISSUES. 37 hitherto mentioned are fixed corpuscles ; they do not show movement. Kiihne and Rollett ascribe to the corneal corpuscles a certain amount of contractility, in- asmuch as they are said to be capable of withdrawing their processes on stimulation. When this ceases they are said again to protrude them. According to Stricker and Norris, they acquire contractility when the corneal tissue is the seat of inflammatory irritation. It can. be shown that the connective tissue cells consist, like the endothelial plates, of a ground plate and a fibrillar reticulated (granular-looking) substance around the nucleus, and extending beyond the ground plate into the processes of the cell. 42. Pigment celis.—In the cold-blooded verte- brates, fishes, reptiles, and amphibian animals, we find certain branched nucleated connective tissue cor- puscles, distinguished by their size and by the proto- plasm both of the cell-body and processes (but not of the nucleus) being filled with pigment granules. The pigment is either grey or yellow, or more commonly dark brown or even black. These cells are called pigmented connective tissue cells, or simply pegment cells. 'They are very numerous in the skin of fishes, reptiles, and amphibian animals, and also around and between the blood-vessels of the serous membranes. They are also present in man and mammals, but then they are chiefly limited to the eye-ball, where they occur in the ' proper tissue of the iris of all but albino and bright blue eyes, and in the tissue of the choroid membrane. In dark eyes of mammals a Jarge number of these cells are found in the tissue between the sclerotic and- choroid, as the lamina fusca, and also, but to a more limited degree, in the sclerotic. As a rule they appear to be of various kinds: such as are flattened, large plates perforated by a number of small and large holes and minute clefts; such as possess a more spindle- shaped body, and long, thin, not very richly branched 38 -ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. V. processes ; and intermediate forms between the two. But on careful examination it will be seen that these Oe ae Qe" ) fr << e 3 Fig. 27.—Pigment Cells of the Tail of Tadpole. A, B, 0, D represent various states; A being a cell in an uncontracted or passive state, Dina contracted or active state. appearances are due to different states of contraction of the same kind of cells (Fig. 27). 43. In the lower vertebrates the dark pigment cells show marked contractility, inasmuch as they are capable of altogether withdrawing into their body the pigmented processes. In the passive state these are | an Chap.V.] /7BROUS CoNWNECTIVE TISSUES. . 39 exceedingly numerous, and form a network so dense that the whole mass of cells resembles an extremely close network of pigment. In the maximum of _activity the processes disappear, being withdrawn into the cell-body, which now looks like a spherical or | oblong mass of black pigment. Between the states ~ of passiveness and maximum activity there are various intermediate grades, in which the pigmented processes are of various numbers and lengths. 44, Owing to the great number of the pigment cells in the skin of fishes and amphibians, the state of contraction of these cells materially affects the colour of the skin. If the dark pigment cells of a particular part contract, the skin of this parti- cular part will become lighter and brighter, the degree of lightness and brightness depending on the degree of contraction of the pigmented processes by the cells. Briicke has shown that darkness is a stimulus to the pigmented cells ; they contract, and the skin becomes light. Sunlight leaves the pigmented cells in the passive state, 7.¢., the skin becomes dark. If pre- viously they have been contracted by darkness, on being exposed to sunlight they again return to the passive state. The contraction of the pigment cells is under the direct influence of the nervous system (Lister). ~Pouchet proved that the contractility of the pigment cells of the skin of certain fishes is influenced as a reflex action by the stimulation of the retina by ight. . ee 45, Fat cells.—Fat cells in the ripe and fully- formed state are spherical, large vesicles, each con- sisting (a) of a thin protoplasmic membrane, which at one point includes an oval nucleus flattened from side to side, and (5) of a substance, which is an oil globule filling the cavity of the vesicle (Fig. 28), These fat cells are collected together by fibrous connective tissue into smaller or larger growps, which in their 40 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY (Chap. V. turn form lobules; these again become lobes, and these make continuous masses. Each group and lobule has its afferent arteriole, one or two efferent veins, and a dense network of capillaries between ; each mesh of the capillary network holding one, two or three fat cells. (Fig. 49.) Such are the Fig. 28.—From a Preparation of the Omentum of Guinea-pig. a, An artery ; ¥, vein; c, young capillary blood-vessel ; d, fat cells. (Atias.) nature and arrangement of fatty tissue in the sub- cutaneous and submucous tissue, in the serous and synovial membranes, in the intermuscular tissue, in the loose tissue connecting organs or parts of organs. It can be shown that fat cells are derived from ordinary connective tissue cells. In some places— both in the embryo and adult—the protoplasm of the connective tissue corpuscles growing in size becomes filled with small oil globules, which, increasing in numbers, become fused with one another to larger globules ; as their size thus increases the cell nucleus becomes shifted to the periphery; ultimately one eee —— i he Chap.V.] /7BROUS CONNECTIVE TISSUES. 41 large oil globule fills the cell, and what is left of the cell protoplasm surrounds this oil globule like a membrane. The cell as a whole has become in this process many times its original size. 46. It can also be shown that where at one time only few isolated connective tissue corpuscles are present, at another time, in the natural state of growth, and especially under very favourable condi- tions of nutrition, the connective tissue cells become increased by cell-multiplication so as to form groups; these continue to increase in size and to be gra- dually furnished with their own system of blood- vessels ; the individual cells constituting the group become then converted into fat cells, and their pro- cesses are thereby lost. Individual connective tissue cells situated in the neighbourhood of small blood-vessels are converted into fat cells under favourable conditions of nutrition. In starvation the fat cells lose their oil globule, they become smaller and contain a serous fluid, which may ultimately also disappear. Finally, the fat cell may be reduced to a small, solid, protoplasmic, slightly branched cell. 47. In many places the fibrous connective tissue includes, besides the fixed cells, others which show ameeboid movement. These are of two kinds: (1) migratory or wandering cells. These are identical with colourless blood corpuscles as regards size, shape, aspect, and general nature (Fig. 24, m). They wander about through the spaces of the fibrous tissue. Some of them are slightly larger, and possess one comparatively large spherical nucleus. ‘The ameboid movement of these cells is not so distinct as in the smaller variety. (2) Plasma cells of Waldeyer. They are larger than the former, less prone to migrating, being possessed of only slight amceboid movement, which is, however, sufficiently pronounced to be detected, 42 Exvemenrs or Historocy. [Chep. V. They always contain coarse granules, which are com- posed of a substance which is not fat, but something between protoplasm and fat. They stain deeply in dyes, and the corpuscles correspond to similar “gra- nular” corpuscles of the blood. These ‘ granules” may change into fat globules, and thus the plasma cell becomes transformed into a fat cell. ~ 48. The wandering cells occur almost in all loose fibrous tissues, chiefly around or near blood-vessels ; they are not numerously met with in the healthy state, but increase greatly in the state of inflamma- tion of the part. The larger kinds are met with in certain localities only; in the sub-lingual gland of the dog and guinea-pig they occur in numbers between the gland tubes or acini. They are also found in the mucous membrane of the intestine. The plasma cells are met with chiefly in the inter- muscular tissue, in the mucous and sub-mucous tissue of the intestine, in the trabecule of the lymphatic glands, and in the omentum. 49. Development of fibrous tissue.—Fibrous connective tissue is developed from embryonic connec- tive tissue cells, z.¢., from spindle-shaped or branched nucleated protoplasmic cells of the mesoblast. The former are met with isolated or in bundles, as in the umbilical cord or embryonic tendon. The latter form a network, as in the fetal skin and mucous membrane. In both instances the protoplasm of the embryonic connective tissue cells becomes gradually transformed into a bundle of elementary fibrils, with a granular-looking interstitial substance. ‘The nucleus of the original cell finally disappears. A second mode of the formation of fibrous connective tissue is this: the embryonic connective tissue cell, while growing in substance, produces the fibrous tissue at the expense of its peripheral part. A remnant of the protoplasm persists around the nucleus. straight, but _ Chap. V.] 7BROUS CONNECTIVE TISSUES. 43 The same modes of formation of connective tissue may be also observed in the adult under normal and pathological conditions. 50. Fibrous connective tissue is in most places associated with elastic fibres or yellow elastic tissue. These are of bright aspect, of variable thickness and length, branchmg and anastomos- ing soas to form networks (Fig. 29).. They are sometimes more often twist- ed and coiled. The latter condi- tion may be ob- served when the tissue is shrunk, the former when it is stretched. They donot swell up in acids or al- kalies, nor yield gelatin on boil- ing, but contain a chemically different substance, viz., elastin. When broken their ends generally curl up. 51. Elastic fibres occur in great numbers as net- works extending between the bundles of fibrous tissue, in the skin and mucous membranes, in the serous and synovial membranes, and in the loose interstitial con- Fig. 29.—From a Preparation of the Mesentery. a, Bundles of fibrous tissue; 5, networks of elastic fibres. (Atlas.) nective tissues. They are not very commonly met with in tendons and fascie ; in the former they are seen as single fibres often twisting round the tendon bundles. Elastic fibres forming bundles, but branched and 44 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. — [Chap.V. connected into networks within the bundle, are to be found in large numbers in the walls of the alveoli of the lung, in the ligamenta flava, in the ligamentum nuche of the ox (in which the fibres are exceedingly thick cylinders), in yellow elastic car- tilage (see below), in the endocardium and valves of the heart, and in the vascular system, particularly the arterial division. In the latter organs the intima, , and also.to a great extent the media, consist of elastic fibrils densely connected into a network. 52. The following are special morphological modi- fications of the elastic fibres: (a) elastic fenestrated membranes of Henle, as met with in the intima of the big arteries; these are in reality networks of fibres with very small meshes, and the fibres unusually broad and flat. (b) Homogeneous. elastic membranes, which surround, as a delicate sheath, the connective tissue trabecule in some localities, ¢.¢., subcutaneous tissue. (c) Homogeneous-looking elastic membranes in the cornea, behind the anterior epithe- lium as Bowman’s anterior elastic membrane, and at the back of the cornea as elastica posterior, or Descemet’s membrane ; in the latter bundles of minute fibrils have been observed. (d) Elastic trabecule forming a network, as in the ligamentum pectinatum iridis. In the embryonic state the elastic fibres are nucleated, the nuclei being the last remnants of the cells from which the fibres develop, one cell generally giving origin to one fibre. These nucleated fibres are called Henle’s nucleated fibres. 53, Special varieties of fibrous connective tissue are these : (1) Adenoid reticulum. This is a network of fine fibrils, or plates, forming the matrix of lymphatic or adenoid tissue. (See Lymphatic glands.) The reticulum is not fibrous connective tissue nor elastic tissue; it contains nuclei in the young state, and is derived from Chap. VI.] CARTILAGE. 45 a network of branched cells; but in the adult state the reticulum itself possesses no nuclei. Those found on it do not form an essential part of it. (2) The neuroglia of Virchow is a dense network of very fine homogeneous fibrils which form the sup- porting tissue for the nervous elements in the central nervous system. These fibrils are supposed to be elastic fibres (Gerlach). Embedded in the network of these fibres are found branched nucleated flattened cell plates, which are the proper connective tissue cells. (3) Gelatinous tissue. This occurs chiefly in she embryo, being the unripe state of fibrous connective tissue. It consists of spindle-shaped or branched connective tissue cells, separated from one another by a homogeneous transparent mucoid sub- stance. It is met with in the umbilical cord and in the cavity of the middle ear of the embryo, and in the places where fibrous connective tissue is to be developed. After birth it is found in the tissue of the pulp of the teeth, and in some places as precursor of fat tissue. CHAPTER VL. CARTILAGE. 54, Cartilage consists of a firm ground substance which yields chondrim, and of cells embedded in it. Most cartilages (except on the articulating surface) are covered on their free surface with a membrane of fibrous connective tissue with a few elastic fibrils. This membrane is supplied with blood-vessels, lym- phatics, and nerves, and is of essential importance for the life and growth of the cartilage. This is the peri chondrium. There are three varieties of cartilage. 46 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. VI. 55. (1) Hyaline cartilage (Fig. 304). This occurs or: the articular surfaces of all bones ; on the borders of many short bones ; in the sternal part of the ribs, as costal cartilages ; ‘at the margin of the sternum, scapula, and os ileum ; in the rings of the trachea, the cartilages of the bronchi, the septum and lateral carti- lages of the nose; and in the thyroid and cricoid cartilages of the larynx. The ground substance is hyaline, 2.¢., transparent, like ground - glass, and firm. The cells are spherical or ova! proto- plasmic corpuscles, each with one or two nuclei. Fig. 30a.— Hyaline Cartilage ivigl Woven tea They undergo division, In the hyaline ground substance are seen the cartilage cells enclosed in spring are at first close capsules. 7 together (half-moon-like in optical section), they gradually grow-wider apart by the deposit of hyaline ground substance between . them. The cells are contained in cavities called the cartilage lacune. Each cell generally occupies one lacuna, but according to the state of division a lacuna * may contain two, four, six, or eight cartilage cells; the latter are those cases in which division proceeds at a more rapid rate than the deposition or formation of hyaline ground substance between the cells. The part of the cartilage next to the perichondrium shows mostactivegrowth ; hencethecellsareheresmailer, closer together, and there is less ground substance. Each lacuna is lined by a delicate membrane, and, according to the state of the cell, is either com-— pletely or partially filled out by it. This membrane is called the capsule (Fig. 304). In many cartilages, especially in growing cartilage, it is thickened by the ad- and although the two off- a Chap. VI.] > CARTILAGE. 47 dition of a layer or layers of hyaline ground substance ; this is the most recently-formed part of the matrix, but is still distinct from the rest of the ground sub- stance. 56.- In some places, especi- ally in articular cartilage (Till- manns, Baber), bundles of fine connective tissue _ fibrils may be noticed in the hyaline gs round sub- Fig. 308.—From a Preparation of the Sternal stance. Cartilage of a Newt. 57. In some The lacune, poe Bg centilage cells, anastomose cartilages, the protoplasm of the cell becomes filled with fat globules (Fig. 30c). This fact may be observed in many normal cartilages ; sometimes the fat globules become confluent into one large drop, and then the cell has the appearance of a fat cell. In age, disease, and defi- cient nutrition, lime salts are deposited in the ground substance, beginning from the circumference of the cells. The earthy matter appears in the shape Fig. 300.—Three Car. of opaque granules, or irregular or with Fat Droplets. angular granules. The ground sub- cartilage of the stance thereby loses its transparency, Guinea-pig. becomes opaque in transmitted, white © . in reflected, light, and, of course, very hard and brittle. This process is the calcification of cartilage. It is also met with in cartilage that is to be ~ + 48 - ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. VI. replaced by bone, being the precursor of the formation of bone, as in the embryo (see below), and at the. growing ends of long bones. 58. The multiplication of the cartilage cells has been observed during life by Schleicher arid Flemming. It takes place after the mode of karyokinesis. The lacune of the cartilage are not isolated cavities, but are connected with one another by fine channels (Fig. 308), so that the ground substance is easily permeable by the current of nutritive fluid. These channels and lacunze make one intercommunicating system, and are - connected with the lymphatics of the perichondrium (Budge). Formed matter, as pigment granules, red and white blood corpuscles, and pus corpuscles, may | ~ also find its way into the channels and lacune of the cartilage from the perichondrium. At the borders of articular cartilage, where it is joined to the synovial membrane and the capsule of the joint, the cartilage cells are more or less branched, and pass insensibly into the branched connective tissue cells of the membrane. In feetal hyaline cartilage many of the cells are spindle-shaped or branched. 59. In the cartilage separating the bone of the apophyses from the end of the diaphysis of tubular bones, there is a peculiar hyaline cartilage, known as the intermediate or ossifying. Its cells’ are arranged in characteristic vertical rows, owing to the continued division of the cells in a transverse direction. Cartilages, or parts of cartilages, in which the cells are very closely placed, owing to the absence, or scanty deposit and formation, of ground selene are called parenchymatous or cellular. 60. (2) Fibro-cartilage, or connective ee car- tilage, occurs as the intervertebral discs, as the inter- articular cartilages, sesamoid cartilages, and as that forming the margin of a fossa glenoidalis, J¢ consists of fibrous connective tissue arranged in bundles, and these Chap. VI.] CARTILAGE. 49 again in layers. The ground substance of this carti- lage is said (?) to yield chondrin and not. gelatin. Be- tween the strata of the fibrous bundles are rows of more or less flattened oval protoplasmic nu- cleated cells, each invested in a deli- cate capsule(Fig.31). They are less flat- tened than the cells of tendon, and the capsule distinguishes thetwo. Where fibro- cartilage passes into tendinous tissue, the two kinds of cells pass aa ee into one another. as bees Fig. 32.—From a Section through the Epiglottis. a, Perichondrium ;° d, networks of elastic fibrils surrounding the carti- lage cells. (Atlas.) E—1 Fig. 31.—Fibro-Cartilage of an heroes tebral Ligament. Showing —_ bundles of fibrous tissue and rows of cartilage cells. (Atlas.) (3) Yellow, ela ae ec cartilage. This variety is also called or ‘reticular ; it occurs in’ the epiglottis, in the external ear, inthe Eustachian tube, in the cartilages of Wris- berg and Santorini in the larynx. In the early stage this kind is hyaline. Gradually numbers. of elastic fibrils make their appearance, growing into the cartilage matrix from the perichondrium in a more or less vertical direc- tion, and branching and anastomosing with one 50° ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. |Chap. VII. another. The final stage is reached when the ground substance is permeated by a dense network of elastic fibrils (Fig. 32), so arranged that spherical or oblong spaces are left, each of which contains one or two cartilage cells, surrounded by a smaller or larger zone - of hyaline ground substance, CHAPTER VIL BONE, 62. Bong, as osseous substance, is associated with several other soft tissues to form a bone in the ana- tomical sense of the word. | (a) The periosteum.—Except at the articular surfaces, and where bones are joined with one another by ligaments or cartilage, all bones are covered with a vascular membrane of fibrous connective tissue. This is the periosteum. It consists in most instances of an outer fibrous layer, composed of bundles of fibrous tissue densely aggregated, and an wer, or osteogenetic layer, which is of loose texture, consisting of a mesh- work of thin bundles of fibrous tissue, in which nu- merous blood-vessels and many protoplasmic cells are contained. The blood-vessels form by their capillaries a network, The cells are spheroidal or oblong, each with one spherical or oval nucleus. They have to form bone-substance, and are therefore called the osteo- blasts (Gegenbaur). (6) The cartilage is hyaline cartilage, and its distribution on and connection with bone have been mentioned above on pp. 46 and 48. 63. (c) The marrow of bone is a soft vascular ' tissue, filling up all spaces and cavities. It consists Pagani se Chap. VII.] Bone. 3 ey of a very small amount of fibrous tissue as a matrix, and in it are embedded numerous blood-vessels and_cells. The few afferent arterioles break up into-a dense net work of capillaries, and these are continued as plexuses of veins, characterised by their size and exceedingly thin walls. The cells are of the same size, aspect, and shape as the osteoblasts of the osteogenetic tissue, and they are called marrow cells. In origin and structure, the tissue of the osteo- genetic layer of the periosteum and the marrow are identical. In the embryo, the marrow is derived from an ingrowth of the osteogenetic layer of the periosteum (see below), and also in the adult the two tissues remain directly continuous. As will be shown later, the marrow at the growing ends of the bones is concerned in the new formation of osseous substance in the same way as the osteogenetic layer of the peri- osteum is in that of the surface; and in both tissues the highly vascular condition and the cells (osteoblasts of the osteogenetic layer, and marrow cells of the marrow) are the important elements in this bone formation. Marrow is of two kinds, according to the condition of the cells. If many or most of these are transformed into fat cells, it bas a yellowish aspect, and is called yellow marrow ; if few or none of them have undergone this change, it looks red, and is called red marrow. In the central, or marrow, cavity of the shaft of tubular bones, and in the spaces of some spongy bones, the marrow is yellow; at the ends of the shaft, in the spongy bone substance in general, and in young growing bones, it is red. The cells, especially those of red marrow, are the elements from which normally vast numbers of red blood-corpuscles are formed, as has been mentioned on a former page. In marrow, particularly in red marrow, we meet with huge multi-nucleated cells, called Myeloplaxes of 52 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. . (Chap. VII. Robin. They are derived by overgrowth from ordinary — marrow cells, and are of importance for the absorption and formation of bone (see below). According to Heitzmann, Malassez, and others, they also have to do with the formation of blood-vessels and_blood- corpuscles. 64. The matrix of osseous substance is dense fibrous connective tissue, 2.¢., a tissue yielding gelatin on boiling. The cement substance between the fibrils is petrified, owing to a deposit of insoluble inorganic lime salts, chiefly carbonates and phosphates. These can be dissolved out by strong acids (hydrochloric) and are thereby converted into soluble salts. Thus the organic matrix of osseous substance—called ossewm —may be obtained as a soft flexible material, easily cut. The bone substance is in the adult state generally lamellated, the lamelle being of microscopic thinness. | Between every two lamelle are num- yz bers of isolated; S= flattened, oblong spaces—the bone lacune (Fig. 33), which anastomose by numerous fine canals with one another, and also = *= with those of the Fig. 33.—Osseous Lamelle; oblong branched next lamella above a and canaliculi between them. and _ below. The appearances are very similar to those presented by the lacune and canaliculi containing the corneal corpuscles, as des- cribed in Chapter V. ; These bone lacune and their canaliculi are the lymph- _ Ny pgm \Y t) Se NX y m \ aN Y Ns 62 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. VII. centre of this as a nucleated protoplasmic remnant, which gradually becomes branched and transformed into a bone cell. The osseous matrix is at first a soft fibrillar tissue, but is gradually and uniformly im- pregnated with lime salts. This impregnation always starts from the centre of ossification. - 76. Wherever absorption of calcified cartilage or of osseous substance is going on, we meet with the multi- nucleated huge protoplasmic cells, called the myelo- plaxes of Robin. Kdlliker showed them to be impor- tant for the absorption of bone matrix, and called them therefore Osteoclasts (Fig. 37). For cartilage they ~ may be called Chondroclasts. When concerned in the absorption we find these myeloplaxes situated in | smaller or larger pits, which seem to have been pro- duced by them ; these absorption pits or lacunz on the surface of bones are called Howship’s lacune. They invariably contain numbers of osteoclasts. It can, however, be shown that myeloplaxes are also con- cerned in the formation of bone, by giving origin to a number of new osseous zones with their bone cells. In the earliest stages of development of the fcetal jaw this process is seen with great distinctness (Fig. 37). 77. Demtine forms the chief part of a tooth. It consists of a petrified matrix, in which are numbers of perpendicularly-arranged canals—the dentinal tubes— containing the dentinal fibres. It is in some respects similar to bone, although differing from it in certain essentials. It is similar, inasmuch as it is developed in like manner by some peculiarly transformed Satay ene] ocetmae xe tissue—viz., by the tissue of the embryo tooth papilla—and inasmuch as cells are con- cerned in the production both of the petrified matrix (impregnated with lime salts), and of the processes of the cells contained in its canals— the dentinal fibres, The details of structure and distribution will be described in connection with the teeth, - 63 CHAPTER VIII. NON-STRIPED MUSCULAR TISSUE. 78. Tus tissue consists of nucleated cells, which, unlike amceboid cells, are contractile in one definite direction, becoming shorter and thicker during con- traction. The cells are elongated, spindle-shaped, or band-like (Fig. 38a), and drawn out at each extremity into a longer or shorter, .generally single but occasionally branched, tapering process, Each cell includes an oval nucleus, Fig. 38a.—Non-striped Muscular Fibres, isolated. The cross-markings indicate corrugations of the elastic sheath of the individual fibres. (Atlas.) which is flattened if the cell it belongs to is flattened. The cell-substance is a pale homogeneous-looking or longitudinally striated substance. During extreme contraction the nucleus may be- come more or less plicated, so that its outline becomes wavy or zig-zag. _ It has been shown by Klein in certain preparations, e.g., the non-striped muscle cells of the mesentery of the newt, that each muscle cell consists of a delicate 64 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. VIII. elastic sheath, inside of which is a bundle of minute Jibrils, which cause the longitudinal striation of the.cell. These fibrils are the contractile portion ; and they are contractile towards the nucleus, with whose intranu- clear reticulum they are intimately connected. When — the cell is contracted its sheath becomes transversely corrugated (Fig. 38s). 79. The non-striped muscular cells are aggregated into smaller or larger bundles by an interstitial albu- Fig. 388.—A Non-striped Muscular Cell of Mesentery of Newt. Showing several places where the muscular substance appears contracted, ee ts At these places the corrugations of the sheath are marked. (Atlas. minous homogeneous cement substance, the cells being imbricated with their extremities. The bundles may form a plexus, or they may be aggregated by fibrous connective tissue into larger or smaller groups, and these again into continuous masses or membranes. In the muscular coat of the bladder, in the choroidal portion of the ciliary muscle, in the arrector pili, in the muscular tissue of the scrotum, very well marked | plexuses of bundles of non-striped muscular cells may be met with. In the muscularis mucose of the stomach and intestines, in the outer muscular coat of the same organs, in the uterus, bladder, &c., occur continuous membranes of non-striped muscular tissue. When the muscular cells form larger bundles they are more or less pressed against one another, and, therefore, in a cross section appear of a polygonal outline. | 80. Non-striped muscular tissue is found in the following places: in the muscularis mucose of the cesophagus, stomach, small and large intestine ; in the Chap. VIII.) JVOW-STRIPED MuscuLaR Tissvz. 65 outer muscular coat of the lower two-thirds or half of the human cesophagus ; in that of the stomach, small and large intestine; in the tissue of the pelvis and outer capsule of the kidney; in the muscular coat of the ureter, bladder, and urethra; in the tubules of the epididymis, in the vas de- ferens, vesicule seminalis and prostate ; in the corpora caver- nosa, and spongiosa; in the tissue of the ovary, and in the broad ligament; in the mus- cular coat of the oviduct, the uterus and vagina; in the posterior part of the wall of the trachea; in the large and Fig. s92—Frem a Transverse small bronchi, in the alveolar of Non- striped: Muscular ducts and infundibula of the .. meon. See ae lung; in the pleura pulmonalis RPh he The ts (guinea-pig) ; in the peritoneum —fhiadie the small pues to the of the frog and newt, in the Gai (Atay) “"® ™" upper part of the upper eye-lid, Lag and in the fissura orbitalis; in the sphincter and dilatator pupille, and the ciliary muscle; in the capsule and trabeculee of the spleen, and the trabeculee of some of the lymphatic glands; in the arrectores pilorum, and sweat glands of the skin, the tunica dartos of the scrotum ; in the tissue of the nipple of the breast; in the large ducts of the salivary and pancreatic glands; and in the muscular coat of the gall bladder, the hepatic and cystic duct. The aorta and the arteries have a larger amount of non-striped muscular tissue, the veins and lymphatics less. 8l. As regards length, the eee} cells vary within considerable limits (from 75 to =} of an inch), those of the intestine, stomach, respiratory, urinary, and genital organs being very long, as compared with those of the blood-vessels, which are sometimes only rF—|] 66 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. IX. twice or thrice as long as they are broad, and at the same time branched at their extremities. Non-striped muscular tissue is richly supplied with blood-vessels, the capillaries forming oblong meshes, though their number is not so great as in striped muscle. The nerves of non-striped muscle are all derived from the sympathetic ; their distribution and termination will be described in a future chapter. CHAPTER IX. STRIPED MUSCULAR TISSUE. 82. Tus tissue is composed of extremely long (up to 14-2 inches) more or less cylindrical fibres, of a diameter varying between z4, to zi, of an inch; they appear transversely striated. These are the striped muscular fibres.. They are held together by delicate ective tissue cells—endomystwm—so as to form -\ bundles of fibrous connective tissue, with the ordinary ex \S on 4 largér.or smaller bundles ; these again are aggregated together by stronger bands and septa of fibrous con- nective tissue—perimysium—into groups, and these into the fasciculi or bundles of an anatomical muscle. The fibrous connective tissue, including the perimysium tissue, is the carrier of the larger vascular and nervous branches. The endomysium contains the capillaries, which form very rich networks with elongated meshes, and are always situated between the individual muscle fibres. The capillaries and veins appear very wavy and twisted in the contracted bundles, and straighter in the uncontracted bundles. The small vessels are provided here and there with peculiar saccu- lar dilatations, which act as a sort of safety receptacles Chap. IX.) Sz7rrPED MuscutarR TIssve. 67 for the blood when, during a sudden maximal contrac- tion, it is pressed out from some of the capillaries. 83. Each muscular fibre during contraction be- comes shorter and thicker. In the living uninjured muscular fibres, spontaneously or after the application of a stimulus, a contraction starts at one point and passes over the whole muscular fibre like a wave— contraction wave-—the progress of which is noticeable by the thickening, gradually and rapidly, shifting along the fibre, the part behind resumingits previous diameter. 84. When looked at in the fresh state, or after the action of certain re-agents, the muscular fibre shows the following fora (Fig. 40): (1) a transparent ho- (TT wu mogeneous deli- te hg a LT), colons 2) I ml aa dark delicate lines stretching across the fibre at regular inter- vals, so as to sub-divide the space within the sarcolemma 7 ’ — uy into uniform i 8 transverse com- see B partments, the A b muscular com- Fig. 40.—Striped Muscular Fibres of the Water- partments of eetle (Hydrophilus). a, Sarcolemma; 6, Krause’s membrane. The sarcous Krause. These "elements are well seen. In A the oblong nuclei of 7 the muscle-corpuscles are shown. In B the sarco- dark lines are lemma has become unnaturally raised from the mus- cular contents. The contractile discs are well shown ; the membranes 80 also are the sarcous elements. (Atlas.) of Krause. Un- der a high power they seem permeated or broken up by 68 LE[LEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap, IX. a great number of fine, clear, longitudinal lines (see be- low), and therefore under these.conditions seem to be made up of one row of granules. The membranes of Krause appear fixed to the sarcolemma, so that while a fibre contracts, or while it is contracted or shrunk, owing to the action of hardening re-agents, or merely in consequence of being detached from its fixations, its surface is not smooth, but regularly and transversely undulating, the valleys being caused by the attachment of the membranes of Krause to the sarcolemma. On stretching a fibre beyond its natural passive state, the surface becomes also uneven and undulating, but in a reverse manner from the above. 85. These two membranous structures represent, as it were, the framework. In the muscular com: partments is contained the muscular substance, which again consists of (a) the contractile or chief substance (Rollett), which is a dim, broad, highly refractive, doubly refractive disc, occupying the greater part of a compartment, except a thinner or thicker layer at the side of Krause’s membrane. This layer is (6) a trans- parent homogeneous fluid substance, forming the /ateral disc of Engelmann, or the secondary substance of Rollett. It is isotropous. In this lateral dise occa- sionally a transverse row of granules appears present, but this is by no means of constant occurrence. The contractile disc seems homogeneous, but is in reality composed of prismatic or rod-shaped elements, the sar- cous elements of Bowman, each being as long as the con- tractile disc. They are very close together, but there is left between them in the fresh and living state an ex- ceedingly minute layer of a homogeneous transparent interstitial substance, identical with that of the Jateral disc. After death and shrinking of the sarcous elements, this interstitial substance is more marked, and is then easily perceived as longitudinal clear lines separating the sarcous elements in the indi- SS — —_ Chap. 1X.] S7RIPED MuscuLaR Tissve. 69 vidual compartments. The total appearance pro- duced is that of longitudinal striation, the sarcous ele- ments of successive compartments forming fibrils— called the primitive fibrils. Sometimes in hardened muscular fibres the substance of the sarcous elements shows a middle transparent portion for the whole contractile disc; this appears to form a distinct median transparency, known as the median disc of Hensen. 86. Of course, each such fibril is a successive row of sarcous elements, with the corresponding portion of Krause’s membranes, and the adjacent portions of the lateral discs. Generally, each fibril is thinnest at the point of Krause’s membrane and lateral discs, and thicker at the part corresponding to the sarcous ele- ments, so that in reality it is of a moniliform shape (Haycraft). This varicose condition is the more appa- - rent the shorter and thicker the individual sarcous elements are (Fig. 43a, B and c). These differentiations due to structure alone are sufficient to produce a transverse striation of the mus- cular fibres; but it must be borne in mind that a fibre when contracted or shrunk, even in the smallest degree, would show a transverse striation due to the above- mentioned undulating surface. Any other fibre with a moniliform shape would show the same - transverse striation (Haycraft) ; and that usually observed on hardened—.e., shrunk and more or less contracted— fibres, may be accounted for in this way. Fibres stretched or prevented from shrinking generally show pronounced longitudinal striation, but also very faint cross strie; these latter are due to the structural differences. 87. On observing a transverse section through a fresh and living muscular fibre, the muscular substance inside the sarcolemma appears as a transparent ground- glass-like substance, crossed here and there by bright / 70 Exremuents or Hrsrovocy. [Chap. IX, lines. ‘These lines gradually increase in number, and to join that ultimately they form a dense network. Thus a more or less regular pattern of small polygonal fields is produced, which are styled Cohnheim’s areas or fields (Fig. 41). Each corre- sponds to the end-view or optical section of a sarcous element prism, and is granu- lar, as if composed of a bundle of minute fibrils. If this be the case, each be considered as a bundle of rods. The bright lines | producing the Cohnheim’s Fig. 41. — Striped Muscular fields are the interstitial Fibres in Cross Section, substance. When a muscle “foun the muscu, etbecing, | Dre, shrinks, ‘after death eee tatlan? or after some hardening re- agents, Cohnheim’s | fields shrink into small circular areas, separated by a rela-- tively large amount of the interstitial substance. 88. During contraction the cross striation is much narrower, the dim disc becoming shorter in the long diameter of the fibre, but broader in the transverse direction. : The broader the lateral disc in a fibre, the more apart from one another are the dim or contractile discs. On the surface of the substance of the muscle fibres, but within the sarcolemma, are seen isolated oblong nuclei, which belong to small protoplasmic, more or less branched corpuscles—the muscle cor- puscles. In the adult fibres these are few and far between ; in the young and growing fibres they are numerous and large. Their protoplasm is the sub- stance which, becoming converted into the muscular . sarcous element will have to ~ — Chap. IX.] S7RIPED MuscutarR TIssve. 71 substance, is the material at the expense of which new fibres are formed, or fibres already formed become thickened, as is the case when muscle fibres are kept at constant work. In the muscular fibres of man and most verte- brates (except the fibres of the heart), the muscular corpuscles are situated on the surface of the muscular substance ; but in invertebrates (especially insects and crustacea) they are often found in the central part of the fibres, and here they are occasionally seen forming almost a continuous cylindrical mass of nu- cleated protoplasmic cells. 89. In the embryo the muscular fibres are de- veloped from spindle-shaped nucleated cells (Remak, Weissmann, Kélliker). One spindle-shaped cell with an oval nucleus grows rapidly in length and thick- ness, its nucleus divides repeatedly, and the offspring Fig. 42.—A Striped Muscular Fibre of the Diaphragm of a Guinea-pig. The muscle-corpuscles are much increased in size and numbers; they are probably here for the new formation of muscular substance. (Atlas.) become shifted from one another as the cell con- tinues to grow in length. The protoplasmic sub- stance all along one side of the cell gives origin to the muscular substance—sarcous elements and lateral disc—while a small rest of proteplasm remains col- lected around the nucleus as the muscle corpuscle. This protoplasm continues to increase in amount, 72 Exrements or Hisrorocy. [Chap. IX. and then the increment again changes into muscular substance (Fig. 42), In this way the muscular fibre increases in thickness, Thus one spindle-shaped embryo cell gives rise to one muscular fibre, which, at first very slender, continues to grow in thickness by the active growth of the muscle corpuscles. The sarcolemma appears to be formed from cells other than muscle cells, 90. The striped muscular fibres, taken as a whole, are, as a rule, spindle-shaped, becoming gradually thinner towards their ends. They are branched in some excep- tional cases—e.g., in the tongue; here the extremities of the muscle fibres, passing in a transverse direction into #ie<--4 the mucous membrane, become richly # Gos branched. : 91. Muscular fibres terminate in tendons, either by the whole fibre passing into a bundle of connective tissue fibrils (Fig. 43), or by the fibre ending abruptly with a blunt, conical end, and becoming here fixed to a bundle of connective tissue fibrils. The individual fibres have only, as has been mentioned above, a limited length, so that, following .a fasciculus from one point of its insertion to the other, we find some muscle fibres Fibrous Tis. terminating, others originating. This Teanination in takes place in the following way: the fendon (Hand- contents of a fibre suddenly terminate, while the sarcolemma, as a fine thread, becomes interwoven with the fine connective tissue between the muscular fibres. 92. The striped muscular fibres of the heart (auricles and ventricles) and of the cardiac ends of the large veins (the pulmonary veins included) differ vai al blll Chap. IX.] S7RiPED MuscuLaR TISSUE. 73 from other striped muscular fibres in the following respects :—(1) They possess no distinct sarcolemma. (2) Their muscle corpuscles are in the centre of the fibres, and more numerous than in ordinary fibres. (3) They are very richly branched, each fibre giving off all along its course short branches, or continually divid- ing into smaller fibres and form- ing a close net- work (Fig.43a.) A transverse section through a bundle of such fibres shows, therefore, their cross sections irregular in shape and size. (4) Each nucleusof a muscle corpuscle occupies the centre of one prismatic portion ; each fibre and its branches thus appear composed of a single row of pig, 434 Striped Muscular Fibres of the such prismatic portions, and they *,Stowine the branchine of the abv and thet seem separated priaitive fibritiss : one! primitive Abrilla from one another = ™°re highly magnified. —at any rate in an early stage—by a septum of a transparent substance. 93. Some muscular fibres are either markedly pale or markedly red (Ranvier);: in the former (e.7., quadratus lumborum, or adductor magnus femoris of rabbit) the transverse striation is more distinct and the muscular corpuscles less numerous, than in the latter (e¢g., semi-tendinosus of rabbit, 74 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. X. diaphragm). Here the longitudinal striation appears very distinct, but these differences are not constant in other muscular fibres of other animals or of man (E. Meyer). 94, Briicke has shown that — muscular fibres are doubly refractive or anisotropous, like uniaxial positive crystals (rock crystal), the optical axis coin- ciding with the long axis of the fibres. The lateral dise and interstitial substance are isotropous, the sar- -cous elements (Briicke) and Krause’s membrane (Engelmann) are doubly refractive. The sarcous ele- ments are, however, not the ultimate optical elements, but must be considered as composed of hypothetical disdiaclasts, the real doubly refractive elements (Briicke). CHAPTER X. THE HEART AND BLOOD-VESSELS. 95. (A) Tue heart consists of an outer serous covering (the visceral pericardiwm), an inner lining (the endocardium), and between the two the muscular wall (Fig. 44). Underneath the pericardium and en- docardium is loose connective tissue, called subperi- cardial and subendocardial respectively. The free surface of both the pericardium and endocardium has an endothelial covering, like other serous membranes, 7.¢., a single layer of transparent nucleated cell plates of a more or less polygonal or irregular shape. The ground-work of these two mem- branes is fibrous connective tissue, forming a dense texture, and in addition there are many elastic fibres composing networks. Capillary blood-vessels, lymphatic Chap. X.] Zwe HzART AND BLOOD-VESSELS. 15 vessels, and small branches of nerve-fibres are met with everywhere. The subpericardial and subendo- cardial tissues consist of loosely connected trabeculee of fibrous connective tissue, continuous with the intermuscular connective tissue of the muscular part of the heart. The former contains in many places groups 9 === SSS of fat cells. ' = —=S 96. On the free AS surface of the papil- lon we | S60 lary muscles, in some @S\ Fase parts of the surface of the _ trabecule carne, and at the insertion of the valves, the endocar- dium is thickened by tendinous con- nective tissue. The valves themselves are folds of the en- docardium, and con- tain fibrous connec- Fig. 44.—Transverse Section through the tive tissue, to whi ch, anee rd 8 Heart of a Cait. : . a, Endothelium lining the endocardium; 8, en- especially in the docardium; ¢, muscular bundles cut trans- semilunar valves, dinally; of pericardial covering, ne numerous’ elastic fibres are added. The muscular tissue of the wall of the auricle penetrates a short way into the auriculo- ventricular valves. All the cordee tendinese and the valves are of course covered on their free surfaces with endothelium. Special tracts of muscle fibres occur in the sub- endocardial tissue. The fibres of Purkinje are peculiar fibres occurring in the subendocardial tissue in some mammals and 76 ELEMENTS OF HisTOLocy. [Chap. X. birds (not in man). They are thin, transversely striped, muscular fibres, the central part of which is a con- tinuous mass of protoplasm, with nuclei at regular intervals, the same as is the case with some skeletal muscular fibres of insects. 97. The muscular fibres forming the proper wall of the heart, the structure of which has been described in the previous chapter, are grouped in bundles separated by vascular fibrous connective tissue. In the ventricles the bundles are aggregated into more or less distinct lamelle. Like other striped muscular fibres, those of the wall of the heart are richly supplied with blood-vessels aud lymphatics. The endocardium and valves and the pericardium possess their own systems of capillaries. The lymphatics form a pericardial and an endo- cardial network, the muscular substance of the heart having numerous lymphatics in the shape of lymph spaces between the muscular bundles, and also typical networks of tubular lymphatics. - : : 98. The nerve branches of the plexus cardiacus form rich plexuses. In connection with some of them are found numerous collections of ganglion cells or ganglia. ‘These are very numerous in the nerve . plexus of the auricular septum of the frog’s heart (Lud- wig, Bidder), and in the auriculo-ventricular septum of the frog (Dogiel). In man and mammals numerous ganglia are found on the subpericardial nerve branches, chiefly at the point of junction of the large veins with the heart, and at the boundary between the auricles and the ventricles. 99. (B) The arteries (Fig. 45) consist of: (a) an endothelval layer lining the lumen of the vessel ; (6) an intima consisting of elastic tissue; (c) a media, con- » taining a large proportion of non-striped muscular cells arranged chiefly in a transverse, ¢.¢., circular, manner ; and (d) an adventitia composed chiefly of fibrous — Chap. X.] ZHE HEART AND BLOOD-VESSELS. 77 connective tissue, with an admixture of networks oi elastic fibres. (a) The endothelium is a continuous single layer of flattened elon- e. gated cell plates. 1... (6) The inti. ma in the aorta and large arteries is a@ very com- plex structure, consisting of an innermost layer of fibrous con- nective tissue, which is the “inner longitu- dinal Jibrous layer” of Remak, outside of which isa more or less ii sua ed aGmnaemON aS long itudinally "Fig. 45.—From a Transverse Section through arranged elastic the Inferior Mesenteric Artery of the Pig. memabrans;: This » # Rag re avout tia with nuseriea Onesie ait is laminated, and _ cut in transverse section. (Atlas.) composed of biti Jenestrated elastic membranes of Henle. (See page 44.) The larger the artery the thicker the intima. In microscopic arteries the intima is a thin fenestrated membrane, the fibres having distinctly a longitudinal arrangement, (c) The media is the chief layer of the wall of the arteries (Fig. 46). It consists of transversely arranged elastic lamelle (fenestrated membranes and networks of elastic fibres), and between them smaller or larger bundles of circularly arranged muscular cells. The larger the artery the more elastic tis- sue is there present in the media, the smaller 78 Exements or Hisrotocy. [Chap. X. the artery the more muscular tissue. In micro- scopic branches of arteries the media consists almost entirely of cir- cular non-striped muscle cells with only few. elas- tic fibres. 100. In the last branches of the micro- scopic arteries, the mus- cular media becomes dis- continuous, inasmuch as the (circular) muscular cells are arranged not as a continuous membrane, but as groups of small cells (in a single layer) in a more or less alter- nate fashion. When the media contracts, the intima is thrown into longitudinal SSSA folds. “Seusor The aorta has, in the Fig. 46,—Transverse Section through innermost and in the the Epislovis ofe chia, "" '™ outermost parts of the —— A, The artery, showing the nucleated media, numbers of lon- endothelium, the circular muscular gitudinal and oblique media, and at a the fibrous-tissue adven- ttias the rein. showing the same rouscle cells. Accord- than in the artery. (Atlas.) ing to Bardeleben, all large and middle-sized arteries have an inner longitudinal muscular coat. 101. Between the media and the next outer layer there is, in larger and middle-sized arteries, a special elastic membrane, the elastica externa of Henle. .(d) The adventitia is a relatively thin fibrous con- © nective tissue membrane. In large and middle-sized arteries there are numbers of elastic fibres present, Chap. X.] ZHE HEART AND BLOOD-VESSELS. 79 especially in the part next to the media; they form networks, and have chiefly a longitudinal direction. The larger the artery the more insignificant is the adventitia as compared with the thickness of media. ’ In microscopic arteries (Fig. 47), the adventitia is represented by thin bundles of fibrous connective tissue and branched | connective tissue cells. Large and middle-sized arteries pos- sess their own system of blood-vessels (vasa vasorum), situated chiefly in the adventitia and media; lymphatic vessels and lymphatic clefts are also present in these coats. 102. (c) The veims differ from the arteries in the greater thinness of their wall. The intima and media are similar to those of arteries, only thinner, both absolutely and relatively. The media |S! contains in most veins circularly ar- Fig., 47. — Minute ranged muscular fibres ; they form a con- Arte tinuous layer, as in the arteries, and “intima; m, musow there is between them generally more posed of "8 single ° ° , ° yer of fibrous connective tissue than’ elastic. ly-arranged y non- The adventitia is usually the thickest coat, eats adventitia _and it consists chiefly of fibrous connec- tive tissue (Fig. 46). The smallest veins—zi.e., before passing into the capillaries—are composed of a lining endothelium, and outside this are delicate bundles of connective tissue forming an adventitia. The valves of the veins are folds, consisting of the endothelium lining the surface, of the whole intima, and of part of the muscular media. 103. There are many veins that have no muscular - fibres at all, e.g., vena jugularis—interna and externa —the vena subclavia, the veins of the bones and M:1.€ Vir YARN?) - Peet \ D1 80 ELcements oF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. X. retina, and of the membranes of the brain and cord. Those of the gravid uterus have only longitudinal muscular fibres. The vena cava, azygos, hepatica, spermatica interna, renalis and axillaris, possess an inner circular and an outer longitudinal coat. The vena iliaca, cruralis, poplitea, mesenterica, and umbilicalis possess an inner and outer longitudinal and a middle circular muscular coat. The intima of the vene pulmonales in man is connective tissue containi circular bundles of non-striped muscular cells (Stieda). 104. The trunk of the venze pulmonales and ven cave possesses striped muscular fibres, these being continuations of the muscular tissue of the auricles. 105. Hoyer showed that a direct communication exists between arteries and veins without the inter- vention of capillaries—as in the matrix of the nail, in the tip of the nose and ‘tail of some mammals, in the tip of the fingers and toes of man, in the margin of the ear lobe of dog and cat and rabbit. In the cavernous tissue of the genital organs - veins make large irregular sinuses, the wall of which is formed by fibrous and non-striped muscular tissue. 106. (p) The capillary blood-vessels are minute tubes of about 53,5 to scb5 of an inch in diameter. Their wall is a@ single layer of transparent elongated endothelial plates, united by thin lines of cement substance (Fig. 48); each cell has an oval nucleus. In fact, the wall of the capillaries is merely a continuation of the endothelial membrane lining the arteries and veins. In some places the capillaries possess a special adventitia made up of branched nucleated connective tissuecells (hyaloidea of frog, choroidea of mammals), or of an endothelial membrane (pia mater of brain and cord, retina and serous membranes), or of adenoid reticulum (lymphatic glands, His). The smallest capillaries are found in the central r2 €F Le nee Chap. X.] ZwHe HearT AND BLOOD-VESSELS. 81 _ nervous system, the largest in the marrow of bone. The capillaries form networks, the richness and —— a © Fig. 48,—From a Preparation of the Peritoneum, stained f with Nitrate of Silver. a a, The endothelium on the free surface of the membrane; 3, the capillary blood: vessels in the membrane; their wal] isa layer of endothelium. (Handbook.) Fig. 49.—Young Fat Tissue of the Omentum, its Blood-vessels injected a, Artery ; 5, vein; ec, network of capillaries. (Handbook.) arrangement of which vary in the. different organs, according to the nature and arrangement of the ele ments of the tissue (Fig. 49). e—l1 82 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. X. 107. If capillaries are abnormally distended, as in inflammation, or otherwise injured, the cement sub- stance between the endothelial plates is liable to give ' way in the shape of minute holes, or stigmata, which may become larger holes, or stomata. The passage of red blood corpuscles (diapedesis), and the migration of white corpuscles in inflammation through the unbroken capillaries and small veins, occur through these stigmata and stomata. 108. Young and Growing Capillaries, both of normal and pathological tissues, possess solid thread- y Fig. 50.—From a Preparation of Omentum of Rabbit, after staining with Nitrate of Silver. v, A minute vein; a, solid protoplasmic prolongations of the wall of a capillary, connected with connective tissue corpuscles; c, a solid young. bud, (Atlas,) like shorter or longer nucleated protoplasmic processes (Fig. 50), into which the canal of the capillary is gradually prolonged, so that the thread becomes con- ep een Raper Pa ee Chap.X.] ZHE HEART AND BLOOD-VESSELS. 83 verted into a new capillary branch. Such growing capillaries are capable of contraction (Stricker). All blood-vessels, arteries, veins, and capillaries, _in their early stages, both in embryonal and adult life, are of the nature of minute tubes, the wall of which consists of a simple endothelial membrane. In the case of the vessel becoming an artery or vein, cells are added to the outside of the endothelium, thus forming the elastic, muscular, and fibrous con- nective tissue elements of the wall. 109. In the first stage, both in the embryo and in the adult, the vessel is repre- sented by a solid nucleated proto- plasmic cell, elon- gated or spindle- shaped or branch- ed. Such a cell may be an isolated cell of the connec- tive tissue inde- pendent of any pre-existing vessel, or it may be a‘ solid protoplasmic outgrowth of the endothelial wall of an existing capil- e lary vessel (Fig. pig 51,—Developing Capillary Blood-vessels 5 1). In both cases from the Tail of Tadpole. be m v, Capillary vein with clumps of pigment in the wall ; it comes hol- a, nucleated protoplasmic s stoned ; z, solid anasto- mosis tween two neighbour ng capillaries. lowed out by a TiS) _ process of vacuola- tion; isolated vacuoles appear at first, but they gradually become confluent, and thtis a young vessel is formed, at first very irregular in outline, but gradually 84 Exrementrs or Hisrotoey. (Chap. XI. -acquiring more and more of atubular form. In the case of an isolated cell, its protoplasmic processes grow by degrees to the nearest capillary, to the wall of which they become fixed, and the cavity of the cell finally opens through such processes into that of the capillary vessel. The wall of young capillaries is granular-looking protoplasm (the original cell substance), and in it are disposed, in more or less regular fashion, oblong nuclei, derived by multiplication from the nucleus of the original cell. In a later stage, a differentiation takes place in the protoplasmic wall of the capillary into cell-plates and cement substance, in such a way that each of the above nuclei appertains to one cell- plate, which now represents the final stage in the formation of the capillary. Both in the embryo and in the adult a few isolated nucleated protoplasmic cells, or a few protoplasmic solid processes of an existing capillary, may by active and continued growth give origin to a whole set of new capillaries (Stricker, A ffanasieff, Arnold, Klein, Balfour, Ranvier, Leboucegq). CHAPTER XI, THE LYMPHATIC VESSELS. 110. Tue large lymphatic trunks, such as the thoracic duct, and the lymphatic vessels passing to and from the lymphatic glands, are thin-walled vessels, similar in structure to arteries. Their lining endothe- lium is of the same character as in an artery, and so are the elastic intima and the media with its circular mus- cular tissue, but they are very much thinner than in an artery of the same calibre. The adventitia is an aan . Chap. XI.] THe LympHarTic VESSELS. 85 exceedingly thin connective tissue membrane with a few elastic fibres. The valves are semi-lunar folds of the endothelium and intima. 111. The lymphatics in the tissues and organs form rich plexuses. They are tubular vessels, the wall of which is, like that of a capillary blood-vessel, a single layer of endothelial plates (Fig. 52). The lymphatic is often many times wider than a blood capillary. The endothelial plates are elongated, but Fig. 52.—Lymphatic Vessels of the Diaphragm of the Dog, stained with Nitrate of Silver. The endothelium forming the wall fi. ie jrrnbation is well shown; », valves. as. ‘not so long as in a blood capillary, with more or less sinuous outlines, but this depends on the amount of shrinking of the tissue in which the vessel is embedded ; when there is no shrinking in the tissue or in the vessel, the outlines of the cells are more or less straight. The lymphatics are supported by the fibrous con- nective tissue of the surrounding tissue, which does not, however, form part of their wall. 86 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XI. 112. The outline of the vessel is not straight, but more or less moniliform, owing to the slight dilatations present below and at the semz-lunar valves ; these are folds of the endothelial wall, and they are met with in great numbers, The vessel appears slightly dilated immediately beyond the valve, that is, on the side farthest from the periphery, or rootlet, whence the current of lymph starts. 113. Tracing the lymphatic vessels in the tissues and organs towards their rootlets, we come to more or less irregular-shaped vessels, the wall of which also consists of a single layer of polygonal endothelial plates ; the outlines are very sinuous. These are the lym- phatic capillaries; in some places they are mere clefts and irregular sinuses, in others they have more the character of a tube, but in all instances they have a complete endothelial lining, and no valves. Sometimes a blood-vessel, generally arterial, is ensheathed for a shorter or longer distance in a lymphatic tube, which has the character of a lym- phatic capillary ; these are the perivascular lymphatics of His, Stricker, and others. 114. The rootiets of the lymphatics are situ- ated in the connective tissue of the different organs in the shape of an intercommunicating system of crevices, clefts, spaces, or canals, existing between the bundles, or groups of bundles, of the connective tissue. These rootlets are generally without a complete endo- thelial lining, but are identical with the spaces in which the connective tissue corpuscles are situated ; where these are branched cells anastomosing by their processes into a network—sucl as the cornea, or serous membranes—we find that the rootlets of the lymphatics are the lacune and canaliculi of these cells—the typical lymph-canalicular system of von Recklinghausen. (Fig. 53). The endothelial cells forming the wall of the lymphatic capillaries are directly continuous with the 7. ii. oe Chap. XI] THe LyurpHarTic VESSELS. 87 connective cells situated in the rootlets. In tendons and fascize the minute lymphatics lie between the bundles, and have the shape of continuous long clefts Fig. 53.—From a Silver-stained Preparation of the Central Tendon of the Rabbit’s Diaphragm. Showing the direct connection of the Lymph-canalicular System of the Tissue with the Lymphatic Capillaries, a, Lymphatic vessel; 6, lymphatic capillary lined with ‘sinuous’ endothelium. (Handbook.) or channels ; in striped muscular tissue they have the same character, being situated between the muscular — fibres. The passage of plasma from the minute arteries and capillary blood-vessels into the lymph-rootlets situated in the tissues, and thence into the lymphatic 88 Exvemenrs or Hisro.ocy. [Chap. XI. capillaries and lymphatic vessels, is the natural current of lymph irrigating the tissues. 115. Lymph ecavities.—In some places the lym- phatic vessels of a tissue or organ are possessed of, or connected with, irregularly-shaped large sinuses, much wider than the vessel itself; these cavities are the lymph sinuses, and their wall is also composed of a single layer of more or less polygonal endothelial plates with very sinuous outlines. Such sinuses are found in connection with the subcutaneous and sub- mucous lymphatics, in the diaphragm, mesentery, liver, lungs, &c. On the same footing—-ze, as lymph sinuses—stand the comparatively large lymph cavities in the body, such as the subdural and subarachnoidal spaces of the central nervous system, the synovial cavities, the ‘cavities of the tendon- sheaths, the cavity of the tunica vaginalis testis, the pleural, pericardial, and peri- toneal cavities. In batrachian animals, e.g., frogs, the skin all over the trunk and extremities is sepa- rated from the sub- Fig. 54.—Stomata, lined with Germi jacent fascize and ig. sl mata, fin wi rmi- nating Endothelial Cells, as seen muscles by large bags rom e Cisterna. urface of the : =“ “ BaptumCisterns Lymphatics Magne OF > Stnuses the sub of the Frog. (Handbook.) cutaneous lymph sacs. These sinuses are shut off from one another by septa. Between the trunk and the extremities, and on the latter, the septa generally occur in the region of the joints. In female frogs in the mesogastrium smaller or larger Chap. XI.] THE LyMPHATIC VESSELS. 89 cysts lined with ciliated endothelium are sometimes found. Behind the peritoneal cavity of the frog, on éach side of the vertebral column, exists a similar large lymph sinus, called the cisterna lymphatica magna. 116. In all instances these cavities are in direct communication with the lymphatics of the surrounding parts by holes or open mouths (stomata), often lined by a special layer of polyhedral endothe- lial cells—germinat- ing cells (Figs. 54, 55). Such stomata are numerous on the peritoneal surface of the central tendon of the diaphragm, in se * re ete ies oni rptahoots ots : the Peritoneal Surface o e Septum which are found Gisteme Lymphaticw Magne of the straight lymph chan. = Frog. (Handbook.) nels between the tendon bundles, and these channels communicate here and there with the free surface by stomata. A similar arrangement exists on the costal pleura, the omentum, and the cisterna ]ymphatica magna of the frog. (See Chapter IV.) 117. The serous membranes consist of endo- thelium upon a layer of fibrous tissue with networks of fine elastic fibres ; they contain networks of blood capillaries and numerous lymphatic vessels arranged in (superficial and deep) plexuses. Those of the pleura costalis—or rather,antercostalis—and of the diaphragm and pleura pulmonalis, are most numerous. They are important in the process of absorption from the pleural . and peritoneal cavity respectively. Lymph and lymph rete) ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XI. corpuscles, and other solid particles, are readily taken up by the stomata (see Fig. 20) and brought into the lymphatics. Here the respiratory movements of the intercostal muscles, of the diaphragm, and of the lungs produce the result of the action of a pump. 118. There is a definite relation between the lymphatics and the epithelium which covers the mucous membranes and lines the various glands and also between the endothelium covering serous mem- branes and that lining vessels and lymph cavities— viz., the albuminous semifluid cement substance (see former chapters) between the epithelial or endothelial cells is the medium by which fluid and formed matter pass between the surfaces and the lymph-canalicular system, 2.¢., the rootlets of the lymphatics. 119, Lymph taken from the lymphatics of dif- ferent regions differs in composition and structure. That from the thoracic duct contains a large amount of colourless or white corpuscles (lymph corpuscles), each of which is a protoplasmic nucleated cell similar in structure to a white blood corpuscle. They are of various sizes, according to the stage of ripeness. The smaller contain one, some of the larger contain two and three, nuclei. The latter show more pronounced amceboid movement than the small ones. A few red corpuscles are also met with. Granular and fatty matter is present in large quantities during and after digestion. In the frog (and also in other lower vertebrates, e.g., reptiles) there exist certain small vesicular lymph cavities, about an eighth of an inch in diameter, which show rhythmic pulsation ; they are called lymph hearts. On each side of the os coccygis and under- neath the skin is a pulsating posterior lymph heart. The anterior lymph heart is oval, and situated on each side of the processus transversus of the third — —— ee AARNE sy , Rae gre Chap. XI.] THE LymMPHATIC VESSELS. gt and fourth vertebre ; it is rather smaller than the posterior one. The lymph hearts have an efferent ves- sel, which is a vein, and from them the venous system Fig. 56.—Developing Lymph-capillaries in the Tail of Tadpole. a, Solid nucleated protoplasmic branches not yet hollowed out. (Atlas.) of the neighbourhood can be easily injected, whereas the reverse is not possible. They are lined with an endothelium like the lymph sacs, and in their wall they possess plexuses of striped, branched, muscular fibres. The nerve fibres terminate in these striped muscular fibres in the same manner as in those of other localities. (Ranvier.) 92 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XII. 120. Lymphatic vessels are developed and newly formed under normal and pathological conditions in precisely the same way as blood-vessels. The accom- panying woodcut (Fig. 56) shows this very well. We have also here to do with the hollowing out of (con- nective tissue) cells and their processes previously solid and protoplasmic. CHAPTER XII. FOLLICLES OR SIMPLE LYMPH-GLANDS. 121. Unper this name we include the blood- glands, or the conglobate gland substance of Hewson, His, and Henle, or the lymph-follicles (Kélliker, Huxley, Luschka). The ground-substance of all lymph-glands, simple as well as compound (see below), is the lymphatic or adenoid tissue, or leuco- cytogenous tissue. Like all other gland-tissue, it is supplied with a rich network of capillaries derived from an afferent artery, and leading into efferent veins. 122. The elements constituting this tissue are :— (a) The adenoid reticulum (Fig. 57), a network of fine homogeneous fibrils, with numerous plate-like enlargements. (0) Small, transparent, flat, endotheloid cell-plates, each with an oval nucleus. These cell-plates are fixed on the reticulum, of which at first sight they seem to form part. Their oval nucleus especially appears to belong to a nodal point—ze., to one of the enlargements of the reticulum; but by .continued shaking of a section of any lymphatic tissue, the oval nuclei and their cell-plates can be got rid of, so that only the reticulum is left, without any trace of a nucleus. * Chap. X11.) Srym@PLe LymMPHATIC GLANDS. 93 (c) Lymph-corpuscles completely fill the meshes of the adenoid reticulum, These can, however, be easily shaken out. They are of different sizes ; some—the young ones—are small cells, with a com- paratively large nucleus ; others — the ripe ones—are larger, have a distinct pro- toplasmic cell body, with one or two nuclei, They all show on a warm stage amec- boid move- ment, but in the large ones it is much more pro- Pig. 57.—Adenoid Reticulum shaken out; most of the Lymph-corpuscles are removed. From a nounced than Lyuiphatia Gland. in the small a, The reticulum ; c,a capillary blood-vessel. (Atlas.) ones. The capillary blood-vessels supplying the adenoid tissue receive a more or less distinct special investment from the adenoid reticulum; this is the capillary adventitia. 123. The adenoid tissue occurs as: (1) Diffuse adenoid tissue, without any definite arrangement. This occurs in the subepithelial layer of the mucous membrane of the nasal fossz and trachea, in the mucous membrane of the false vocal cords and the ventricle of the larynx, in the posterior part of the epiglottis, in the soft palate and tonsils, at the root of the tongue, in the pharynx, in the mucosa of the small and large intestine, including the villi 94 ELEMENTS OF ITISTOLOGY. (Chap. X11. of the former; and in the mucous membrane of the nasal cavity and vagina. (2) Cords, cylinders, or patches of adenoid tissue ; in the omentum and pleura, and in the spleen (Mal- pighian corpuscles). (3) Lymph follicles, i.e., oval or spherical masses more or less well defined; in the tonsils, at the root of the tongue, in the upper part of the pharynx (pharynx- tonsil), in the stomach, small and large intestine; in the nasal mucous membrane, in the large and small bronchi ; and in the spleen (Malpighian corpuscles). 124. The tomsils (Fig. 58) are masses of lymph folli- cles and diffuse adenoid tissue covered withathin mucous membrane, which penetrates in the shape of longer or 24 EZ a £ Fig. 58.—Vertical Section through part of the Tonsil of Dog. e, Stratified pavement epithelium covering the free surface of the mucous membrane. The tissue of the mucous membrane is infiltrated with adenoid tissue. J, lymph follicles; m, mucous gland of thesubmucous tissue. (Atlas.) Chap. XIL] Szmpxre LympuHaric VESSELS. 95 shorter folds into the substance within. Numbers of mucus-secreting glands situated outside the layer of lymph follicles discharge their secretion into the pits (the crypts) between the folds. The free surface of the tonsils and the crypts is covered or lined with the same stratified epithelium that lines the oral cavity. Numbers of lymph corpuscles constantly, in the per- fectly normal condition, migrate through the epithe- lium on to the free surface, and are mixed with the secretions (mucus and saliva) of the oral cavity. The so-called mucous or salivary corpuscles of the saliva, taken from the oral cavity, are such discharged lymph corpuscles. .They become swollen up by the water of the saliva, and assume a spherical shape. They finally disintegrate. Similar relations, only on a smaller scale, obtain at the root of the tongue. The pharynx tonsil of Luschka, occurring in the upper part of the pharynx, is in-all essential respects the same as the palatine tonsil. Owing to large parts - of the mucous membrane of the upper portion of the pharynx being covered with ciliated columnar epithe- lium, some of the crypts in the pharynx tonsil are also lined with it. 125. The lenticular glands of the stomach are single lymph-follicles. “The solitary glands of the small and large intestine are single lymph-follicles. The agminated giands of the ileum are groups of lymph-follicles. The mucous membrane containing them is much thickened by their presence. These groups of follicles are called a Peyer's patch or a Peyer’s gland. © 126. In most instances the capillary blood-vessels form in the lymph-follicles meshes, arranged in a more or less radiating manner from the periphery towards the centre; around the periphery there is a network of small veins, A lar ger or smaller portion of the: 96 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XII. circumference of the follicles of the tonsils, pharynx, intestine, bronchi, &c., is surrounded by a lymph sinus leading into a lymphatic vessel. The lymphatic vessels and lymph sinuses in the neighbourhood of lym- phatic follicles or of diffuse adenoid tissue are almost always found to contain numerous lymph corpuscles, thus indicating that these are produced by the adenoid tissue and absorbed by the lymphatics. 127. The Thymus gland consists of a frame- work and the gland substance. The former is fibrous connective tissue arranged as an outer capsule, and in connection with it are septa and trabecule passing into the gland and subdividing it into lobes and lobules, which latter are again subdivided into the follicles (Fig. 59a). The follicles are very irregular in shape, most of them being oblong or cylindrical streaks of adenoid tissue. Near the capsule they are well defined from one another, and present a poly- gonal outline; farther inwards they are more or less fused. Each shows a central transparent medulla and a peripheral less transparent cortex (Watney). At the places where two follicles are fused with one another the medulla of both is continuous. The matrix is adenoid reticulum, the fibres of the medullary part being coarser and shorter, those of the cortical portion of the follicle finer and longer. The meshes of the of the reticulum in the cortical part of the follicles are filled with the same lymph-corpuscles as occur in’ the adenoid tissue of other organs, but in the medullary part they are fewer, and the meshes are more or less completely occupied by the enlarged but transparent ‘ endotheloid plates. These conditions cause the greater transparency of the medulla. In some places the endotheloid cells are granular, and include more than one nucleus ; some are even multinucleated giant cells, 128. There occur in the medulla of the follicles, larger or smaller, more or less concentrically-arranged Chap. X11.) SzwPLe LYMPHATIC GLANDS. 97 "nucleated protoplasmic cells, which are the concentric bodies of Hassall (Fig. 598). They are met with even Fig. 594.—Section through the Thymus Gland of a Foetus. a, Fibrous tissue between the follicles; }, the cortical portion of the follicles ; c, the medullary portion. } . in the early stages of the life of the thymus, and cannot therefore be connected with the involution of the gland, as maintained by Afanassief, according to whom the concentric cor- puscles are formed in blood-vessels which there- by become obliterated. According to Watney they are concerned in the formation of blood-vessels Fig. 598.—Two Concentric or Has- , and connective tissue. Beles Vee easton et the Eirias The lymphatics of the terfollicular septa and trabecule always contain numbers of lymph corpuscles. The blood capillaries of the follicles are more richly distributed in the H—1l < 98 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. — (Chap. XIII. cortex than in the medulla, and they radiate from the periphery towards the central parts. - 129, After birth, the thymus begins to undergo degeneration, leading to the gradual disappearance of the greater portion of the gland, its place being taken by connective tissue and fat. But the time when the involution is completed varies within very wide limits. It is not unusual to find in persons of fifteen or twenty years of age an appreciable amount of thymus tissue. In some animals, ¢.g., guinea-pigs, the invo- lution of the gland even in the adult has not made much progress. In the thymus of the dog Watney found cysts lined with ciliated epithelial cells. CHAPTER XIII. COMPOUND LYMPHATIC GLANDS. 130. THE compound or true lymphatic glands are directly interpolated in the course of lymphatic vessels. Such are the mesenteric, portal, bronchial, splenic, sternal, cervical, cubital, popliteal, inguinal, lumbar, glands. Afferent lymphatic vessels anastomosing into a plexus open at one side (in the outer capsule) into the lymphatic gland, and at the other (the hilum) emerge from it as a plexus of efferent lymphatic tubes. 131. Each true lymphatic gland is enveloped in a fibrous capsule which is connected with the interior and the hilum by trabecule and septa of connective tissue. The trabecule having advanced a certain distance, about one-third or one-fourth, towards the centre, branch into minortrabecule, whichin themiddle of the gland anasto- mose with one another so as to form a plexus with small " Pa" &* ™e (b) a median or inner group, and (c) a lateral growp. The cells of the lateral group are the largest, those of the inner or median group are the smallest of the three. The lateral group of ganglion cells extends in the cervical region more or less inte the white matter of the lateral column. 140 ELEMENTS OF HisToLocy. {Chap. XVI. 180. In the dorsal region of the cord there exists near the grey commissure Z a special cylindrical group of large multipolar gan- glion cells, which form the column of Lockhart Clarke. In the posterior horns the ganglion cells are few and far between. Most of _ them belong to the portion of the posterior horn near the posterior commissure. ganglion cells is fibrillated, but there exists a granular interstitial material, which is especially well developed near the nucleus. Some- times smaller or larger masses of yellowish pig- ment granules are present in this part of the cell substance—i.e., near the nucleus. 181. The fibrillated sub- LA stance of the ganglion cells is prolonged on to the pro- cesses. There are always one or two that are thicker than the others. At a Fig. 87—An Isolated Multipolar longer or shorter distance Ganglion Cell of the Grey Matter from the cell the processes branch dendritically into The dendritically-branthed processes break up into the fine nerve network C into which is seen to passa fine nerve- a large number of fibres, fibre derived from a posterior mars which eventually break up root. (Gerlach, in Stricker's Manual. a into the fine network of primitive fibrille, forming the nervous groundwork of The substance of the ~ Chap. XVI.]J TueéE SPINAL CORD. 14! the grey matter (Fig. 87).. The ganglion cells of the anterior horn and the cells of Clarke’s column have, in addition to these branched processes, generally one unbranched pale process (occasionally, but rarely, this is double), which takes its origin in the cell substance with a thin neck. This is the axis c ylinder process of Deiters ; it becomes invested sooner or later in a medullary sheath, and then becomes a medullated nerve-fibre, as mentioned on a former page. The ganglion cells of the posterior horns have no axis cylinder process, all processes being branched and connected with the ground nerve network in the same way as the branched processes of the ganglion cells of the anterior horns. Anastomoses between the processes of the ganglion cells of the anterior horns have been observed in a few instances (Carriére). 182. The ganglion cells of the austere horns and those forming Clarke’s column—.e., the ganglion cells with axis cylinder process—are considered as motor, the others as sensory ganglion cells ; that is to say, the former are connected with a motor nerve-fibre, the latter with a sensory fibre; but it would be quite incorrect to say that all motor fibres are connected with the former, all sensory fibres with the latter. 183. The white and grey matter is supplied witha large number of blood-vessels, the capillaries being more abundant and forming a more uniform network in the grey than in the white matter; in the latter, most of them have a course parallel with the long axis. The blood-vessels are ensheathed in lymph spaces (perwascular spaces of His), and the ganglion cells are each surrounded by a lymph ‘space (peri- cellular space). 14a". (Chap. XVII. CHAPTER XVIL THE MEDULLA OBLONGATA OR BULB. 184. As the cervical portion of the cord passes into the medulla oblongata, its parts alter position, arrangement, and name in the following manner :— a) The anterior median fissure is continued as far as the medulla extends. The posterior fissure of the cord is also continued on the medulla, but in the upper portion is lost, owing to the fact that the central canal, which in the cord is situated in about the middle, shifts in the medulla towards the posterior surface, and soon altogether opens into the fourth ventricle. 185. (6) The tracts of white matter bordering the anterior median fissure of the medulla, and separated from the other tracts by a distinct fissure on the surface, are the pyramidal tracts. As was mentioned on a former page, the median portion of the anterior columns of white matter of the cord—ze., the un- crossed or direct anterior fasciculus—is a direct pro- longation of the pyramidal tract, and can be followed in this upwards into the pyramids—z.e., the oblong prominences in the upper part of the medulla next to the anterior median fissure—and thence to the pons Varolii and farther into the crus cerebri. A major portion of the pyramidal tract crosses in the lower portion of the medulla, in the anterior median fissure—this forms the pyramidal decussation (Fig. 88). These crossed bundles enter the postero- lateral column of the cord, that part of it which has been mentioned above as the fasciculus of Tirk. The crossed portion of the pyramidal tract passes into a Chap. XVIL.] ZHE MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 143 the pyramids and farther on into the pons Varolii and _erus cerebri. 186. The greater portion of the anterior column F7Y Fig. 88.—Transverse Section through the Medulla Oblongata in the Region of the Pyramidal Decussation. Spy, Anterior \ faemgaeg tract; ega, lateral nucleus of grey matter; fa, part of anterior column not decussating ; mg, nucleus gracilis; g, gelatinous nucleus of posterior horn ; 11, spinal accessory nerve. (Henle.) of white matter of the cord is situated deeper in the medulla than the pyramidal tracts. (c) The lateral column of white matter of the cord can be traced into the medulla as the lateral tract. In the upper part of the medulla it becomes hidden from view by the olivary bodies and the transversely arranged white tracts. The lateral tract i a ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XVII. of the medulla comprises all parts of the lateral column of the cord including that portion which was mentioned as the anterior root-zone and the direct cerebellar fasciculus, but not that posterior division of it which was mentioned previously as the fasciculus of Tiirk, or the crossed pyramidal fasciculus. (d) The posterior column of the white matter of the _ cord is continuous with the same column of the medulla. That portion of it which lies next to the posterior median fissure, and which is called in the cord the fasciculus of Goll, is in the medulla called the fasciculus (or funiculus) gracilis. In the upper part of the medulla, as the central canal opens into the fourth ventricle, the fasciculus gracilis turns obliquely out- wards, and forms the lateral boundary of the ventricle. 187. (e) Thelateral part of the posterior column of the cord, which was mentioned as the fasciculus cuneatus, is prolonged into the medulla under the same name. But between the two—.e., the fasciculus gracilis and fasci- culus cuneatus—there exists another tract, which is called by Schwalbe fwniculus of Rolando. In the upper part of the medulla the fasciculus cuneatus becomes covered by transverse bundles of medullated nerve-fibres; these pass from the anterior median ~ fissure across the surface of the pyramids and olivary body in a transverse direction towards the posterior fissure, but before reaching this take an upward direction, These bundles are the external arcuate fibres. In the upper part of the medulla the ex- ternal arcuate fibres, part of the funiculus cuneatus and funiculus of Rolando, as well as the direct cere- bellar fasciculus of the lateral column, all join to form a prominent tract of white matter—the corpus resti- forme—-which enters the white matter of the cerebellar hemisphere on the same side; this is the pedunculus cerebelli ad medullam oblongatam, or the lower cere- bellar peduncle. h ee ee Chap. XVII.) Zwze MEDULLA OBLONGATA. - 145 -188. (f) In the region of the pyramidal decussation —i.e., the lower part of the medulla immediately fol- lowing the cervical portion of the cord—the grey matter of the cord is changed in its disposition by the fasciculus of Tirk or the crossed pyramidal fasciculus passing en masse from the lateral column of white matter throwgh the anterior horns of .the grey matter. Hereby the anterior portion of the grey matter of the cord is shut off from the rest of the grey matter, and is found lying near the surface of the lateral column of the lower portion of the medulla as the lateral nucleus of grey matter (Fig. 88). The main part of the anterior horn, however, is repre- sented by the reticular formation of grey matter. This contains in its lateral portion, at any rate, the same large multipolar motor ganglion cells with axis cylinder processes and ground-network as the anterior horn of the cord; but in addition there are the numerous bundles of medullated nerve-fibres passing through it in transverse, oblique, and longitudinal directions. Some of these fibres belong to the con- tinuation of the anterior columns of white matter of the cord, others join the fasciculus gracilis and cuneatus, and a third kind pass out from the middle line of the medulla. 189. (g) The grey matter of the posterior horns of the cord undergoes a change of disposition when passing into the medulla. Its hindmost portion is gradually shifted outwards by the development of the reticular formation of grey matter, and in about the middle of the medulla it is found lying near the surface of the lateral column as the tubercle of Rolando. The rest of the posterior horn remains at first collected around the central canal; but as this gradually approaches the posterior fissure, in order to open as the fourth ventricle above, the grey matter gradually expands laterally into the funiculus gracilis and cuneatus of kK—1 146 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. {Chap. XVI. a ‘Spy Fig. 89.—Transverse Section through the Medulla Oblongata in the Region of the Fourth Ventricle. fry, Anterior pyramidal tract; fr, restiform bodies; mp, nucleus of pyramids; no, olivary nucleus; moa, accessory Olivary nucleus; mh, nucleus of hypo- glossal nerve; nv, nucleus of vagus; ngl, nucleus of glosso-pharyngeus 3 r,raphe; 9, glossopharyngeal nerve; 12, hypoglossal nerve; y, horizontal fibres. (Henle.) . Chap. XV1I.] Zax AZEDULLA OBLONGATA. 147 the white matter, and forms a distinct accumulation of grey matter in each of these funiculi; they are respectively the nucleus gracilis and the nucleus cuneatus. The former is the grey matter, in the axis cylinder process of whose ganglion cells the nerve- fibres of the funiculus gracilis originate; but in the latter only a portion of the nerve-fibres of the funi- culus cuneatus take their origin ; since another part of it joins the restiform body, and so passes into the cerebellum. 190. In the upper part of the medulla, @.¢., in the region of the fourth ventricle, the grey matter forms a continuous mass, the floor of the fourth ventricle (Fig. 89). In this region there is a distinct median septum, by which the medulla is divided into two halves ; this is the vaphe. It consists of a thin membrane of nerve substance extending from the anterior longitudinal fissure to near the middle line of the floor of the fourth ventricle. This membrane consists of white matter in the shape of bundles of medullated nerve-fibres passing longitudinally, transversely, and obliquely ; and of small masses of grey matter interspersed between the nerve-bundles, and especially at the side of the raphe, where nerve-fibre bundles pass out of it. The grey matter contains multipolar ganglion cells. . 191. In a transverse section through the upper part of the medulla, we find at the side of the pyramid, and a little behind it, but covered.on the outer surface by white matter—z.e., the bundles of nerve-fibres constituting the fibre arcuate externee— a plicated lamina of grey matter which constitutes the olivary nucleus, or nucleus dentatus of the olivary body. It extends with its posterior portion into the reticular formation. Continuous with the olivary nucleus, but situated nearer the raphe, is a small lamina of similar grey matter; this is the accessory 148 Exrementrs or HisToLoGy. {Chap. XVII. olivary nucleus. In both nuclei are found numerous multipolar ganglion cells, each with an axis cylinder process. 192. The grey matter at the floor of the fourth ventricle is that from which the nerve roots of the cerebral nerves (facial auditory, glossopharyn- geal, pneumogastric, accessory, and hypoglossal) origi- nate. The ganglion cells in it are of various sizes, - and are aggregated into groups which form the neclei of origin of the above nerves. The thin layer of grey matter forming the floor of the ventricle, in the strict sense, is neuroglia only, a continuation of the central grey nucleus of the cord. The nerve cells in the hypoglossal nucleus are the largest; they are as large as the large cells of the anterior horns of the cord. The cells of the glossopharyngeal nerves are considerably smaller. The motor nerve-fibres (e.g., those of the hypoglossal and pneumogastric) originate, as the axis cylinder process of the multipolar ganglion cells, in exactly the same manner as was mentioned in the cord, but the sensory nerve-fibres of these nerves originate from the network, into which the processes of the ganglion cells of these nuclei break up. 193. In the lower part of the medulla, as long as there is still a closed central canal,. we find next to this the last outrunners of the groups of ganglion cells which form the nuclei of the spinal accessory and hypoglossal nerves. ; As we pass upwards, and as the central canal opens into the fourth ventricle, the groups of ganglion cells below the floor of the ventricle are so arranged that we find near the median line the group repre- senting the hypoglossal nucleus; then, farther out- wards, several groups representing several sub-divisions of the pneumogastric nucleus; still farther upwards, but more in the anterior part of the medulla, the nucleus _-_ .})( aya Chap. XVIII] CEREBRUM AND CEREBELLUM. 149 of the glossopharyngeal nerve; and, lastly, more out- wards and upwards, several divisions of the nucleus of the auditory nerve. The nerve-fibres, originating in these: nuclei, pass in bundles through the substance of the medulla oblongata, so as to appear on the antero-lateral surface. Of course these nerves, the nuclei of which are situated nearer to the middle line— e.g., the hypoglossal and spinal accessory—have to pass through the reticular formation, whereas those whose nuclei are situated more laterally pass only through the lateral part of the medulla. CHAPTER XVIII. THE CEREBRUM AND CEREBELLUM: 194. THe structure of the dura mater, arachnoidea, and pia mater of the brain is similar to that of the same membranes of the cord. ; As has been shown by Boehm, Key and Retzius, and others, the deeper part of the dura contains peculiar ampullated dilatations connected with the capillary blood-vessels, and forming in fact the roots of the veins. The glandule Pacchioni, or arachnoidal villi of Luschka, are composed of a spongy connective tissue, prolonged from the sub-arachnoidal tissue and covered with the arachnoidal membrane. These prolongations are pear-shaped or spindle-shaped, with a thin stalk. They are pushed through holes of the inner part of the dura mater into the venous sinuses of this latter, but are covered with endothelium. Injected material passes from the sub-arachnoidal spaces through these stalks into the villi. The spaces of their spongy 150 ELEMENTS OF LISTOLOGY.. {Chap. XVIII, substance become thereby filled and enlarged, and finally the injection matter enters the venous sinus itself. The pia cerebralis is very rich in blood-vessels, like that of the cord, which pass to and from the brain substance. The capillaries of the pia mater possess an outer endothelial sheath. The plexus choroideus is covered with a layer of polyhedral epi- thelial cells, which are ciliated in the embryo and in the young subject. 195. As was mentioned of the cord, so also in the brain the sub-dural lymph space does not communicate with the sub-arachnoidal spaces or with the ventri- cles (Luschka, Key and Retzius). Nor does there exist a communication between the sub-arachnoidal space and a space described by His to exist between pla mater and brain surface, but doubted by others. The relations between the cerebral nerves and the membranes of the brain, and the lymph-spaces of both, are the same as those previously described in the case of the cord and-the spinal nerves. 196. The pia mater passes with the larger blood- vessels into the brain substance by the sulci of the cerebrum and cerebellum. In the white and grey matter of the brain we find the same kind of supporting tissae that we described in the cord as neuroglia. In the brain also it is composed of a homogeneous matrix, of a network of neurogla fibrils, and of branched, flattened neuroglia cells, called Deiters’ cells. In the white matter-of the brain the neuroglia contains between the bundles of the nerve-fibres rows of small nucleated cells ; these form special accumula- tions in the bulbi olfactorii, and in the cerebellum. Lymph corpuscles may be met with in the neuroglia, especially around the blood-vessels and ganglion cells. All the ventricles, including the aqueductus Sylvii, are lined with a layer of neuroglia, being a direct Chap. XVIil.] CEREBRUM AND CEREBELLUM. TSI continuation of the one lining the fourth ventricle. and this again being a direct continuation of the central grey nucleus of the cord. Like the central canal of the cord, also, the ventricles are lined with a layer of ciliated columnar, or short columnar epithelial cells. _ 197. The blood-vessels form a denser capillary network in the grey than in the white matter ; in the latter the network is pre-eminently of a longitudinal arrangement, 2.e., parallel to the long axis of the bundles of the nerve-fibres. In the grey cortex of the hemispheres of the cerebrum and cerebellum, many of the capillary blood-vessels have an arrangement vertical to the surface, but are connected with one another by numerous transverse branches. The blood-vessels of the brain are situated in spaces, perivascular lymph-spaces, traversed by fibres passing between the adventitia of the vessels, and the neuroglia forming the boundary of the space. There are no separate lymphatic vessels in the grey or white substance. 198. The white matter consists of medullated nerve-fibres, which like those of the cord possess no neurilemma or nuclei of nerve corpuscles, and no constrictions of Ranvier. The nerve-fibres are of very various sizes, according to the locality. Divisions occur very often. When isolated the fibres show the varicosities mentioned in the cord. The grey matter consists, like that of the cord and medulla, besides the neuroglia, of a very fine net- work of elementary nerve-fibrils (Rindfleisch, Gerlach), into which pass, on the one hand, nerve-fibres, and, on the other, the branched processes of ganglion cells. ’ With regard to the structure of the ganglion cells of the brain and medulla, what has been mentioned of the ganglion cells of the cord holds good as to them. Like the former, those of the medulla and 152 ELEMENTS OF HisToLocy. [Chap. XVIII. brain are situated in pericellular lymph-spaces (Ober- steiner). : 199. We now follow the above. description of the structure of the medulla with that of the cere- bellum and pons Varolii. I, The cerebellum is composed of lamina, folds, or convolutions, composed of secondary folds, each of which consists of a central tract of white matter covered with grey matter. The tracts of white matter of neighbouring convolutions of one lobe or division join, and thus form the principal tracts of white matter. ‘The white matter of the cerebellar hemisphere is connected (a) with the medulla oblongata by the corpus restiforme, this forming the inferior peduncle of the cerebellum; (6) with the cerebrum by the processus cerebelli ad cerebrum, this forming the superior pedunculus ; and (c) with the other cerebellar hemisphere by the commissure passing through the pons Varolii; this is the pedunculus cerebelli ad pontem, or the middle pedunculus. 200. On a vertical section, through a lamina of the - cerebellum (Fig. 90), the following layers are seen : (a) the pia mater covering the general surface, and pene- trating with the larger blood-vessels into the superficial substance of the lamina; (0) a thick layer of cortical grey matter; (c) the layer of Purkinje’s ganglion cells ; (¢) the nuclear layer, and (e) the central white matter. . 201. The layer of ganglion cells of Purkinje is the most interesting layer; it consists of a single row of ‘large multipolar ganglion cells, each with a large vesicular nucleus. Each possesses also a thin axis cylinder process, directed towards the depth, the cell sending out in the opposite direction—+z.e., towards the surface—a thick process which soon branches like the antlers of a deer, the processes being all very ne nnn - Fig. 90.—From a Vertical Section through the Grey Matter of the Cerebellum of the Dog. pm, Pia mater; p, the eon i cells of Purkinje; g, the nuclear layer ; f, the layer of nerve-fibres (white maiter). (Atlas.) 154 ELEMENTS OF HisTOLOGY. [Chap. XVIII. long-branched and pursuing a vertical course towards the surface ; sooner or later they all break up into the fine nervous network of the grey cortex. The longest processes reach near to the surface. The layer (6) above mentioned, i.¢., the cortical grey matter, is in reality the terminal nerve network for the branched processes of the ganglion cells of Purkinje. Sankey maintains that in the human cerebellum there are also small multipolar gang- lion cells connected with the processes of the cells of Purkinje. 202. The nuclear layer contains a large number of spherical or slightly oval nuclei embedded in a - network of fine fibrils, the nature of which is not definitely ascertained, i.e, whether it consists of neuroglia only, or whether it contains, in addition, also a network of nerve-fibrils. The latter is ex- ceedingly probable. The nuclei are nuclei of neuro- glia cells, of lymph corpuscles and of small ganglion cells. The axis cylinder process of the ganglion cell of Purkinje passes through the nuclear layer, and be- coming invested with a medullary sheath, enters as a medullated nerve-fibre the central white matter. There are, however, medullated nerve-fibres of the central white matter, which are not connected with an axis cylinder process of a Purkinje’s cell, but enter the nuclear layer and probably terminate there in the nerve network, or pass through it and terminate in the nerve network of the grey matter of the cortex. 203. II. The poms Varolii (Fig. 91) is a pro- longation partly of the medulla and partly of the cerebellum. Of the latter only white matter passes transversely into the anterior portion of the pons, and forms there the transverse bundles of nerve-fibres, which give to the pons the horizontal striation. As we pass upwards—ze., farther away from the Chap. XVIII] CEREBRUM AND CEREBELLUM. 155 medulla, this part of the pons—ze., that composed of horizontal fibres—increases in thickness, 204. Of the medulla there is a greater portion rs trs Fig.91.—Transverse Section through the Lower Corpus Quadrigeminum and the Pons Varolii. a, Agueductus sylvii; 5, crossing of the brachia of the lower corp. quadrig.; ¢, ganglion of the lower corp. quadrig.; s,pedunculus of the lower corp. ies gs ba, tegmentum ; 5 descending root of the fifth; p, bundles of the anterior pyramidal tracts in cross section; trp, deep transverse bundles of the pons; ¢rs, superficial transverse bundles of the pons. (Meynert, in Stricker’s Manual.) continued into the pons than of the cerebellum. (1) There are the pyramidal tracts ; they do not lie on the surface as in the medulla, but are hidden by some 156 ELEMENTS OF /[1ISTOLOGY. (Chap. XVIII. —the most anterior bundles—of the transverse fibres. The bundles of the pyramidal tract pass as longitudinal fibres merely through the anterior half of the pons, and enter the crura cerebri where they form the crusta. (2) The raphe. (3) The reticular formation ; but this is limited to the posterior part. Small masses of grey matter and ganglion cells are scattered every- _ where between the transverse bundles of the nerve- fibres of this formation. (4) The grey matter at the floor of the fourth ventricle. This grey matter con. tains also on the posterior surface of the pons groups of multipolar ganglion cells. Near the middle line there is a group of large multipolar ganglion cells, each with an axis cylinder process. This is the nucleus for the sixth nerve, and of part of the seventh, the former lying more median than the latter. There is another nucleus of the seventh situated more deeply—z.e., in the reticular formation. More outwards we meet with the superior nucleus of one of the roots of the auditory nerve. Farther upwards we meet with the nucleus of the motor roots of the fifth. (5) In the lower part of the pons there exists also a continuation of the grey matter of the corpus den- tatum of the olivary body. 205. The pons is connected with the cerebrum by the crusta of the crus cerebri, which, as mentioned above, are bundles of medullated nerve-fibres passing merely through the pons but being continuations of the anterior pyramidal tracts of the medulla. 206. III. The hemispheres of the cere- brum.—On a vertical section each convolution shows a white centre and a grey cortex. The former is com- posed of medullated nerve-fibres. The white matter of the convolutions of the cerebral hemispheres is ar- ranged as (a) the centrum ovale—.e., the central mass of white matter from which the lamina of white matter Chap. XVIII.] CEREBRUM AND CEREBELLUM. 157 for each convolution branches off, and, (d), the commissure of white matter between the two hemispheres, 7¢., the corpus callosum and antertor commissure. The centrum ovale again consists of tracts of medullated nerve-fibre, which connect (a) the convolutions of the same hemisphere with one another, and (b) such as pass between the con- volutions on the one hand, and the thalamus opticus, the pons, and medulla on the other. These tracts pass by the internal capsule (see below) to the thalamus opticus, and to the crus cerebri. The grey cortex con- sists, according to Mey- nert, of the following layers (Fig. 92) :—(1) a superficial layer of grey Fig. 92.— Vertical Section through the Grey Matter of a Cerebral Convolution. _ a, Superficial layer; 5, closely- 2) ‘ eing the principal layer; d, the ‘granular formation,” small multipolar ganglion cells; e, the layer of spindle-shaped ganglion cells. eynert, in Stricker’s Manual.) 158 Exrementrs oF HisroLocy. [Chap. XVIII. matter (neur oglia and nerve ground network), with . few and small ganglion cells. (2) A layer of small more or less pyramidal ganglion cells densely aggregated. (3) The formation of the cornu Am- monis. This is the principal or broadest stratum of the cortex ; it is composed of several layers of large, pyra- midal ganglion cells, increas- ing in size as a deeper layer is reached. The pyramidal cells of this third and of the previous second stratum consist of a pyramidal body including an oval vesicular nucleus (Fig. 93). From the body pass out the following principal pro- cesses :—(«) the processof the apex, directed towards the surface of the convolution ; it can be traced for a longer or shorter distance. (b) The lateral basilar pro- cesses, and finally the median basilar / process. This latter j is fine, remains un- / branched, and is an Fig. 98 large Pyramidal Ganglion axis cylinder process, Ul of t the Grey Cortex of the Human 2.0. becoming in- Cerebrum, y wath =e" The process of theapex and the other processes vested witn a medul- branch and break up into the fine nerve net- a 5 work. The median process of the base of the lary sheath 1S a nerve pyramid remains unbranched, and becomes a an axis cylinder of a nerve-fibre. (Atlas.) fibre of the central Chap. XVIII.] CEREBRUM ANL CEREBELLUM. "159 white matter. The other processes, sooner or later in their course, branch and break up finally into the nerve ground network of the grey matter. (4) A thin stratum of small irregular branched ganglion cells, the granular formation of Meynert. (5) A last stratum of spindle-shaped and branched ganglion cells, ex- tending parallel to the surface. 207. According to Meynert, the grey cortex of the posterior portion of the occipital lobe about the sulcus hippocampi consists of eight layers, the granular for- mation being the principal one. -In the grey cortex of the cornu Ammonis, on the other hand, the third layer is the principal layer, the fourth being wanting. In the claustrum (part of the wall of the Sylvian fissure), the spindle-shaped cells of the fourth layer form the principal stratum. 208. The bulbus olfactorius contains in most mammals, but not in man, a small central cavity lined with columnar ciliated epithelial cells. The sub- stance of the bulb around this cavity consists of an upper part, which is white matter, and is a continua- tion of the tractus olfactorius. The lower part is grey matter, and contains the following layers, count- ing from below upwards: (1) a layer of non-medul- lated nerve-fibres, each with a neurilemma ; this layer forms farther on the olfactory nerve going to the olfactory organ ; (2) the stratum glomerulosum, com- posed of a number of glomeruli or convolutions, each of which consists of an olfactory nerve-fibre, and in addition to it numerous small neuroglia cells ; (3) stratum gelatinosum of Lockhart Clarke, composed of a fine nerve network, and embedded in it multi- polar ganglion cells; (4) a last and thickest layer of nuclei embedded in a network of fibrils, and similar in structure with the “ nuclear layer.” 209. IV. The mesencephaion.—The fourth ventricle above the upper part of the pons Varolii 160° ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XVIII. closes again into a small canal (the agueductus Sylvit) which having passed in front out of the region of the corpora quadrigemina opens out again as the third ventricle. The parts around the aqueductus Sylvii represent the mesencephalon (Fig. 91), developed from the middle brain vesicle in the embryo. They include the wall of the aqueductus Sylvii, the corpora quadrigemina, and the crura cerebri. The aqueductus Sylvw is lined with epithelium and a layer of neuroglia continued from the fourth ventricle. The raphe of the medulla and of the pons are continued into the lower wall of the aqueductus. The lining layer of neuroglia is on its antero-inferior aspect surrounded by a layer of grey substance con- tinued from the grey substance of the floor of the fourth ventricle. It contains in a nerve network numerous multipolar ganglion cells grouped into nerve nuclei, connected with the third, fourth, and part of the fifth pair of nerves. In front of this layer is one of con- siderable thickness called the tegmentum, which is the © dorsal or posterior portion of the crus cerebri. 210. The corpora quadrigemina.—Each of the two lower lobes consists of a superficial layer of white matter, and a deep grey portion, containing multipolar ganglion cells of various sizes embedded in a fine nerve network. Between this and the grey substance of the wall of the aqueductus Sylvii are tracts of white matter, forming part of the jillet. In each of the two upper lobes there is also a super- ficial layer of white matter, beneath which is a layer of grey matter (stratum cinereum) ; underneath this is the main portion (the stratum opticum) consisting of longitudinal tracts of nerve-fibres, between which are small masses of grey substance. Between this stratum opticum and the grey matter forming the wall of the aqueductus Sylvii is a layer of white matter, part of the fillet. Chap. XVIII.] CEREBRUM AND CEREBELLUM. 161 211. The erus cerebri of each side consists of an antero-inferior, middle, and postero-inferior portion. The antero-inferior or ventral portion is the crusta, or pes; the postero-inferior or dorsal portion is the teg- mentum. Between the two is the substantia nigra. The erusta is composed of longitudinal tracts of me- dullated nerve-fibres passing from themargin of the pons Varolii to the internal capsule of the thalamencephalon, and farther into the white matter of the hemisphere. 212. The tegmentum has been mentioned above as being situated in front of the grey matter forming the anterior wall of the aqueductus Sylvii. The tegmentum is a prolongation of the reticular formation of the pons Varolii and medulla (see above), «.e., small masses of grey substance separated by tracts of nerve- fibres, most of which run in a longitudinal or transverse direction. The longitudinal bundles include a con- tinuation of the white matter of the cerebellum, mentioned in a previous page as the superior peduncle of the cerebellum, or the pedunculus cerebelli ad cerebrum. These undergo total decussation in the upper part of the mesencephalon, and ultimately enter the thalamus opticus. 213. The substantia nigra is grey matter situated between the two crusta and the tegmentum ; it has received its name from the numerous dark pigment granules lodged in the substance of its gan- glion cells. These are small and multipolar. 214. V. The thalamencephalon and corpus striataum.—The former comprises the parts of the brain situated round the third ventricle, the most im- portant being the thalamus, the conarium or pineal body, the corpora albicantia, the infundibulum and tuber cinereum, and the pituitary body or hypophysis cerebri. The corpus striatum is the ganglion of the cerebral hemisphere, and like it originates from the frontal part of the first cerebral vesicle of the embryo. L—l1 ate 162 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XVIII. 215. The thalamus opticus consists of a super- ficial layer of white, and a centre of grey matter. In this numerous multipolar ganglion cells are noticed. The white matter in the outer portion is very con- siderable, and of great importance from its connec- tions. From it radiate tracts of medullated nerve- fibres, which join the tracts of the internal capsule on their way to and from the different parts of the cerebral hemisphere. The superior peduncle of the cerebellum, after its decussation with that of the opposite side, passes - into the white matter of the thalamus. The trac- tus opticus is connected with the outer white matter of the posterior portion of the thalamus—ze., the pulvinar. - 216. The corpus striatum, as stated before, is considered as the ganglion of the cerebral hemi- sphere. It consists of the nucleus caudatus and the nucleus lenticularis. 'The former projects into the lateral ventricle, the latter is the outer portion of the corpus striatum. The nucleus lenticularis is separated from the nucleus caudatus and from the anterior portion of the thalamus opticus by tracts of medullated nerve-fibres, known as the internal capsule. On the outer surface of the nucleus lenticularis is a thin lamina of white matter which is the external capsule. This is separated from the white matter of the cerebral convolutions at this part—ze., the island of Reil—by a thin lamina of grey matter, called the claustrwm. The nucleus caudatus and lenti- cularis. consist of grey matter with larger and smaller groups of multipolar ganglion cells, permeated by tracts of medullated nerve-fibres, which originate in the grey matter. These tracts of white matter pass transversely and obliquely into the internal capsule, and .are to be traced on the one hand to the white matter of the convolutions of the cerebral hemisphere, Chap. XIX.) ZHE CEREBRO-SPINAL GANGLIA. 163 (which is, however, doubted by many observers), and on the other into the crusta of the crus cerebri. 217. The internal capsule is one of the most important masses of white matter; it contains the tracts of medullated nerve-fibres which pass between the white matter of the cerebral hemisphere and the crus cerebri—.e., the corona radiata of Reil ; further, it contains tracts of medullated nerve-fibres passing between the thalamus opticus and the white matter of the cerebral hemispheres ; and, finally, it contains tracts of nerve-fibres passing between the corpus striatum and the crus cerebri. 218. The pineal body, or conarium, and the anterior lobe of the hypophysis cerebri, are epithelial in structure and origin, and will be described in a future chapter. The pineal gland contains a large amount of calcareous matter—brainsand. The corpora albicantia are masses of white matter —z.e¢., medullated nerve-fibres; each corpus albicans includes a centre of grey substance. The infundibulum and tuber cinereum at the floor of the third ventricle are composed of grey matter ; the latter extends between the corpora albicantia to the optic commissure, while the former is connected with the posterior or minor lobe of the hypophysis, CHAPTER XIX. THE CEREBRO-SPINAL GANGLIA. 219. THE ganglia connected with the posterior roots of the spinal nerves, and with some of the roots of the cerebral nerves, Gasserian, otic, geni- culate, ciliary, Meckel’s ganglion, the ganglia of 164 Eements or Hisroxocy. (Chap. XIX. the branches of the acoustic nerve, the submaxillary ganglion, &c.—possess a capsule of fibrous connective tissue continuous with the epineurium of the afferent and efferent nerve trunks. The interior of the ganglion is subdivided into smaller or larger divisions, contain- ing nerve bundles with their perineurium, or larger and smaller groups of ganglion cells. In the spinal ganglia these latter are generally dis- posed about the cortical part, whereas the centre of the ganglia is chiefly occupied by bundles of nerve-fibres. 220. The ganglion cells differ very greatly in size, some being as big, and bigger, than a large multipolar ganglion cell of the anterior horn of the cord, others much smaller. Hach cell has a large oval nucleus, including a network, with one or two large nucleoli. Its substance shows a distinct fibrillation. Each cell of the ganglia in man and mammals is wnipolar (Fig. 94), flask or pear-shaped, and invested in a hyaline capsule, lined with a more or less con- tinuous layer of nucleated endo- Fig. 94-A large and smatt thelial cell-plates. The single Ganglion cel meth process of the ganglion cell is The axis cylinder, after leaving finely and longitudinally stri- oma Sisome into_a medul- ated, and is an axis cylinder into two, medullated fibres. Hrocess, Immediately after leaving the cell body it is much convoluted (Retzius); it is then covered with a me- dullary sheath, and so becomes a medullated nerve: Chap. XIX.) Zaz Ceresro-SpiwAL GANGLIA. 165 fibre. The capsule of the ganglion cell is continued on the axis cylinder process, and, farther on, on the medullated nerve-fibre, as the neurilemma; while the endothelial plates of the capsule pass into the nerve corpuscles lining the neurilemma, their number greatly diminishing (Fig. 95). 221. In the rabbit this medullated nerve-fibre at its first node of Ranvier, which is not at a great distance from the ganglion cell, divides into two me- dullated nerve-fibres in the shape of a T; one branch is supposed by Ranvier to pass to the cord, the other to the periphery. In man, this T-shaped division has also been observed by Retzius, but it cannot be said with certainty that in rabbit or man every axis cylinder process shows this T-shaped division. Retzius observed this T-shaped division also in the Gasserian, geniculate, and vagus gan- gla in man. The ganglion cells are not unipolar in all cerebral ganglia ; in the ciliary and otic ganglia there are a good many ganglion cells which are multipolar. 222. Numerous ganglia of micro- scopic size are to be found in the sub-maxillary (salivary) gland; they are of different sizes, and are in reality ganglionic enlargements of larger or smaller nerve-bundles. Each ganglion is invested in connective tissue continuous with the perineu- Fig. 95—An iso- lated Ganglion Cell of a Spinal Ganglion of Toad. The axis cylinder rium, and the ganglion cells are unipolar, and of the same nature as those described above, each being possessed of an axis cylinder process, which becomes 166 _ ELEMENTS oF HisTOLoGy. — [Chap. XX. soon connected with a nerve-fibre. At the back of the tongue there are similar small microscopic ganglia. CHAPTER XX. THE SYMPATHETIC SYSTEM. 223. THE sympathetic nerve-branches exactly re- semble the cerebro-spinal nerves in their connective tissue investments (epi- peri- and endo-neurium), and A if | | Fig. 96.—Sympathetic Nerves. A, A small bundle invested in an endothelial sheath perineurium; B, one medullated and three non-medullated nerve-fibres of various sizes; the largest shows division; 0, two varicose nerve-fibres. (Atlas.) in the arrangement of the fibres in bundles (Fig. 1 i 96; A). Most of the nerve-fibres in the bundles are non-medullated or Remak’s fibres (Fig. 96, B), each Chap. XX.] THe SYMPATHETIC SYSTEM. 167 being an axis cylinder invested in a neurilemma, with _ oblong nuclei indicative of nerve corpuscles. ‘But there are some medullated nerve-fibres to be met with in Fig. 97.—A group of Ganglion Cells interposed in a bundle of Sympa- thetic Nerve-fibres ; from the Bladder of a Rabbit. (Handbook) each bundle, at least, of the larger nerve-trunks. These in some cases show the medullary sheath more or less discontinuous, and with a varicose outline Fig, 98.—A small collection of Ganglion Cells along a small Bundle of Sympathetic Nerve-fibres in the Bladder of the Rabbit. Each ganglion cell possesses a capsule. The substance of the ey a cell is prolonged as the axis cylinder of a nerve-fibre. (Atlas. (Fig. 96, c); owing toa uniform local accumulation of fluid between it and the axis cylinder. The small or microscopic bundles of nerve-fibres have an endothelial 168 | Erements OF HisTotocy. — {Chap. XX. (perineural) sheath. The small and large branches form always rich plexuses. 224. In connection with the macroscopic and microscopic sympathetic nerve-branches, are gang- lionic enlargements. They occur in some organs very numerously—e.g., alimentary canal, urinary bladder _ (Fig. 97 and Fig. 98), respiratory or- gans—and are of all sizes, from a few ganglion cells placed between, or laterally to, the nerve-fibres of a small bundle, to oval, spherical, or irregularly - shaped masses of ganglion cells placed in the course of a_ large nerve- bundle, or situated at the point of anastomosis of two or more nerve- branches. The ganglion cells (Fig. 99) are of very different sizes, each possess- ing a large oval or spherical nucleus with one or two Fig. 99.—Sympathetic Ganglion Cell of Man. 1 . Thei The ganglion ol i multnolarench processre, DUCLCOLL Theis cell becomes a non-medullated nerve-Abre, (Rey shape 18 spherical pap Heine) or oval, flask- shaped, club-shaped, or pear-shaped; they possess either one, two, or more processes, being uni-, bi-+ Chap. XX} Ze SyuPArHeric SysTemM. 169 or multi-polar. The cell is invested in a capsule lined with nucleated cells, both being continued on the pro- cesses as neurilemma and nerve corpuscles respectively. ‘The processes of the ganglion cells are all axis cylinder processes, and invested in the neurilemma, thus representing non-medul- lated nerve-fibres. They do not become as a rule medullated. 225. In the frog (Beale, Arnold) and also in some few instances in the mammal, the sympathetic ganglion cell gives off one straight ams cylinder process, into which the sub- stance of the ganglion cell is prolonged, This is entwined by a thin spiral fibre (Fig. 100), taking its origin by two or more rootlets from the ganglion cell substance, and circling round the (thicker) straight axis cylinder process. A single neurilemma ensheathes them both. Soon the spiral fibre leaves the axis cylinder process, becoming invested with a medullary sheath and its own neurilemma, thus forming a medullated fibre, whereas the Ai. straight axis cylinder continues yi, 100--A sympathetic its course as a non-medullated danglion Cell of the Frog, nerve-fibre (Key and Retzius). ofp ait the! opine Ate ; ves ssn ge Ft ee fibre ; . 226. The ganglia i aE COnNSCe dullated fibre. (Key and tion with the plexuses of nerve Retzius.) branches of the heart, the ganglia in the plexus of non-medullated nerve-fibres existing between the longitudinal and circular coat to Eiements oF HisToLocy. (Chap. XX. of the external muscular coat in the alimentary canal, known as the plexus myentericus of Auerbach, the ganglia in the plexus of nerve branches of the sub- Fig. 101.—Plexus of fine des, peor Nerve-fibres, with Ganglionic. Enlargements in the N Points. From the Plexus of Meissner in the Submucous Tissue of the Intestine. a, Fine nerve-fibres; 5, groups of ganglion cells interposed between the nerve-fibres. mucous tissue in the alimentary canal, known as Meissner’s plexus (Fig. 101), the ganglia in the nervous plexuses in the outer wall of the bladder, in the bron- chial wall, and in the trachea, and lastly the ganglia in connection with the nerves supplying the ciliary muscle of the eye, all belong to the sympathetic system. NE ee ee ee eee = Chap. XX1.] 171 CHAPTER XXIL THE TEETH. 227. A HUMAN tooth, adult and milk-tooth, consists (Fig. 102) of (a) the enamel covering the crown, (0d) the dentine forming the bulk of the _ whole tooth, and surrounding the pulp-cavity both of the crown and fangs, (c) the pulp-cavity, and (d) the cement or crusta petrosa. This cement covers \the outside of the dentine of the fang or fangs, in the same way as the enamel covers the dentine of the crown. The crusta pe- trosa is covered on its outside by a dense fibrous tissue acting as a perios- - teum to it, and is fixed by it to the inner surface of the bone forming the wall of the alveolar cavity. 228. The enamel (Fig. 103) consists of thin microscopic pris- matic elements, the enamel prisms placed closely, and extending in Fig. 102.—Longitudinal 4, pe CN Ee ants deen nUe =S Section through the molar Tooth of Cat. a, Enamel; 4, dentine; c, crusta petrosa; dand eé, periosteum ; /, bone of alveo- lus. (Wi eyer, in Stricker’s Manuald 172 Evemenrs or Hisrorocy. (Chap. XXi. a vertical direction from the surface to the dentine. When viewed in transverse section, the enamel prisms appear of an hexagonal outline, and separated by a very fine interstitial cement substance. The outline of the _ enamel prisms is not straight, but wavy, so that the prisms appear varicose. The prisms are aggregated into bundles, which are not quite parallel, but more or less slightly overlap one another. On a longitudinal section through a tooth, the appearance of alternate Fig. 103.—Enamel Prisms. A, In longitudinal view; B, in cross section. -(Kolliker.) light and dark stripes in the enamel is thus produced. Besides this there are seen in the enamel dark hori- zontal curved lines, the brown parallel stripes of Retzius, probably due to inequalities in the density of - the enamel prisms produced by the successive forma- tion of layers of the enamel. The enamel consists _ of lime-salts: phosphate, carbonate, and fluoride of calcium with corresponding magnesium salts. In young teeth the free surface of the enamel is covered with a delicate cuticle (the cuticle of Nasmyth), a single layer of non-nucleated - scales. In adult teeth this cuticle is wanting, having been rubbed off. 229. The demtime is the principal part of the hard cee S tes trix; this is a reticular Chap. XXI.] THE TEETH. ° 173 substances of the tooth. It forms a complete invest- ment of the pulp cavity of the crown and fang, being slightly thicker in the former than in the latter region. The dentine is composed of (Fig. 104): (1) a homogeneous ma- tissue of fine fibrils im- pregnated with lime- salts, and thus resem- bles the matrix of bone; (2) long fine canals, the dentinal canals or tubes passing in a more or less spiral manner, and ver- tically from the inner to the outer surface of the dentine. These tubes are branched; they open in the pulp cavity with their broadest part, and become smaller as they approach the outer sur- face of the dentine. Each canal is lined with a delicate sheath—the dentinal sheath. Inside the tube is a fibre, the dentinal fibre, a solid Fig. 104.—From a Section through elastic fibre originating ore PoCwa oF Mer. =< * x a, petrosa, with large bone cor- with “its” thickest “part © “puset in wantice i Waliovan iG at the pulp side of the — Stricker’s Manual.) ” me dentine from cells lining the outer surface of the pulp, and called odontoblasts. On the outer surface of the dentine, both in the region of the enamel and crusta petrosa, the dentinal 174 EremenTs OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XXI. tubes pass into a layer of intercommunicating irregular branched spaces, the interglobular spaces of Czermak, or the granular layer of Purkinje. These communicate with spaces existing between the bundles of enamel prisms of the crown, as well as with the bone laminze of the crusta petrosa of the fang. The interglobular spaces contain each a branched nucleated cell. The dentinal fibres anastomose with the processes of these cells. The incremental lines of Salter are lines more or less parallel to the surface, owing to imperfectly cal- cified dentine—the interglobular substance of Czermak. The lines of Schreger are curved lines parallel to the surface, and due to the optical effect of simultaneous curvatures of dentinal fibres. 230. The cement is osseous substance, being lamellated bone matrix with bone corpuscles. There are no Haversian canals. 231. The pulp is richly supplied with blood-vessels, forming networks, and extending chiefly in a direction parallel to the long axis of the tooth. Numerous medullated nerve-fibres forming plexuses are met with in the pulp tissue; on the outer surface of the pulp they become non-medullated fibres, and probably ascend in the dentinal tubes. The matrix of the pulp is formed by a transparent network of richly branched cells, similar to the network of cells forming the matrix of gelatinous connective tissue. 232. On the outer surface of the pulp—z.e., the one in contact with the inner surface of the dentine— is a layer of nucleated cells, which are elongated, more or less columnar. These are the odontoblasts proper. Between them are wedged in more or less spindle-shaped nucleated cells, the outer or distal pro- cess of which passes into a dentinal fibre. The odonto- blasts proper are concerned in the production of the dentinal matrix, according to some by.a continuous growth of the distal or outer part of the cell and ~ ee a= ~ Chap. XXI.) - THE TEETH. 175 a petrifaction of this increment, according to others by a secretion by the cell of the dentinal matrix. Waldeyer, Tomes, and others, consider the odontoblasts proper concerned in the production both of the dentinal matrix and dentinal fibres. The odontoblasts proper and the spindle-shaped cells are continuous with the branched cells of the pulp matrix. 223. Development of teeth.—The first rudi- ment of a tooth in the embryo appears as early as the second month. It isa solid cylindrical prolongation of the stratified epithelium of the surface into the depth of the embryonic mucous membrane. Along the border of the jaws the epithelium appears thickened, and the subjacent mucous membrane forms there a depression—the primitive dental groove. Into this groove the solid cylindrical prolongation of the surface epithelium takes place. This prolongation is the rudiment of the enamel organ. While continuing to grow towards the depth, it soon broadens at its deepest part, and the surrounding vascular mucous membrane condenses at the bottom of the prolongation as the rudiment of the tooth papilla. While the distal part of the enamel organ continues to grow towards the depth, it gradually embraces the tooth papilla in the shape of a cap—the enamel cap. During this time the connection between the surface epithelium and the enamel cap becomes greatly thinned out and pushed on one side, owing to the growth of the enamel cap and papilla taking place chiefly to one side of the original dental groove. 234, The enamel cap (Fig. 105) is composed of three strata—an inner, middle, and outer stratum. The inner stratum is a layer of beautiful columnar epithelial cells, the enamel cells; they were ori- ginally continuous with the deep layer or the columnar cells of the surface epithelium. The middle stratum is the thickest and is of great transparency, 176 Evrementrs oF HISTOLOGY. — (Chap. XX1. owing to a transformation of the middle layer of the epithelial cells into a spongy gelatinous tissue, due to accumulation of fluid between the epithelial cells of this layer, and to a reduction of its substance to thin nucleated plates, apparently branched. The Fig. 105.—From a Section through the Tooth and Lower Jaw of Fetal Kitten. a, Epithelium of the free surface of the gum ; 4, the mucous membrane of same ; e, spongy bone of jaw; d, papilla of tooth; e, odontoblasts; f, dentine; g, enamel ; kh, membrane of Nasmyth ; i, enamel cells; J, middle layer of enamel organ; *, outer layer of enamel organ. outer stratum consists of one or more layers of polyhedral cells, continuous with the deep layers of cells of the epithelium of the surface of the gum. Outside the enamel cap is the gelatinous vascular tissue of the mucous membrane of the gum. 235. The fcetal tooth papilla is a vascular embryo- nal or gelatinous tissue ; on its outer surface a con- a ——— er Chap. XXI.] ZHE TEETH. 177 densation of its cells is soon noticeable into a more or less continuous stratum of elongated or columnar cells, the odontoblasts. 236. The dentine is formed in connection with the odontoblasts (Fig. 105) ; on its outside appears the enamel formed by the enamel cells, 2.e., the inner layer of the enamel organ. The dentine and enamel are deposited gradually, and in layers. At first they are soft tissues, showing a vertical differentiation corresponding to the individual cells of the enamel cells and odontoblasts respectively. Soon lime salts are deposited in it, at first imperfectly, but afterwards a perfect petrifaction takes place. The layer of most recently formed enamel and dentine is more or less distinctly marked off from the more advanced layer, the most recently formed layer of the enamel being ‘Situated next to the enamel cells, that of the dentine next to the odontoblasts. The milk tooth remains buried in the mucous membrane of the gum. When it breaks through, the enamel remains covered with—~.e., carries with it— the inner stratum of the enamel organ only, 2.¢., the enamel cells (Fig. 105, 2); these at the same time as © the surface of the enamel increases become much flattened, and, finally losing their nuclei, are con- verted into a layer of transparent scales, the membrane or cuticle of Nasmyth. 237. Long before the milk tooth breaks through the gum, there appears a solid cylindrical mass of epithelial cells extending into the depth from the connection between the enamel organ and the epithe- lium of the surface of the gum mentioned above. This epithelial outgrowth represents the germ for the enamel organ of the permanent tooth; but it remains stationary in its growth till the time arrives for the milk tooth to be supplanted by a permanent tooth. Then that rudiment undergoes exactly the u—l 178 Exrements or Hisrotocy. [Chap. XXI. same changes of growth as the enamel organ of the milk tooth did in the first period of fcetal life. A: new tooth is thus formed in the depth of the alveolar cavity of a mjlk tooth, and the growth of the former in size and towards the surface gradually lifts the latter out of its socket. mE, Or CHAPTER XXII. ; THE SALIVARY GLANDS. 238. THE salivary glands, according to their structure and secretion, are of the following kinds :— (1) Zrue salivary (Fig g. 106), serous, or albuminous Fig. 106.—From a Section through a Serous or True + Sidaediaey Gland ; part of the Human Sub-mazxillary. #, The gland alveoli, lined with the albuminous ‘salivary cells ;” 3, intralobular duct cut transversely. (Atlas.) Chap. XXin.) Zwe SarivaryY GLANDS. 179° glands, such as the parotid of man and mammals, the sub-maxillary and orbital of the rabbit, the sub-' maxillary of the guinea-pig. They secrete true, thin, watery saliva. : (2) Mucous glands, such as the sub-maxillary and orbital of the cat and dog (Fig. 107), the sub-lingual Fig. 107.—From a Section through the Orbital (mucous) Gland of Dog. Quiescent state. The alveoli are lined with transparent “ mucous cells,” and outside these are the demilunes of Heidenhain. (Heidenhain.) of the cat, dog, rabbit, and guinea-pig. They secrete thickish mucus. (3) Mixed salivary, or muco-salivary glands, such as the sub-maxillary and sub-lingual in man and in the ape. In addition to the three salivary glands (parotid, sub-maxillary, and sub-lingual) there are in some cases, as in the rabbit and the guinea-pig, two minute additional. glands, one intimately annexed to the parotid and the other to the sub-maxillary, and both of the nature of a mucous gland. These are the superior and inferior admaxillary glands 180 Erements or HisTotoGy. [Chap. XXI1. 239. The framework.—Each salivary gland is enveloped in a fibrous connective tissue capsule, in connection with which are fibrous trakecule and septa in the interior of the gland, by which the sub- stance of the latter is subdivided into lobes, these again into lobules, and these finally into the alveoli or acini. The duct, large vessels and nerves pass to and from the gland by the hilum. The con- nective tissue is of loose texture, contains elastic fibres, and, in some instances more, in others less, numerous lymphoid cells. In the sub-lingual gland they are so numerous that they form continuous rows between the alveoli. The connective tissue matrix between the alveoli is chiefly represented by fine bundles of fibrous tissue, and branched connective tissue corpuscles. 240. The ducts.—Following the chief duct of the gland through the hilum into the interior, we see that it divides into several large branches, according to the number of lobes; each of these breaks off into several branches, one for each lobule. Entering the lobule the duct becomes very minute, and passing along it gives off laterally several minute ducts, these are the intralobular ducts, or the salivary tubes of Pfliiger. The larger ducts are called the ¢néer- lobular, and further, interlobar ducts. Each of the latter consists of a limiting membrana propria, strengthened, according to the size of the duct, by thicker or thinner trabecule of connective tissue. In the chief branches there is present in addition ,non- striped muscular tissue. The interior of the duct is a cavity lined with a layer of columnar epithelial cells. In the largest branches there is, outside this layer and inside the membrana propria, a layer of small polyhedral cells. 241. The intralobular ducts, or the salivary tubes of Pfliiger, consist of a limiting membrana ~ Chap. XXII.) ZHeE SALIVARY GLANDS. 181 propria, with a single layer of columnar epithelial cells. Each of these has a spherical nucleus in about the middle; the outer half of the cell substance shows very marked longitudinal striation, due to more or less coarse fibrille (see Fig. 106). The inner half, i.e., the one bordering the lumen of the duct, is only very faintly striated. The outline of these salivary tubes is never smooth, but irregular, 2.e., the diameter of the tube varies from place to place. Not in all salivary glands do the epithelial cells of the intralobular ducts show this coarse fibrillation in the outer part of their substance; e¢.., it is not present in the sub-lingual gland of the dog or the guinea-pig. 242. ‘The ends of the branches of the salivary tubes are connected with the secreting parts of the lobule, 7.¢., the acini or alveolii These always very conspicuously differ in structure from the salivary tubes, and, as a rule, are larger in diameter. The last part of the duct which is in immediate connection with. the alveoli is the intermediate part, this -being-inter- posed, as it were, between the alveoli and the salivary tube with fibrillated epithelium. The intermediate part is much narrower than the salivary tube, and is lined with a single layer of very flattened epithelial cells, each with a single oval nucleus; the boundary is formed by the membrana propria, continued from the salivary tube. The lumen of the intermediate part is much smaller than that of the salivary tube, and is generally lined with a fine hyaline membrane, with here and there an oblong nucleus in it. At the point of transition of the salivary tube into the intermediate part there is generally a sudden diminution in size of the former, and the columnar cells of the salivary tube are replaced by polyhedral cells ; this is the neck of the intermediate part. In some salivary glands, especially in the mucous, this / 182 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. {[Chap. XXII. neck is the only portion of the intermediate part present, ¢.g., in the sub-maxillary and orbital glands of the dog and cat, and in the sub-lingual of the rabbit. In others, especially in the serous salivary glands, as the parotid of man and mammals, the sub-maxillary of the rabbit and guinea-pig, and in the mixed salivary, as the sub-maxillary and sub-lingual of man, there exists after the neck a long intermediate part, which gives off several shorter or longer branches of the same kind, all ending in alveoli. 243. The alveoli or acimi are the essential or secreting part of the gland; they are flask-shaped, club-shaped, shorter or longer cylindrical tubes, more or less wavy, or if long, more or less convoluted ; many of them are branched. Generally several open into the same intermediate part of a salivary. tube. The acini are much larger in diameter than the intermediate part, and slightly larger, or about as large as the intralobular ducts. But there is a dif- ference in this respect between the acini of a serous and a mucous salivary gland ; in the former the acini are smaller than in the latter. The membrana propria of the intermediate duct is continued as the membrana propria of the acini. This is a reticulated structure, being in reality a basket- shaped network of hyaline branched nucleated cells (Boll). The lumen of the acini is minute in the serous, but is larger in the mucous glands; it is in both glands smaller during secretion than during rest. 244. The epithelial cells lining the acini are called the salivary cells; they are of different characters in the different salivary glands, and chiefly determine the nature of the gland. The cells are separated from one another by a fluid albuminous cement substance. (1) In the serous or true salivary glands, as parotid of man and mammals, sub-maxillary SS ct on eh Chap. XXIL] ZDwz SALIVARY GLANDS. 183 of rabbit and guinea-pig, the salivary cells form a single layer of shorter or longer columnar or pyra- midal albuminous cells, composed of a densely reticu- lated protoplasm, and containing a spherical nucleus in the outer part of the cell. (2) In the mucous glands, such as the sub-lingual of the guinea-pig, or the admaxillary of the same animal, the cells lining the acini form a single layer of goblet-shaped mucous cells, such as have been described in par. 25. Each cell consists of an inner principal part, composed of a transparent mucoid substance (contained in a wide- meshed reticulum of the protoplasm), and.of an outer - small, more opaque part, containing a compressed and flattened nucleus. This part is drawn out in a fine - extremity, which, being curved in a direction parallel to the surface of the acinus, is imbricated on its neighbours. 245. In the case of the sub-maxillary and orbital glands of the dog, and the sub-lingual of the rabbit, there exist, in addition to, and outside of the mucous cells lining the acini, but within the membrana propria, from place to place crescentic masses, being the demz- lunes of Heidenhain, or the crescents of Gianuzzi (see Fig. 107). Each is composed of several polyhedral granular-looking cells, each with a spherical nucleus ; the cells at the margin of the crescent are of course thinner than those forming the middle. Heiden- hain and his pupils, Lavdovski and others, have shown that, during prolonged exhausting stimula- tion of the sub-maxillary and orbital of the dog, all the lining cylindrical mucous cells become re- placed by small polyhedral cells, similar to those constituting the crescents, while at the same time the acini become smaller (Fig. 108). These ob- servers maintain that this change is due to a total destruction of the mucous cells, and a replacement of them by new ones, derived by multiplication 184 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXII. from the crescent cells. This is improbable, since, during ordinary conditions of secretions, there is no disappearance of the mucous cells as such ; they change ; in size, be- coming larger during ‘secre- tion, and their contents are converted into perfect mucus. It is probable that, on pro- longed exhaus- tive stimula- tion, the mucous cells collapse into the small cells, seen by Fig. 108.—From a Section through the Orbital Heidenhainand Gland of Dog, after prolonged electrical his pupils. stimulation. The acini are lined with small granular cells. ? : 46. The (Laydovyski.) acini of the sub-lingual of the dog are again different in structure both from those of the sub-maxillary of the dog and of the sub-lingual of the guinea-pig, for the acini are there lined either with mucous cells or with columnar albuminous cells, or the two kinds of cells follow one another im the same alveolus. This gland is a sort of intermediate form be- tween the sub-lingual of man and the sub-maxillary of man and ape, these are the mixed or muco-salivary glands. In these the great number of acini are serous, @.¢., small, with small lumen, and lined with albuminous cells, whereas there are always present a few acini exactly like those of a mucous gland. The two kinds of acini are in direct continuity witb Chap.XXI1.] .ZHE SALIVARY GLANDS. ~. ee one another. In some conditions there are only very few mucous acini to be met with within the lobule, so few sometimes that they seem to be altogether absent ; in others they are numerous, but even under most favourable conditions form only a fraction of the number of the serous acini. In the sub-lingual of man they are much more frequent, and for this reason this gland possesses a great resemblance to the sub- lingual of the dog. ; What appears to be crescents,in the mucous acini Fig. 109.—Acini of Serous Gland. A, At rest; B, first stage of secretion; c, prolonged secretion. (Langley.) of the human gland are an oblique view of albuminous cells lining the acini at the transition between the mucous and serous part of the same gland-tube. 247. The columnar salivary cells lining the acini of the sub-maxillary of the guinea-pig in some condi- tions show two distinct portions, an outer homogeneous or slightly and longitudinally striated substance, and an inner, more transparent, granular-looking part, and in this respect the cells resemble those of the pancreas. (See a future chapter.) | Langley has shown (Fig. 109) that during the © period preparatory to secretion the cells lining the acini of the serous salivary glands become enlarged 186 ELEMENTS OF HIISTOLOGY. {Chap. XXII. and filled with coarse granules ; during secretion these granules become used up, so that the cell-substance grows more transparent, beginning from the outer part of the cell and gradually advancing towards the lumen of the acini. 248. Blood-vessels and Iymphatics.—The lobules are richly supplied with blood-vessels. The arteries break up into numerous capillaries, which with their dense networks surround and entwine the acini. Between the interalveolar connective tissue carrying the capillary blood-vessels and the membrana propria of the acini exist lymph spaces surrounding the greater part of the circumference of the acini and forming an intercommunicating system of spaces. They open into lymphatic vessels accompanying the intralobular ducts, or at the margin of the lobule directly empty themselves into the interlobular lymphatics. The connective tissue between the lobes contains rich plexuses of lymphatics. 249. The merve-branches form plexuses in the interlobular tissue. In connection with them are larger or smaller ganglia. They are very numerously met. with in the sub-maxillary, but are absent in the parotid. Some ganglia are present in connection with the nerve-branches surrounding the chief duct of the sub-lingual gland. Pfliiger maintains that the ultimate nerve-fibres are connected with the salivary cells of the acini in man and mammals, but this remains to be proved. ee ee Chap. XXIII] 187 CHAPTER XXIII. THE MOUTH, PHARYNX, AND TONGUE, 250. THe glanmds.—Into the cavity of the mouth and pharynx open very numerous minute glands, which, as regards structure. and secretion, are either serous or mucous. The latter occur in . the depth of the mucous membrane covering the lips, in the buccal mucous membrane, in that of the hard palate, and especially in that of the soft palate and the uvula, in the depth of the mucous membrane of the tonsils, at the back of the tongue, and in the -maucous membrane of the pharynx. The serous glands are found in the back of the tongue, in close proximity to the parts containing the special organs for.the perception of taste—the taste goblets or buds (see below). All the glands are very small, but when isolated they are perceptible to the unaided eye as minute whitish specks, as big as a pin’s head, or bigger. The largest are in the lips, at the back of the tongue and soft palate, where there is something like a grouping of the alveoli around the small branches of the duct, so as to form little lobules. 251. The chief duct generally opens with a narrow mouth on the free surface of the oral cavity; it passes in a vertical or oblique direction through the superficial part of the mucous membrane. In the deeper, looser part (submucous tissue) it branches in two or more small ducts, which take up a number of alveoli. Of course, on the number of minute ducts and alveoli depends the size of the gland. In man, all ducts are lined with a single layer of columnar epithelial cells, longer in the larger than 188 E-LEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [cChap. XXIII. in the smaller ducts; in mammals, the epithelium is a single layer of polyhedral cells, No fibrillation is noticeable in the epithelial cells. At the transition of the terminal ducts into the acini there is occasion- ally a slight enlargement, called the infundibulum; here the granular. looking ~ epithelial cells of the duct change into the columnar transparent mucous cells lining the acini. 252. The acini of these glands are identical with those of the mucous glands described above (Fig. 110)—e.g., the sub- lingual gland, as re- gards size, tubular branched nature, the lining epithelium, and Jumen. In some instances (as in the soft palate Fig. 110.—Part of a Lobule of aMucous and tongue) the duct Gland in the Tongue of Dog. réthed ke sabe s a, Gland tubes (alveoli) viewed in various a é xp “directions ; they are lined with transparent Jljned ‘with ciliated “mucous cells;” d, duct, lined with small ‘ . polyhedral cells, (Atlas.) columnar epithelium, The stratified epithe- lium of the surface is generally continued a short dis- tance into the mouth of the duct. 253. The serous glands at the root of the tongue (von Ebner) differ from the mucous chiefly in the epithelium, size, and lumen of the acini. These are of exactly the same nature and structure as those of the serous or true salivary glands. ee Chap. Xx111.] Mourn, PHARYNX, AND Toncve. 189 Saliva obtained from the mouth contains num- bers of epithelial scales, detached from the surface of the mucous membrane, groups of bacteria and micrococci, and lymph-corpuscles. Some of these are in a state of disintegration, while others are swollen up by the water of the saliva. In these there are contained numbers of granules in rapid oscillation, called Brownian molecular movement. 254. The mucous membrane lining the cavity of the mouth consists of a thin membrane covered on its free surface with a thick stratified pavement epi- thelium, the most superficial cells being scales, more or less changed into horn. Underneath the epithelium is a somewhat dense feltwork of fibrous connective tissue, with numerous elastic fibrils in networks. This part is the corium or mucosa, and it projects into the epithelium in the shape of cylindrical or conical papille. According to the thickness of the epithelium, the papille differ in length. The longest are found where the epithelium is thickest, e.g., in the mucosa of the lips, soft palate, and uvula. Numerous lymph-corpuscles are found in the mucosa of the palate and uvula. Sometimes they amount to diffuse adenoid tissue. The deeper part of the mucous membrane is the submucosa. It is looser in its texture, but it also is composed of fibrous con- nective tissue with elastic fibrils. The glands are here embedded ; adipose tissue in the shape of groups of fat cells or continuous lobules of fat cells are here to be met with. The large vascular and nervous trunks pass to and from the submucosa. 255. Striped muscular tissue is found in the submucosa. Of the lips, soft palate, uvula, and palatine arches, it forms a very conspicuous portion, the sphincter orbicularis, with its outrunners into the mucous membrane of the lips, the muscles of ‘ — ‘ 190 Krements or Histotocy. {Chap. XXtit. , the palate and uvula (levator and tensor palati), and the arcus palato-pharyngeus, and palato-glossus. 256. The last branches of the arteries break up in a dense capillary network on the surface of the mucosa, and from it loops ascend into the papille. Of. course, fat tissue, glands, and muscular tissue re- ceive their own supply. There is a very rich plexus of veins in the superficial part of the mucosa. They are conspicuous by their size and the thinness of their wall. The dymphatics form networks in all layers of the mucosa, including the papille. The large efferent: trunks are situated in the submucosa. The last. outrunners of the nerve branches form a plexus of non- medullated fibres in the superficial layer of the mucosa, whence numerous prumitwe jfibrille ascend into the epithelium to form networks. Meissner’s tactile cor- puscles have been found in the papille of the lips and in those of the to 257. In the pharymx the relations remain the same, except in the upper or nasal part, where we find many places covered with columnar ciliated epithelium. As in the palatine tonsils so also here, the mucosa is infiltrated with diffuse adenoid tissue, and with lymph follicles in great numbers. ‘This forms the pharyngeal tonsil of Luschka. In the palatine tonsil and in the pharyngeal tonsil. there are numerous crypts leading from the sur- face into the depth. This is due to the folding of the infiltrated mucosa. Such crypts are, in the pharynx, sometimes lined all through with ciliated epi- thelium, although the parts of the free surface around them are covered with stratified pavement epithelium. 258. The tongue is a fold of the mucous membrane. Its bulk is made up of striped muscular tissue (genio-, hyo-, and stylo-glossus ; according to ion : longitudinalis superior and inferior, and transversus linguee). The lower surface is coyered ~ ———EEE ‘le ay aly, amen Chap. xk111.] Mourx, Prarvvx, AnD Toncve. 191 with a delicate mucous membrane, identical in struc- ture with that lining the rest of the oral cavity, whereas the upper part is covered with a mem- brane, of which the mucosa projects over the free surface as exceedingly numerous fine and short hair- like processes, the papille filiformes, or as less nume- rous isolated somewhat longer and broader mushroom- shaped papille fungiformes. The papille, as well as the pits between them, are covered with stratified pavement epithelium. Each has numbers of minute secondary papille. Their substance, like the mucous” membrane of the tongue, is made up of fibrous connective tissue. This is firmly and intimately connected with the fibrous tissue forming the septa between the muscular bundles of the deeper tissue. The mucous membrane is on the whole thin. It contains large vascular trunks, amongst which the plexus of veins is very conspicuous. On the surface of the mucosa is a rich network of capillary blood- vessels, extending as complex loops into the papille. Lymphatics form rich plexuses in the mucosa and in the deep muscular tissue. Adipose tissue is common between the muscular bundles, especially at the back of the tongue. 259. There are two varieties of glands present in ‘the tongue, the mucous and serous. The latter occur only at the back, and in the immediate neighbourhood of the taste organs; the mucous | glands are chiefly present at the back; but in the human tongue there are small mucous glands (glands of Nuhn) at the tip. All the glands at ’ the back are embedded between the bundles of striped muscular tissue, and thus the movements of the tongue have the effect of squeezing out the secretion of the glands. About the glands numerous nerye bundles are found connected with minute ganglia, 192 Evrements or HisToLocy. (Chap. XXUI. At the root of the tongue the mucous membrane is much thicker, and contains in its mucosa numerous lymph follicles and diffuse adenoid tissue. Thus fi 7 ma LSC %, 4, il Pry yt TOLL PT Oe eu ii1;,{ | iN ate a1) ij ae TA Psa ee Sy Fig. 111.—From a Vertical Section through a Circumvallate Papilla of the Tongue of a Child. a, The stratified pavement epithelium covering the fold around the papilla; 6, the mucous membrane ; s, the serous glands; g, the pit between the fol ae “3 papilla ; in the epithelium of this latter are seen the “ taste goblets.” tlas. 4 , numerous knob-like or fold-like prominences of the mucosa are produced. There are also minute pits or crypts leading into the depth of these prominences. 260. The papillz circumvallate (Fig. 111) are large papille fungiformes, each surrounded by a fold of the mucosa. They contain taste goblets or buds— Chap. XXIII.) MourH, PHARYNX, AND TONGUE. 193 z.¢., the terminal taste organs. At the margin of the tongue, in the region of the circumvallate papille, there are always a few permanent folds, which also contain taste goblets. In some domestic animals these folds assume a definite organisation—e.g., in the rabbit there is an oval or circular organ composed of numbers of parallel and permanent folds, papille Soliate. The papille fungiformes of the rest of the tongue also contain in some placesa taste goblet. But most of the taste goblets are-found on the papill cir-. cumvallate and foliate. In both kinds of structures the taste goblets are placed in several rows close round the bottom of the pit, separating, in the papille circumvallate, the papillee fungiformes from the fold of the mucosa surrounding it: in the papille foliate the pits are represented by groves separating the indi- vidual folds from one another. 261. The taste gob- lets or taste buds are barrel- or flask-shaped structures (Fig. 112), ex- tending in a vertical di- rection through the epi- thelium, from the free surface to the mucosa. Each is composed of a pes of flattened epithelial ‘eis gina: eeledotties RMA cells, elongated in the di- ** “S733 iad ’ rection of the goblet ; these 4, rhe Rk, 4 age 2 next the ‘are the tegmental cells. pitheliam of the surtace” (Atlas) - The interior of the goblet is made up of a bundle of spindle-shaped or staff- shaped taste cells. Each includes an oval nucleus, and is drawn out into an outer and an inner fine n—1 194 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXIV. extremity. The former extends to the free surface, projecting just through the mouth of the goblet, and resembles a fine hair; the latter is generally branched, and passes towards the mucosa; there, probably, it becomes connected with a nerve-fibre, the mucosa of these parts containing rich plexuses of nerve-fibres. Into the pits surrounded by taste goblets open the ducts of the serous glands only (von Ebner). CHAPTER XXIV. THE @SOPHAGUS AND STOMACH, 262. I. THE esophagus.— Beginning with the cesophagus, and ending with the rectum of the large intestine, the wall of the alimentary canal consists of an inner coat or mucous membrane, an outer or mus- cular coat, and outside this a thin fibrous coat, which, commencing with the cardia of the stomach, is the serous covering, or the visceral peritoneum. The epithelium lining the inner or free surface of the mucous membrane of the csophagus is a thick, stratified, pavement epithelium. In Batrachia, not only the oral cavity and pharynx, but also the cesophagus, are lined with ciliated columnar epithelium. The mucous membrane is a fibrous connective tissue membrane, the superficial part of which is dense—the mucosa; this projects, in the shape of small papille, into the epithelium. The deeper, looser portion of the mucous membrane is the swhmucosa ; in it lie small mucous glands, the ducts of which pass in a vertical or oblique direction oe ee ee —_---” Chap. XXIV.) CEsoPHAGUS AND STOMACH. 195 through the mucosa, in order to open on the free sur- face. In man, these glands are comparatively scarce ; in carnivorous animals (dog, cat) they form an almost continuous layer (Fig. 113). - 263. Between the mucosa and submucosa are longitudinal bundles of non-striped muscular tissue. e, The stratified pavement epithelium of the surface ; m, the muscularis mucose ; tite the two is the mucosa; g, the mucous glands; d, ducts of same. * At the beginning of the cesophagus they are absent, -but soon make their appearance—at first as small bundles separated from one another by masses of con- nective tissue; ‘but lower down, about the middle, they form a continuous stratum of longitudinal bundles. This is the muscularis mucose. 196 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XXIV, Outside the submucosa is the muscularis externa. ‘ This consists of a thicker inner circular and an outer thinner longitudinal coat. And outside this is the outer, or limiting, fibrous coat of the esophagus. In man, the outer muscular coat consists of non-striped muscu- lar. tissue, except at the beginning (about the upper third, or less) of the esophagus, which is composed of the striped variety ; but in many mammals almost the whole of the external muscular coat, except the part nearest the cardia, is made up of striped fibres. 264. The large vessels pass into the submucosa, whence their finer branches pass to the surface parts. . The superficial part. of the mucosa and the papille contain the capillary networks. ‘The outer muscular coat and the muscularis mucose have their own vascular supply. There is arich plexus of lymphatics in the mucosa, and this leads to a plexus of larger vessels in the sub- mucosa (Teichmann). The nerves form rich plexuses in the outer fibrous coat; these plexuses include numerous ganglia. A second plexus of non-medullated fibres lies between the longitudinal and circular mus- cular coat; a few ganglia are connected with this plexus. In the submucosa are also plexuses of non- medullated fibres. Now and then a small ganglion is connected also with this plexus, 265. Il. The stomach.—Beginning with the cardia, the mucous membrane of the stomach is covered with a single layer of beautiful thin columnar epithelial cells, most of which are mucus-secreting goblet cells. On the surface of the mucous membrane of the stomach open numerous fine ducts of glands, placed very closely side by side. These extend, more or less vertically, as minute tubes, into the depth of the mucous membrane. In the pyloric end, where the mucous membrane presents a pale aspect, the glands are called the pyloric glands ; in the rest of the stomach, whose mucous ore +7) ae Chap.XXIV.] . @sopxHacus sawp Svromacu. 197 membrane presents a reddish or red-brown appear- ance, they are called the peptic glands. Owing to the very numerous fine ducts opening .on the surface of the mucous membrane, the tissue of this latter appears on a vertical section to be made up of thinner or thicker folds, or villi—plice villose. But they are not real villi. The part of the mucous membrane containing the glands is the mucosa ; outside this is a loose con- nective tissue containing the large vessels—this is the submucosa. _ Between the two, but belonging to the mucosa, is the muscularis mucose, a thick stratum of bundles of non-striped muscular tissue, arranged in most parts of the stomach as an inner circular and an outer longitudinal layer. The tissue of the mucosa is dense, owing to its containing, placed closely side by side, the gland tubes. Be- tween them is a delicate connective tissue, in which the minute capillary blood-vessels pass in a direction vertical to the surface. Numerous small bundles of non-striped muscular fibres pass from the mus- cularis mucosee towards the surface—up to near the epithelium of the surface—forming longitudinal mus- cular sheaths, as it were, around the gland tubes. ‘The plice villose of the superficial part of the mucosa contain fibrous connective tissue and numerous lymphoid cells. 266. The peptic glands (Fig. 114) are more or less wavy tubes, extending down to the muscularis mucose. The deep part is broader than the rest, and is more or less curved, seldom branched. This is the fundus of the gland; near the surface of the mucosa is the thinnest part of the tube; this is the neck. Two or three neighbouring glands join and open into the short cylindrical duct mentioned above. The duct is lined with a layer of columnar epithe- lial cells, continuous and identical with those of the - a ~ 198 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXIV free surface of the mucous membrane. The cavity of the duct is continued as a very fine canal into the neck and through the rest of the gland tube. Next eC) HARARE CUS eb Senko gue Waririe mete Fig. 114.—Peptic Glands. A, Under a low power; d, duct ; n, neck; B, part of the fundus of a gland tube under a high power ; p, parietal cells; c, chief cells. to the lumen is a continuous single layer of more or less transparent, granular-looking, epithelial cells, each with a reticulated protoplasm and a spherical or slightly oval nucleus. In the neck these cells are: ~~ - Chap. XXIV.] Q@sopHAGUS AND STOMACH. 199 polyhedral, but farther downwards increase to cylin- drical cells, and in the fundus of the gland tube they are long columnar. This layer of cells bordering the lumen is the layer of chief cells (Heidenhain.) Outside them is the limiting mem- brana propria of the gland tube. But from place to place, between the mem- brana propria and the chief cells, are single oval sphe- rical or angular large granular and opaque-look- ing cells, called the parietal cells (Heidenhain). These are more numerous in the neck than in any other part of the gland; at the fundus they are few and far between, whereas at the neck they form almost a continuous layer. Their protoplasm is densely reti- culated. 267. The pylorie glands (Fig. 115).—The duct of each pyloric gland is several times longer than in the peptic. The duct of the former occupies in some places as much as half of the thickness of the = =~ “ | — UGbLhsMALWbLLLELEL Tz ———— ET ie & Ne) - & effet Wi Si Sue We “WE, UVES ae = HY BMA < — = fr = Je » fa fans aie ef Ne| Fi \ Hy Bas =| 3 = ” as 4 fet / Pi Ame) a ah ae \ ly! ah — wn tai ea * alee. PEI E\S ws V\e iy AS) | a) Ms i Hdl im TAA EalealiNGy: \) eS. ‘i SN fi 5 se ZAI: \ Bik EDI ; Ae ec lfit ‘ VSO NY \\ se / Zz \ : | y \ e = = We nia= Fig. 115.—From a Vertical Section through the Mucous Membrane at the Pyloric End of the Stomach, s, Free surface; d, ducts of pyloric glands ; 2, neck of same ; m, the gland alveoli; mm, muscularis mucose. (Atlas.) mucosa, whereas that of the latter does not excee in the fundus of the stomach or in the cardia, more than one-fourth or one-fifth of the thickness. The epithelium lining the duct of the pyloric glands is the same as in that of the peptic. Each . 200 - £LEMENTS OF HiSTOLOGY. Chap. XXIV. duct takes up two er three tubes by their short, narrow, thin neck. The main part of each gland tube. is convoluted and slightly branched. The neck is lined with a layer of polyhedral cells, whereas the gland tube has a lining of coltimnar transparent cells, and its lumen is very conspicuous. During exhaustion these cells are smailer and less transparent than during secretion. Their protoplasm in the former state is a denser reticulum than in the latter, the transparent interstitial substance in the meshes of the cell reticulum being increased in amount during secretion. The cells are serous, not mucous, and the se- * cretion of the glands cannot therefore be mucous. According to Ebstein the secretion is pepsin, and so he and Heidenhain consider the pyloric glands as simple peptic glands. But this view is not generally accepted. Between the mucous membrane with peptic glands and the pyloric end of the stomach with pyloric glands there is a narrow imtermediary zone, in which the peptic glands appear by degrees to merge into the pyloric glands. That is, the short duct of the former gradually elongates, the gland tubes get shorter in proportion and convoluted, their lumen gradually enlarges, and the parietal cells become fewer and ultimately disappear. 268. The mucosa contains isolated lymph follicles, glandule lenticulares, and in the pyloric part also groups of these—glandule agminate. The submucosa is of very loose texture, and enables the mucosa to become easily folded in all directions. The muscular coat is very thick, and consists of an outer longitudinal and an inner thicker circular stratum of non-striped muscular tissue. Numerous oblique bundles are found in the inner section of the circular stratum. Chap. XXV.] Smati AND Larcke INTESTINE. 201 The gland tubes are ensheathed in a longitudinal network of capillary blood-vesse/s derived from arteries of the submucosa. This network forms on the surface a special dense horizontal layer, from which the venous branches are derived. The outer muscular coat and the muscularis mucosz possess their own vascular supply. 269. The lymphatics form a network in the mucosa near the fundus of the glands. Into this _ plexus lead lymphatics running longitudinally between the glands anastomosing with one another freely, and extending to near the surface (Lovén). Another plexus belongs to the submucosa. Between the longitudinal and circular stratum of the outer muscular coat, and extending parallel to the surface, is a plexus of non-medullated nerve-branches with a few ganglia in its nodes. This corresponds to the plexus of Auerbach of the intestine, and is destined for the outer muscular coat. A second plexus of non- medullated nerve-branches with ganglia also extending parallel to the surface lies in the submucosa. This cor- responds to the plexus of Meissner of the intestine, and is destined for the muscularis mucose and the mucosa. According to Rabe, the gastric gland tubes in the horse are surrounded by a rich plexus of nerve-fibres, terminating in peculiar spindle-shaped cells, CHAPTER XXV. THE SMALL AND LARGE INTESTINE, 270. Tue epithelium covering the inner or free surface of the mucous membrane of the small and large intestine is a single layer of columnar cells, their protoplasm more or less distinctly longitudinally fibril- lated ; their free surface appears covered with a 262 icine ua or HisTOLoGY. {[Chap. XXV. = ( a? Rents ex Le vertically and finely striated basilar border. Many cells are goblet cells. \ ‘Underneath the epithelium is a Fig. 116.—F roma Longitudinal Sectionthrough asement mem- a Villus of the Small Intestine. a, The epithelium of the surface; 5, non-striped brane, the sub- muscwar fibres. Immediately HEB pets the epithelial endo- epithelium is a basement membrane with ob] ong nuclei; the tissue of the villus is made u reticulum of cells; in its meshes are P mph corpuscles. As in the stomach, so also in the small and large intes- tine, the mucosa is connected with the outer muscular coat by a loose-textured fibrous sab- mucosa, in which lie the large vascular trunks, and. in many places larger or smaller groups of fat cells and lymph cor- puscles. Between the mucosa and submucosa, but belonging to the former, is a layer of non-striped muscular tissue, the muscularis mucose. This is in many places composed of inner circular and outer longi- tudinal bundles, but there are a good many places, especially in the small intestine, where only a layer of longitudinal bundles can be made out. The tissue of the mucosa is similar in structure to adenoid ™ tissue (Fig. 116), consisting of a reticular matrix with flat- thelium of De- bove (see par.39). Pig. 117.—From a Vertical ction through the Mucous Membrane of the Large Intestine of Dog. m, The mucosa containing the cry pts of Lieberktibn, closely placed side by side ; each crypt is lined with alayer of columnar epithelium; mm, muscularis mucose ; s, submucosa. (Atlas.) — —=—” = ee ry 2,2. ——; + Chap. XXV.] Sav4tzt AND LARGE INTESTINE. 203 tened large nucleated endotheloid cells and numerous smaller lymph corpuscles. The mucosa of the small and large intestine contains simple gland tubes, the erypts or follicles of Lieberkiihn (Fig. 117); they are placed vertically and closely side by side, extend- Fig. 118.—From a Vertical Section through a Fold of the ; Mucous Membrane of the Jejunum of Dog. ce, The mucosa, containing the crypts of Lieberktihn, and prolecting as the villi; m, muscularis mucos®; 8, submucosa. (Atlas ing from the free surface, where they open, to the muscularis mucose. These glands possess a large lumen, and are lined with a single i of columnar epithelial cells, many of them goblet cel! 271. In the small intestine the tisind of the mucosa projects beyond the general surface in the shape of very numerous fine, longer or shorter, cylin- drical, conical or leaf-shaped vil (Fig. 118). These are, of course, covered with the columnar epithelium 204 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XXV. of the general surface, and their tissue is the same as that of the mucosa—.e., adenoid tissue—with the addition of : (2) One or two central wide chyle (lymph) vessels (see Fig. 120), their wall being a single layer of endothelial plates.. (b) Along these chyle vessels are longitudinal bundles of non-striped muscular tissue, extending from the base to the apex of the villus, terminating in connection with the cells of the base- ment membrane—z.e., the subepithelial endothelium. (c) A network of Lx es, capillary —_hlood- Ling s vessels extending aS A over the whole of Afi y M the villus close to So A the epithelium of ss J Ty % the surface (Fig. A PY Dey 119). ‘This capil- NF oop lary network de- aa A \) I rives its blood om from an artery in Se See about the middle Fig. 119.—From a Vertical Section through oes a perk of the Small Intestine of Mouse; the Blood- thevillus. 'Twove- weppein axe jected. Ve nous vessels carry The networks of the capillaries of the villi are wellshown. (Atlas.) away the blood from the villus. The Lieberkiihn’s crypts open between the bases of the villi. | At the sides of the villi of the small intestine, and at the sides of the plice villose of the stomach (see a former chapter), there exist amongst the epithe- lium of the surface peculiar goblet-shaped groups of epithelial cells, which, as Watney has shown, are due to local multiplication of the epithelial cells. 272. Lymph follicles occur singly in the submucosa, and extend with their inner part or summit through the muscularis mucose into the mucosa to near the ~~ a. Chap. XXV.] SwALL AND LARGE INTESTINE. 205 internal free surface of the latter (Fig. 120). These - are the solitary lymph follicles of the small and large intestine ; in the latter they are larger than in the former. , ‘ Agminated glands, or Peyer’s glands, are larger or smaller groups of lymph follicles, more or less fused Fig. 120.—From a Section through a part of a Human Peyer’s Patch, showing the distribution of the Lymphatic Vessels in the Mucosa and Submucosa, a, Villi, with central chyle vessel ; 5, Lieberkiihn’s crypts ; ¢, region of muscularis se; f, lymph follicle; g, network of lymphatics around the lymph muco follicle ; 2, lymphatic network of the submucosa; 4, an efferent lymphatic trunk, (Frey.) : with one another, and situated with their main part in the submucosa, but extending with their summit to the epithelium of the free surface of the mucosa. In the lower part of the ileum these Peyer’s glands are very numerous. The epithelium covering the summits of these lymph follicles is invaded by, and more or less replaced by, the lymph corpuscles of the 206 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XXV. - adenoid tissue of the follicles (Watney), similar to what is the case in the tonsils (see par. 124). The outer muscular coat consists of an inner thicker sircular and an outer thinner longitudinal stratum of sion-striped muscular tissue. In the large intestine, in the “ligamenta,” only the longitudinal layer is present, and is much thickened. 273. The blood-vessels form separate systems of capillaries for the serous covering, for the outer mus- cular coat, for the muscularis mucosx, and the richest of all for the mucosa with its Lieberkiihn’s crypts. The capillary network of the villi is connected with that of the rest of the mucosz. The chyle vessel, or vessels of the villi, commence with a blind extremity near the apex of the villi At the base the chyle vessel becomes narrower, and empties itself into a plexus of lymphatic vessels and sinuses belonging to the mucosa, and situated between the crypts of Lieberkiihn (Fig. 120). This network is the same both in the small and large intestine, as is also that of the lymphatics of the submucosa with which the former communicates. The lymph follicles are generally surrounded with sinuous vessels of this plexus. The efferent trunks of the submucous plexus, while passing through the outer muscular coat in order to reach the mesentery, take up the efferent vessels of the plexus of the lymphatics of the muscular coat. The chyle, composed of granules and globules of different but minute sizes, passes from the imner free surface of the mucous membrane of the small intestine through the epithelium (probably through its fluid interstitial cement substance) into the reticulum of the villus matrix, and from thence the central chyle vessel, and farther into the plexus of vessels of the. mucosa and submucosa, Owing to the peripheral disposition of the capillaries in the villi, and owing to the greater Chap. XXV.] SMALL AND LARGE INTESTINE 207 filling with blood of the capillaries during digestion, the villi are thrown into a state of turgescence during this period, in consequence of which the central chyle vessels are kept distended. Absorption is thus. greatly supported. The contraction of the muscular tissue of the villi and of the muscular coat of the in- SBF. pBEDELES" Fig. 1204.—Plexus Myentericus of Auerbach of the Small Intestine of a new-born Child. The minute circles and ovals indicate ganglion cells. (Atlas.) testine greatly facilitates the absorption and discharge of the chyle. 274. The non-medullated nerves. form a rich plexus, called the the plexus myentericus of Auerbach (Fig. 120A), with groups of ganglion cells in the nodes ; this plexus lies between the longitudinal and circular muscular coat. Another plexus connected with the former lies in the submucous tissue ;_ this is the plexus of Meissner, with ganglia, In both ie hei 208 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXVL plexuses the branches are of a very variable thickness ; they are groups of simple axis patient held together by a delicate endothelial sheath. CHAPTER XXVI. THE GLANDS OF BRUNNER, AND THE PANCREAS. 275. At the passage of the pyloric end of the stomach into the duodenum (Fig. 121), and in the first ww Fig. 121.—Vertical Section through the Mucous Membrane of the end of Stomach and commencement of Duodenum. v, Villi of duodenum; 6, a lymph follicle; c, Lieberkiihn’s ery fang d, mucosa of p loric end of stomach ; 39, the alveoli of the »yloric glan t, the same in e submucosa: they are continued into the duodenum as—s. the Brunner’s stands; m, the muscularis mucosp, (Atlas.) = a Po ‘not by any means fie) distinctly as in ‘cells showan outer homogeneous and an inner Chap. XXVI.} - THE PANCREAS. 209 part of the latter, is a continuous layer of gland tissue in the submucosa, composed of convoluted, more or less branched tubes grouped into lobules, and permeated by bundles of non-striped muscular tissue, outrunners of the muscularis mucose. These are the glands of Brunner. Numerous thin ducts lined with a single layer of columnar epithelial cells pass through the mucosa, and open into the crypts of Lieberkiihn be- tween the bases of the villii The gland tubes of Brunner’s glands are identical in structure with the pyloric glands, with which they form a direct ana- tomical continuity. 276. The pancreas (Fig. 122) is in most respects identical in struc- ture with a serous or true salivary . gland. The connec- tive tissue frame- work, the distribu- tion of the blood- vessels and lym- phatics, and of the gland tissue in lobes and lobules, with the corresponding inter- and intra- lobular ducts, is similar in both cases. The ithelium _ lining the latter ducts is only faintly striated, Fig. 122.—From a Section through the Pancreas of Dog. -a, The alveoli (tubes) of the gland; the lining 4: granular-lookin, rtion; @, a minute duct. the salivary tubes. (Atlas.) Tee The alveoli or acini are club-shaped, flask-shaped, shorter or longer cylin- drical, and convoluted. o—l 210 EiremeNTS OF FHiIsTOLoGY. (Chap. XXVIl. 277. The intermediary part of the duct and its passage into the alveoli is the same as in the salivary glands. The cells lining the alveoli are columnar or pyramidal, and show an outer homo- geneous, or faintly and longitudinally striated zone (Langerhans, Heidenhain), and an inner more tran- sparent granular-looking zone. The nucleus of the cell is spherical, and lies in about the middle. According to the state of secretion the two zones vary in amount, one at the expense of the other. The lumen of the alveoli is very minute, and in the beginning of the alveoli, «¢., next to the intermediary part of the duct, are seen spindle-shaped cells occupying the lumen, the centroacinous cells of Langerhans. In the rabbit’s pancreas Kiihne and Lea have shown that there are peculiar accumulations of cells between the alveoli, which are supplied with veritable glomeruli of capillary blood-vessels. CHAPTER XXVILI. THE LIVER. 278. Tuer outer surface of the liver is covered with a delicate serous membrane, the peritoneum, which, like that of other abdominal organs, has. on its free surface a layer of endothelium. It consists chiefly of fibrous connective tissue. At the hilum or porta hepatis this connective tissue is continued into the interior, and becomes one with the connective tissue of the Glisson’s capsule, or the interlobular connective tissue (connective tissue of the portal canals). This tissue is fibrous, and ~ Algom Chap. XXVII.] THE Liver. 211 more or less lamellated; by it the substance of the liver is subdivided into numerous, more or less polyhedral, solid lobules or acini (Fig. 123), each about ith of an inch in diameter. According to whether the. interlobular tissue forms com- plete boundaries or not, the acini appear well de- fined from one another (pig, ice- bear), or more or less fused (man and carnivorous animals and ro- dents). Within each acinus there is only very scanty connective tissue, Fig. 123.—From a Secti ion through the Liver . of Pig. Five lobules are shown. ey are in the shape of well separated from one another by the extremelydelicate —_interlobular tissue. s,Interlobular_ connective tissue, containing the bundles and flat- interiobuies pee peer tps ie., the branches S ~ ive, hepatic artery and portal vein, an e interlobular tened connective bile ducts; é, intralobular or central vein. (Atlas.) tissue cells. Occa- sionally, especially in the young liver, migratory cells are to be met with in the acini and in the tissue between them. 279. The vena_porte having entered the hilum gives off rapidly numerous branches, which follow the interlobular tissue in which they are situated, and they form rich plexuses around each acinus ; these are the interlobula veins (Fig. 124). Numerous capillary blood-vessels are derived from these veins. These capillaries pass in a radiating direction to the ceritre of the acinus, at the same time anastomosing with one another by numerous transverse branches. In the 212 Exements or HiIsToLoGy. [{Chap. XXVU. eentre of the acinus the capillaries become con- fluent inte one large vein, the central or intralobular vein. The intralobular veins of several neighbouring acini join so as to form the swblobular veins, and these lead into the efferent veins of the liver, or Fig. 124.—From a Vertical Section through the Liver of Rabbit ; the Blood-vessels and Bile-vessels injected. a, Interlobular veins surrounded by interlobular bile-ducts; these latter take up the network of fine intralobular bile capillaries; the meshes of this net- (avin: someon to the liver cells; 4, the intralobular or central vein. as. the hepatic vewms, which finally pass into the vena cava inferior. 280. The substance of each acinus—ze., the tissue between the capillary blood-vessels—is com- posed of uniform polygonal protoplasmic epithelial cells, of about ;,)5;th of an inch in diameter; these are the liver cells. Owing to the peculiar, more or less radiating, arrangement of the capillaries, the liver cells appear to form columns or cylinders, also more or less radiating from the periphery towards the Chap. XXVII.] THE LIVER. 213 centre of the acinus. Sometimes the liver cells contain minute pigment granules, Each liver cell shows a more or less fibrillated and reticulated protoplasm (Kupfer), and in the centre a spherical nucleus with its reticulum, generally with one or more nucleoli. During activity the liver cells are larger and look more gran- war than after action. The liver cells are joined with one another by an albu- minous cement sub- stance, in which are left fine channels ; these are the bile aa ; ° Fig. 125.—From a Lobule of the Liver of capillaries, or intra- *"Raypit, in which Blood and Bile Vessels lobular bile vessels had been injected, more highly magnified : than in Fig. 124. (igi125)4 \ dhivia Laci ! ERT 6, Bile capillaries between the liver cells; these successfully injected _ are well shown as nucleated polygonal cells, : each with a distinct reticulum; ¢, capillary preparation, . the _ blood-vessels. (Atlas.) liver cells appear separated everywhere from one another by a bile capillary, and these form for the whole acinus a con- tinuous intercommunicating network of minute channels. Where the liver cells are in contact with a capillary blood-vessel, there, of course, are no bile capillaries, since these exist only between liver cells. 281. At the margin of the acinus the bile capil- laries are connected with the lumen of minute tubes ; these possess a membrana propria and a lumen lined with a single layer of transparent polyhedral epithelial cells. These are the small interlobular bile ducts (Fig. 124). Their epithelial cells are in reality con- tinuous with the liver cells. They join so as to form 214 - Exemenrs oF HistoLoGy. (Chap. XXVII. the larger interlobular bile ducts, lined with more or less columnar epithelium. The first part of the bile duct lined with polyhedral cells corresponds to the inter- mediary part of the ducts of the salivary glands. The interlobular bile ducts form networks in the inter- lobular tissue. Towards the hilum they become of great diameter,.and their wall is made up of fibrous tissue, with non-striped muscular tissue. Small mucus-secreting glands are in their wall, and open into their lumen. The wall of the hepatic nok and of the gall bladder, are merely exaggerations of this structure. 282. The hepatic artery follows in its ramification the interlobular veins. The arterial branches form plexuses in the interlobular tissue, and they supply the capillary blood-vessels of the interlobular con- nective tissue, and especially pe the bile ducts. The capillary blood-vessels of the bile ducts join so as to form small veins which finally empty themselves into the interlobular veins. The anastomoses of the capillary blood-vessels, derived from the arterial branches, directly with the capillary blood-vessels of the acini, are insignificant (Cohnheim and Litten). The serous covering of the liver contains special arterial branches—rami capsulares. Networks of lym- phatics—deep lymphatics—are present in the inter- lobular connective tissue, forming plexuses around the interlobular blood-vessels and bile ducts, and occasionally forming a perivascular lymphatic around a branch of the hepatic vein. Within the acinus, the lymphatics are represented only by spaces and clefts existing between the liver cells and capillary blood-vessels ; these are the intralobular lymphatics (Macgillivry, Frey, and others). They anastomose at the margin of the acinus with the interlobular lymphatics. In the capsule of the liver is a mee network Chap. XXVIII.] ORGAWS OF RESPIRATION. 215 of lymphatics, called the superficial lymphaiics. Numerous branches pass between this network and those of the interlobular lymphatics, CHAPTER XXVIII. THE ORGANS OF RESPIRATION. 283. I. Whe larynx.—The supporting frame- work of the larynx is formed by cartilage. In the epiglottis the cartilage is elastic and reticulated, i.e., the cartilage plate is perforated by numerous smaller and larger holes. The cartilages of Santorini and Wrisbergii, the former attached to the top of the arytenoid cartilage, the latter enclosed in the aryteno-epiglottidean fold, are also elastic. The thyroid, cricoid, and arytenoid cartilages are hyaline. All these are covered with the usual perichondrium. A small nodule of elastic cartilage is-enclosed in the front part of the true vocal cord. This is the cartilage of Luschka. _ The mucous membrane lining the cavity of the larynx (Fig. 126) has the following structure :— The epithelium covering the free surface is stratified columnar ciliated, 2.e., the most superficial layer is made up of conical cells with cilia on their surface ; then between the extremities of these cells are wedged in spindle-shaped and inverted conical cells. Numerous goblet cells are found amongst the superficial cells. The two surfaces of the epiglottis and the true vocal cord are covered with stratified pavement epithelium. Underneath the epithelium is a basement men.- brane separating the former from the mucous mem- brane proper. 216 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XXVIII. 284. The mucous membrane is delicate connective tissue with numerous lymph corpuscles. In the pos- terior surface of the epiglottis, in the false vocal cord, ws Riad nf 3 . ONS 7 a i) Sy wate Fy Fig. 126.—From a Longitudinal Section through the Ventricle of the Larynx of a Child. a, True vocal cord; 3, false vocal cord; c, a nodule of elastic ao lage (ore of Luschka); d, ventricle; 7, lymphatic tissue ; m, bundles e thyro- arytenoid muscle in transverse section. (Atlas.) and in the lower parts of the larynx, but especially in the ventricle, this infiltration amounts to diffuse adenoid tissue, and even to the localisation of this as lymph follicles. In both surfaces of the epiglottis, and in the true vocal cords, the mucosa extends into the stratified pavement epithelium in the shape of minute papille. TT rr ee, * Chap. XXVIII.] ORGANS OF RESPIRATION. 217 In the lower part of the larynx the mucous mem- brane contains bundles of elastic fibres connected into networks, and running in a longitudinal direction These elastic fibres are found chiefly in the superficial parts of the mucous membrane. In the true vocal cord the mucosa is entirely made up of elastic fibres extending in the direction of the vocal cord. 285. The deeper part of the mucous membrane is of loose texture, and corresponds to the sub-mucosa ; in it are embedded numerous mucous glands, the ducts of which pass through the mucosa and open on the free. surface. The alveoli of the glands are of the nature of mucous alveoli, 7.¢, a considerable lumen lined with a layer of mucous goblet cells. There are, however, also alveoli lined with columnar albuminous cells, and such as have both side by side, as in the case of the sub-lingual gland of the dog. The ciliated epithelium of the surface in some places extends also for a short distance into the duct, The true vocal cords have no mucous glands. The blood-vessels terminate as the capillary net- work in the superficial—+.e., sub-epithelial—layer of the mucosa; where there are papillee—z.e., in the epiglottis and true vocal cord—these receive a loop of capillary blood-vessels. The lymphatics form superficial networks of fine vessels, and deep submucous networks of large vessels. These are of enormous width and size in the membrane of the anterior surface of the epiglottis. The finer nerves form superficial plexuses of non- medullated fibres. Here, according to Luschka and Boldyrew, there are end bulbs. Taste-buds have been found in the posterior surface of the epiglottis (Verson, Schofield, Davis), and also in the deeper parts of the larynx (Davis). 286. Il. Whe trachea.—The trachea is very similar in structure to the lower part of the larynx, from which it differs merely in possessing the rings 218 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [(Chap. XXVIII. of hyaline cartilage, and in possessing, in the posterior or membranous portion, circular bundles of non- Wee Ape slid 1 Kt ni |! / | ify CS ecTNNSTT TAL TN / 0}5) 9) 0) q | | 0 hy m > i \ —-~@, IJ Fig. 127.—From a Longitudinal Section through the Trachea of a Child. a, The stratified columnar ciliated epithelium of the internal free surface; 3 the basement membrane; c, the mucosa; d, the networks of longitudinal elastic fibres; the oval nuclei between them indicate connective tissue corpuscles; e, the submucous tissue containing mucous glands; Jf, large —e g, fat cells; hk, hyaline cartilage of the tracheal rings. as. (Atl striped muscular tissue, extending, as it were, between _ the ends of the rings. Its component parts are (Fig. 127) :-— (a) A stratified columnar ciliated epithelium. (b) A basement membrane. ve ony & Chap. XXVIII] ORGAWS OF RESPIRATION. 219 (c) A mucosa, with the terminal networks of capillary blood-vessels, and infiltrated with adenoid tissue. (d) A layer of longitudinal elastic fibres. , (e) A loosely-textured submucous tissue, contain- ing the large vessels and nerves and small mucous glands. Occasionally the gland or its duct is embedded in a lymph follicle. 287. Ill. Whe bronchi and the lung. The bronchi branch within the lung dendritically into finer and finer tubes. The finest branches are the terminal bronchi. In the bronchi we find, instead of rings of hyaline cartilage, as in the trachea, larger and smaller oblong or irregularly-shaped plates of hyaline cartilage distributed more or less uniformly in the circumference of the wall. Towards the small microscopic bronchi, these cartilage plates gradually diminish in size and number. ‘The epithelium, the basement membrane, the sub-epithelial mucosa, and the layer of longitudinal elastic fibres, remain the same as in the trachea. The submucous tissue contains small mucous glands. 288. Between the sub-epithelial mucosa and sub- mucosa is a continuous layer of circular non-striped muscular tissue. In the smaller microscopic bronchi this layer is one of the most conspicuous. By the contraction of the circular muscular coat the mucosa is placed in longitudinal folds. The state of contraction and distension of the small bronchi bears an important relation to the aspect of the epithelium, which appears as a single layer of ’ columnar cells in the distended bronchiole, and strati- fied when the bronchiole is contracted. The distribution of the blood-vessels is the same as in the trachea. Lymph follicles are met with in the submucous tissue of the bronchial wall in animals and man. 220 EXLEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXVIII. The lymphatic networks of the bronchial mucous membrane are very conspicuous. Those of the sub- mucous tissue, 7.e., the peribronchial lymphatics, anas- tomose with those surrounding the pulmonary blood- vessels. Pigment and small particles can be easily absorbed through the cement substance of the epithelium into the radicles of the superficial lymphatics, whence they pass readily into the (larger) peribronchial lym- phatics. In connection with the nerve branches in the bronchial wall are minute ganglia. 289. Each terminal bronchiole branches into several wider tubes called the alveolar ducts, or infundi- bula ; each of these branches again into-several similar ducts. All ducts, or infundibula, are closely beset in their whole extent with spherical, or, being pressed against one another, with polygonal, vesicles—the air- cells or alveoliopening by a wide aperture into the alveolar duct or infundibulum, but not communicating with each other. The infundibula are much wider than the terminal bronchioles, and also wider than the alveoli. 290. All infundibula with their air-cells, belonging to one terminal bronchiole, represent a conical struc- ture, the apex of which is formed by the terminal bronchus. Such ’a conical mass is a lobule of the lung, and the whole tissue of the lung is made up of such lobules closely aggregated, and arranged as lobes, ' The lobules are separated from one another by delicate fibrous connective tissue; this forms a continuity with the connective tissue accompanying the bron- chial tubes and large vascular trunks, and with these is traceable to the hilum. On the other hand, the interlobular connective tissue of the superficial parts of the lung is continuous with the fibrous tissue of the surface called the pleura pulmonalis. This Chap. XXVIII.] OrGAWS OF RESPIRATION. 221 membrane contains numerous elastic fibres, and on the free surface is covered with a layer of endo- thelium. In some instances (guinea-pig) the pleura pulmo- nalis contains bundles of non-striped muscular tissue. Fig. 128.—F rom a Section through the Lung of Cat, stained with Nitrate of Silver. @, An infundibulum or alveolar duct in cross section; 5, groups of polyhedra’ cells lining one part of the infundibulum, the rest being lined with flattened transparent epithelial scales; c, the alveoli lined with flattened epithelial scales ibe sad there between them is seen a polyhedral granular epithelial cell. as. The lobes of the lung are separated from one another by large septa of connective tissue—the liga- menta pulmonis. 291. The terminal bronchi contain no cartilage 222 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap.XXVIII1. ‘ or mucous glands in their wall. This is made up of three coats: (a) a tiny epithelium—a single layer of small polyhedral granular-looking cells ; (6) a circular muscular coat of non-striped muscular tissue; and (c) a fine adventitia of elastic fibres, arranged chiefly as longitudinal networks. 292. Tracing the elements constituting the wall of a terminal bronchiole into the infundibula and air- cells (Fig. 128), we find the following changes: (a) the ~ polyhedral granular-looking epithelial cells forming a continuous lining in the terminal bronchiole, are trace- able into the infundibulum only as larger or smaller groups; between these groups of small polyhedral granular-looking cells large, flat, transparent, homo- geneous, nucleated, epithelial scales make their ap- pearance. The farther away from the terminal bronchiole, the fewer are the groups of polyhedral granular-looking cells. In all infundibula, however, the transparent scales form the chief lining. This becomes still more marked in the air-cells. There the small polyhedral granular-looking cells are trace- able only singly, or in groups of two or three (Elens), the rest of the cavity of the air-cells being lined with the large transparent scales. In the feetal state all cells lining the infundibula and air-cells are of the small polyhedral granular- looking variety (Kiittner). With the expansion of the lungs during the first inspiration many of these cells change into the large transparent scales, in order to make up for the increment of surface. A lung expanded ad maximum shows much fewer or none of the small polyhedral cells; while a lung that is col- lapsed shows them in groups in the infundibula, and isolated or in twos or threes in the alveoli. 293. (b) The circular coat of non-striped muscular tissue of the terminal bronchiole is continued as a con- tinuous circular coat—but slightly thinner—on the ——— ee Chap. XXVIII] ORGANS OF RESPIRATION. 223 alveolar ducts or infundibula, in their whole extent, but not beyond them, 7.¢., not on the air-cells. (c) The adventitia of elastic networks is con- tinued on the infundibula, and thence on the air- cells, where they form an essential part of the wall of the alveoli, being its framework. Amongst the network of elastic fibres forming the wall of the alveoli is a network of branched con- nective tissue cells, contained as usual in similarly shaped branched lacunz, which are the radicles of the lymphatic vessels. 294. The blood-vessels and lymphatics.— The branches of the pulmonary artery and veins are contained within the connective tissue separat- ing the lobes and lobules, whence they can be traced into their finer ramifications towards the in- fundibula and air-cells. Each of these latter is. surrounded by a sort of basket - shaped dense network of capillary blood - vessels (Fig. 129). The capillary net- works of adja- Fig. 129.—Networks of Capillary Blood-vessels - cent alveoli are (Kolliker)= the Alveoli of the Human Lung. ' eontinuous with one another, and stand in communication on the one hand with a branch of the pulmonary artery, and on the other with branches of the pulmonary vein. The branches of the bronchial artery belong to the 224 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XXVIII. bronchial walls, which are supplied by them with capillary networks. The lacune and canaliculi in the wall of the alveoli, mentioned above, are the rootlets of lymphatic vessels, which accompany the pulmonary vessels, and form a network around them ; these are the deep lymphatics, or the perwascular lymphatics. They are connected also with the networks of lymphatics surrounding the bronchi, 2.¢., the peribronchial lymphatics. The root- lets of the superficial air-cells empty themselves into the sub-pleural plexus of lymphatics, a rich plexus of large lymphatics with valves. All these lymphatics lead by large trunks into the bronchial lymph glands. 295. Between the flattened transparent epithelial cells lining the alveoli are minute openings, stomata (Fig. 128), leading from the cavity of the air-cells into the lymph lacunz of the alveolar wall. These stomata are more distinct during expansion, %.¢., inspiration, than in the collapsed state. Inspiration, by its ex- panding the ‘lungs, and consequently also the lym- phatics, favours greatly absorption. Through these stomata, and also through the interstitial cement substance of the lining epithelium, formed particles —such as soot particles of a smoky atmosphere, pigment artificially inhaled, cellular elements, such as mucus or pus corpuscles, that have been car- ried into the alveoli from the bronchi by natural inspiration, germ-particles, &c., find their way into the radicles of the lymphatics; thence into the peri- vascular and sub-pleural lymphatics, and finally into the bronchial glands. Chap. XXIX.] 225 CHAPTER XXIX. THE SPLEEN. : 296. THE capsule enveloping the spleen is a serous membrane—the peritoneum. It is a connective : ° =: OL © 2 ihr” o= © ‘00 Le 2 ed Po ‘c A ‘Opcx® S00 v 20080 S55 G3 %2 Fc.'c,0 5 9°? ° 24 i) ¢ SEE P8 oi} Of, of 25° = ¢ © ‘of o> oes "0, 7 gt Ad 7 / Ss * <2 % = ri o 20 . ¥ | Sa . ws - 0 Senta 59h 8G Ue sg % 00, 8% G 320 5% ¢ Ce 85% . ° 2a 0: ° T 2. coed 4 ie Code 20% 0 - io o Ss So 8s WV 2 oy Se tek 206% 2 eo “os Yaeleg °9 © 238 ee ee. . o 24°35 © Vovece * Pale7e 2.0 y, ‘oe? “990 . ° . ° « se o& of * we % ° of See oo 08520: “ 2 OO = "6 $8 o2Pado? 5 5 Dee 52 Ti (oa-S° 3 = . 10.8 oS So og 2 0 SEs || Lee cones wee © 0g 209% 2% Sv 0k > Oe R020 so >. Se Se © © 9 O00 si “a Os Pye neo g Oe 720° Saag 1 foproe 2eo,00 Pe: . on 92 Je? Sel gow a? ae eer F% 00%, OS 0% P% O90 fo eS C8 SAANGI 5,8 ae Ky On ‘So a2 K? 8 co ag, S09” Sood CAO eco” oOo 29695 % oes 9 ! ae og 2 g 4 “oP. Oot OP, Of92 Se oe so 7 oO ° o * Sera ds 2 86% 0 DOM 29°S 269 8.073 50°83. wo eS a Sine Fo [8 Bos v0e FO - Fig. 130.—From a Vertical Section through the Spleen of Ape. a, The capsule ; 6, the trabeculw; c, Malpighian corpuscle ; d, artery ensheathed in a Malpighian corpuscle; e, pulp tissue. (Atlas.) tissue membrane with networks of elastic fibres, and covered on its free surface with an endothelium. The P.] _ 226 A = 7 Exrements oF HisroLocy. {Chap. XXIX. deep part of the capsule contains bundles of non-striped muscular tissue forming plexuses. In man the bundles are relatively thin, but in some mammals—e.g., dog, pig, horse—they are continuous masses arranged sometimes as a deep longitudinal and a superficial circular layer. - In connection with the capsule are the trabecule (Fig. 130). These are microscopical, thicker or thinner cylindrical bands branching and anastomosing, and thus making a framework in which the tissue of | the spleen is contained. Towards the hilum the © trabecule are larger, and they form there a continuity with the connective tissue of the hilum. They are the carriers of the large vascular branches. The trabecule in the human spleen consist chiefly of _ fibrous tissue with an admixture of longitudinal non- a _ striped muscular ‘tissue. This is more pronounced in the dog, horse, pig, guinea-pig, in which the trabe- cule are chiefly composed of non- striped muscular = tissue. Following “a a small trabecula : ey) ms. Fig. 131.—From a Section through the ‘ s ee = _= Pulp of the Spleen of the Pig. a, Last outrunners of the muscular trabecule ; b, the flattened cells forming the honeycombed matrix of the pulp; in the meshes of this matrix are contained lymphoid cellsof various sizes. (Atlas.) after it is given off from a larger one, we find it branching into still smaller ones, which ultimately lose themselves amongst the elements of that part of the spleen tissue called spleen pulp (Fig. 131). . The meshes of the network of the trabecule are filled up with the parenchyma. ‘This consists of two Chap. XXIX.] THE SPLEEN. 2G) kinds of tissues: (a) the Malpighian corpuscles ; and (6) the pulp tissue. 297. The Malpighian corpuscles are masses of adenoid tissue connected with the branches of the splenic artery. Following the chief arterial trunks as they pass in the big trabecule towards the interior of the spleen, they are seen to give off numerous smaller branches to the spleen parenchyma; these are ensheathed in masses of adenoid tissue which are either cylindrical or irregularly-shaped, and in some places form oval or spherical enlargements. These sheaths of adenoid tissue are traceable to the end of an arterial branch; and in the whole extent the adenoid tissue or Malpighian corpuscle is supplied by its artery with a network of capillary blood-vessels. 298. The rest of the spleen parenchyma is made up of the pulp. The matrix of this is a honeycombed, spongy network of fibres and septa, which are the processes and bodies of large, flattened, endotheloid cells, each with an oval nucleus. In some, especially young, animals, some of these cells are huge and multinucleated. The spaces of the honeycombed tissue are of different diameters, some not larger than a blood corpuscle, others large enough to hold several. All spaces form an intercommunicating system. The spaces contain nucleated lymph corpuscles, more or less connected with and derived from tbe cell plates of the matrix. But they do not fill the spaces, so that some. room is left, large enough to allow blood _ corpuscles to pass. +4 The spaces of the honeycombed pulp matrix are in - communication, on the one hand, with the ends of the capillary blood-vessels of the Malpighian corpuscles, and, on the other, they open into the venous radicles or sinuses (Fig. 132), which are oblong spaces lined with a layer of more or less polyhedral endothelial cells. These sinuses form networks, and lead into the large 228 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXIX. venous branches passing in the big trabecule to the hilum. The venous sinuses in man and ape possess a special adventitia formed of circular elastic fibrils. Not ll arterial branches are ensheathed in Fig, 132.—From a Section through the Spleen of a Guinea-pig ; the Blood-vessels had been injected (not shown in the figure). a, Artery of Malpighian corpuscle ; 6, pulp; between its cells are the minut ; blood-channels opening into e, the radicles of the veins. (Atlas.) Malpighian corpuscles ; some few fine arterial branches open directly into the spaces of the pulp matrix, being invested in a peculiar reticular or concentrically ar- ranged cellular tissue (not adenoid). These are the capillary sheaths of Schweigger Seidel. 299. The blood passes then from the arterial branches through the capillaries of the Malpighian Chap. XXX.] AVZDNEY, URETER, AND BLADDER. 229 ~ corpuscles, whence it travels into the labyrinth of minute spaces in the honeycombed pulp matrix ; thence it passes into the venous sinuses, and finally into the venous trunks. The current of blood on its passage through the pulp tissue becomes, therefore, greatly retarded. Under these conditions numerous red blood-corpuscles appear to be taken up by the cells of the pulp, some of which contain several in their interior. In these corpuscles the blood-dises become gradually broken up, so that, finally, only granules and small clumps of blood-pigment are left in them, The presence of blood-pigment in the cor- puscles of the pulp is explained in this way ; and it is therefore said that the pulp tissue is a destroyer of red blood-corpuscles. The pulp tissue is most probably the birthplace of colourless blood-corpuscles ; and according to Bizzozero and Salvioli it is also the birthplace of red _blood- corpuscles. The lymphatics form plexuses in the capsule (Tomsa, Kyber). Theseare continuous with the plexus of lymphatics of the trabecule ; and these again with the plexus of lymphatics in the adventitia of the arterial trunks. Non-medullated nerve-fibres have been traced along the arterial branches, CHAPTER XXX. THE KIDNEY, URETER, AND BLADDER. 300. A. The framework. The kidney possesses a thin investing capsule com- posed of fibrous tissue, more or less of a lamellar arrangement, Bundles of fibrous tissue pass with 23¢ ELEMENTS OF HIISTOLOGY. {Chap. XXX. blood-vessels between the deeper part of the capsule and the parenchyma of the periphery. According to Eberth, a plexus of non-striped muscle cells is situated underneath the capsule. The ureter entering the hilum enlarges into the pelvis of the kidney, and with its minor recesses or prolongations forms the calices. Both the pelvis and the calices are limited by a wall which is a direct con- tinuation of the ureter. The internal free surface is lined with stratified transitional epithelium. Under- neath the epithelium is a fibrous connective tissue membrane (the mucosa), containing the networks of capillary blood-vessels and fine nerve-fibres. Outside the mucosa and insensibly passing into it is the loose-textured submucosa, with groups of fat cells. There are present in the sub-mucosa bundles of non-striped muscular tissue, continued from the ureter, in the shape of longitudinal and circular bundles. In the pelvis of the kidney of the horse small glands (simple or branched tubes), lined with a single layer of columnar epithelial cells, have been observed by Paladino, Sertoli, and Eglii The last-named mentions also that in the pelvis of the human kidney there are gland-tubes similar in structure to sebaceous follicles. 301. The large vascular trunks enter, or pass from the tissue of the calices into the parenchyma of the kidney between the cortex and medulla, and they are accompanied by bundles of fibrous connective tissue and here and there a few longitudinal bundles of non- striped muscular tissue. In the parenchyma there is a very scanty fibrous connective tissue, chiefly around the Mal- pighian corpuscles and around the arterial vessels, especially in the young kidney. In the papille there » is relatively a great amount of fibrous tissue. On oan Chap. XXX.] A/DNEY, URETER, AND BLADDER. 231 the surface of the papille (facing the calices) there is a continuous layer of fibrous tissue, and this on its free surface is covered with stratified transitional epithelium. The parenchyma of the kidney consists entirely of the urinary tubules and the intertubular blood-vessels, and there is an interstitial or intertubular connective tissue framework in the shape of honeycombed hyaline membranes with flattened nucleated branched or spindle-shaped cells. The meshes of the honeycomb are the spaces for the urinary tubules and blood- vessels. 302. B. The parenchyma.—lI. The wrinary tubules (Fig. 133).—In a transverse or longitudinal section through the kidney we notice the cortex, the boundary layer of Ludwig and the papillary portions, the last terminating in the conical papille in the cavity of the calices. The boundary layer and the papillary portion form the medulla. A papilla with the papillary portion and boundary layer, continuous with it, con- stitute a Malpighian pyramid. The relative propor- tion of the thickness of the three parts is about 3:5 cortex, 2.5 boundary layer, and 4 papillary portion. 303. The cortex consists of vast numbers of con- voluted tubules with their cecal origin, the Mal- pighian corpuscle ; this is the labyrinth separated into vertical divisions of equal breadth by regularly disposed vertical straight strie originating a short distance from the outer capsule, and radiating towards the boundary layer which they enter. Each of these striz is a bundle of straight tubules, and represents a medullary ray. The boundary layer shows a uniform longitudinal stria- tion, in which opaque and transparent striz alternate with one another. The opaque striz are continuations of the medullary rays, the transparent strie are bundles of blood-vessels. ~l “4 Fig. 133.—Diagram showing the course of the Uriniferous Tubales in the different parts of the Cortex and Medulla. (For description of Fig. 128, see foot of next page.) See << 4 Chap. XXX.] KAvpwEY, URETER, AND BLADDER. 233 The papillary portion is uniformly and_longi- tudinally striated. Tracing a medullary ray from the boundary layer into the cortex, it is seen that its breadth gradually diminishes, and it altogether ceases at a short distance from the outer capsule. A medullary ray is, con- sequently, of a conical shape, its apex being situated at the periphery of the certex, its base in the boundary layer. Such a pyramid is called a pyramid of Ferrein. a 304. All urinary tubules commence as convoluted tubules in the part of the cortex named the labyrinth, but not in the medullary rays, with a cecal enlargement called a Malpighian corpuscle, and terminate—having previously joined with many other tubules into larger and larger ducts—at one of the many minute openings or mouths at the apex of a papilla. On their way the tubes several times alter their size and nature. From its start to its end there is a continuous fine membrana propria forming the boundary wall of the urinary tubule, and this membrana propria is lined with a single layer of epithelial cells differing in size, shape, and structure from place to place; in the centre of the tubule is a /wmen, differing in size according to the size of the tubule. 305. (1) Each Malpighian corpuscle (Fig. 134) is composed of the capsule—the capsule of Bowman— and the glomerulus, or Malpighian tuft of capillary blood-vessels. ry boun layer; 1, Bowman’s capsule: 2, neck of ss ; 3, proximal con- part of the collecting tube ; 12 and 14, larger collecting tube; in the papilla itself, not Feprescuted here, the collecting tube joins others, and forms the duct. as. 234 ELEMENTS OF HisToLoGy. [Chap. XXX. The capsule of Bowman is a hyaline membrana propria, supported, as mentioned above, by a small amount of connective tissue. On its inner surface there is a continuous layer of nucleated epithelial Fig. 134.—From a Section through the Cortical Substance of the Kidney of a Human Feetus, showing a Malpighian corpuscle. a, Glomerulus ; 4, tissue of the glomerulus; ¢, epithelium covering the glomerulus ; d, flattened epithelium lining Bowman’s capsule; e, the capsule itself ; J, uriniferous tubules in cross section. (Handbook.) cells, in the young state of polyhedral shape, in the adult state squamous. The glomerulus is a network of convoluted capillary blood-vessels, separated from one another by scanty connective tissue, chiefly in the shape of a few connective tissue corpuscles. The capil- laries are grouped together in two to five lobules. The whole surface of the glomerulus is lined with a delicate membrana propria, and a continuous layer Chap. XXX.] AvDNWEY, URETER, AND BLADDER. 235 of nucleated epithelial cells, polyhedral, or even columnar in the young, squamous in the adult: state. The membrana propria and epithelium dip in, of course, between the lobules of the glomerulus, and represent in reality the visceral layer of the capsule of the Malpighian corpuscle, the capsule of Bowman being the parietal layer. The glomerulus is connected at one pole with an afferent and efferent arterial vessel, the former being the larger. Between Bowman’s capsule and the glomerulus there is a space, the size of which differs according to the’ state of secretion, being chiefly dependent on the amount of fluid present. The Malpighian corpuscles are distributed in the labyrinth of the cortex only, with the exception of a thin peripheral layer near the outer capsule, and a still thinner layer near the boundary layer. The Malpighian corpuscles near the boundary layer are the largest, those near the periphery the smallest; in the human kidney their mean diameter is about ;35 of an inch. 306. (2) On the side opposite to that where the afferent and efferent arterioles join the glomerulus, the capsule of Bowman passes through a narrow neck into the cylindrical urinary tubule in such a way, that the membrana propria and epithelium of the capsule are continued as the membrana propria and lining epithelium of the tubule respectively, and the space between the capsule of Bowman and the glomerulus becomes the cavity or lumen of the urinary tubule. 307. (3) After it has passed the neck, the urinary tubule becomes convoluted ; this is the proximal con- voluted tubule (Fig. 133). It is of considerable length and is situated in the labyrinth. It has a distinct iumen, and its epithelium is a single layer of polyhedral or short, columnar, angular, or club-shaped cells, each 236 - ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XXX. with a spherical nucleus. These cells commence gene- rally at the neck, but in some animals—e.g., in the rey — seer Um — WU coe me. — en i Ss JOT. ATE MEMITTTL Ta Fig. 135.—From a Vertical Section through the Kidney of Dog, showing part of the Labyrinth and the adjoining Med y Ray. a, The capsule of Bowman; the capillaries of the glomerulus are arranged in lobules; 2, neck of capsule; b, irregular tubule; e, proximal convernere tubules; d,a collecting tube; e, part of the spiral tubule; f, portion of the seceodiea limb of Henle’s loop-tube; d, e,f form the medullary ray. as. mouse—they already have begun in the Malpighian corpuscle. The outer part of the cell protoplasm—ze., oom a ee ee ee oe a ae Chap. XXX.] A7DNEY, URETER, AND BLADDER. 237 next the membrana propria—-is distinctly striated, owing to the presence of rod-shaped fibrils (Heiden- hain) vertically arranged. The inner part of the cell substance—i.e., between the nucleus and the inner free margin—appears granular. Epithelial cells the protoplasm of which possesses the above rod-shaped fibrils, will in the following paragraphs be spoken of as fibrillated cells. The proximal convoluted tube appears sometimes thicker than at other times; in the first case, its lumen is smaller, but its lining epithelial cells are distinctly more columnar. This state is probably con- nected with the state of secretion. 308. (4) The convoluted tube passes into the spiral tubule (Schachowa). This differs from the former in being situated not in the labyrinth, but in a medullary ray, in which it forms one conspicuous element, and in not being convoluted, but more or less straight, slightly wavy, and spiral. Its thickness and lumen are the same as in the former; its epithelium is a single layer of polyhedral cells, with distinct indication of fibrillation. 309. (5) Precisely at the line where the cortex joins the boundary layer, the spiral tube becomes suddenly greatly reduced in thickness ; it becomes at the same time very transparent; its lumen is distinct; its membrana propria is now lined with a single layer of scales, each with an oval flattened nucleus. This altered tubule is the descending loop-tube of Henle, and it pursues its course in the boundary layer as a straight tubule, in the continuation of the medullary ray. In aspect and size this part of the urinary tubule resembles a capillary blood-vessel, but differs from it inasmuch as, in addition to the lining layer of flattened epithelial cells, it possesses a membrana propria. 238 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XXX. 310. (6) The so formed descending Henle’s loop- ‘ube passes the line between the boundary layer and papillary portion, and having entered this latter pursues its course for a short distance, when it sharply bends backwards as the loop of Henle’s tube ; it now runs back towards the boundary layer, and precisely at the point of entering this becomes suddenly enlarged. Up to this point the structure and size of the loop are exactly the same as those of the descending limb. 311. (7 and 8) Having entered the boundary layer it pursues its course in this latter to the cortex in a more or less straight direction within the medullary ray as the ascending loop-tube. Besides being bigger than the descending limb and the loop, its lumen is comparatively smaller, and its lining epithelium is a layer of polyhedral, distinctly fibrillated epithelial cells. The tube is not quite of the same thickness all along the boundary layer, but is broader in the inner than in the outer half; besides, the tube is not quite straight, but slightly wavy or even spiral. | (9) Having reached the cortex, it enters this as the cortical part of the ascending loop-tube, forming one of the tubes of a medullary ray; it is at the same . time narrower than in the boundary layer, and is more or less straight or wavy. Its lumen is very minute, its lining cells are flat polyhedral with a small flattened nucleus, and there is an indication of fibrillation (Fig. 135). (10) Sooner or later on its way in the cortex in a medullary ray it leaves this latter to enter the labyrinth, where it winds between the convoluted tubes as an angular wregular tubule (Fig. 135). Its shape is very irregular, its size alters from place to place, its lumen is very minute, its epithelium a layer of polyhedral, pyramidal, or short columnar cells ee ee Chap. XxX.) Kipwey, UreTeR, AWD BLADDER. 239 —according to the thickness of the tube; each cell possesses a flattened oval nucleus next to the lumen, and a very coarsely and conspicuously fibrillated pro- toplasm. 312. (11). This irregular tubule passes into the distal convoluted tubule or intercalated tubule of Schweigger Seidel. This forms one of the convoluted tubes of the labyrinth, and in size, aspect, and structure, is identical with the proximal convoluted tubule. (12) The distal convoluted tube passes into a short, thin, more or less curved or wavy collecting tubule, lined with a layer of transparent, flattened, polyhedral cells; this is still contained in the laby- rinth. (13) This leads into a somewhat larger straight collecting tube, lined with a layer of transparent poly- hedral cells and with distinct lumen. This tube forms part of a medullary ray, and on its way to the boundary layer takes up from the labyrinth numerous curved collecting tubules. (14) It then passes unaltered as a straight collect- ' ang tube through the boundary layer into the papillary ortion. 313. In this part these tubes join under acute angles, thereby gradually enlarging. They run in a straight direction towards the apex of the papilla, and the nearer to this the fewer and the bigger they become. These are the ducts or tubes of Bellini. They finally open on the apex into acalix. The lumen and the size of the lining epithelial cells—viz., whether _more or less columnar—are in direct relation to the size of the collecting tube.. The substance of the epi- thelial cells is a transparent protoplasm, and the nucleus is more or less oval. 314, In many places nucleated cells, spindle- shaped or branched. can be traced from the membrana 240 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XXX. propria of the tubule between the lining epithelium; and, in some cases, even a delicate nucleated membrane can be seen lining the surface of the epithelium next the lumen. In the frog, the epithelium lining, the Malpighian corpuscles, and the exceedingly long neck of the urinary tubule, are possessed of long filamentous cilia, rapidly moving during life. In the neck of some of the urinary tubules in mammals there is also an indication of cilia to be noticed. Heidenhain has shown that indigo-sulphate of sodium, injected into the circulating blood of the dog _ and rabbit, is excreted through certain parts of the urinary tubules only—viz., those which are lined with “fibrillated” epithelium. He maintains that this excretion is effected through the cell sub- stance ; but, in the case of carmine being used as pigment, I have not found the excretion to take place through the substance of the epithelial cells, but through the homogeneous interstitial or cement sub- stance between the epithelial cells. 315. Il. The blood-vessels (Fig. 136). ~The large branches of the renal artery and vein are situated in the submucous tissue of the pelvis, and they enter, or pass out respectively from, the part of the parenchyma corresponding to the junction of the cortex and boundary layer, where they follow a more or less horizontal course, and give off, or take up respectively, smaller branches to or from the cortex and medulla. (1) In the cortex the arterial trunks give off to the cortex small branches, which singly enter the labyrinth in a direction vertical to the surface of the kidney. These are the interlobular arteries. Each of these, on its way towards the external capsule of the kidney, gives off, on all sides of its circumference, shorter or longer lateral branches; these are the ayerent arterioles for the Malpighian corpuscles, each ————— CO - latter. Chap. XXX.) K7DNEY, URETER, AND BLADDER. one entering a Malpighian corpuscle and breaking up into the capillaries of the glomerulus. On its way towards the external capsule, the interlobular arteries _ be- come greatly reduced, and finally enter the capillary network of the most peri- pheral part of the cortex ; - but some of these arterioles may be also traced into the outer capsule, where they become connected with the capillary networks of this The efferent vessel of a Malpighian glome- rulus at once breaks up into a dense network of capillary blood - vessels, which entwine in all pos- sible directions the urinary tubules of the labyrinth. This network is continued with that of capillaries of the medullary rays, the meshes being there elon- gated, and the capillary blood-vessels, for obvious reasons, more of a straight a Interlobular artery; vi, interlobular vein ;. g, glomerulus of Malpighian corpuscle; vs, vena stellata: ar, arteriz® rect®; vr, vene rect; ad, bundle of arteriz rectz ; vb, bundle of vene rectz ; vp, network of vessels around the mouth of the ducts at the apex of the papille. (Ludwig, in Stricker’s Manual.) 9—1 24f —, OST) Y/ vs EU Rs? wid ~} te ©. AY RY) Bey AT ler v as NG ae ms GS HS Mee pea eae LEP ais e Ms he te ass ay. Li \) ore sels s y <= aay”. g \) Ae tae: ’ wae TAN y qs ~ —- SSE Se Fig. 136.—Diagram of the Vessels of the iAidney, i 242 ELEMENTS OF HIISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXX. arrangement. The capillaries of the whole cortex form one continuous network. 316. The veins which take up the blood from this network are arranged in this manner :—There are formed ‘venous vessels underneath the external capsule, taking up like rays on all sides, minute radicles connected with the capillaries of the most peripheral part of the cortex. These are the vene stellate; they pass into the labyrinth of the cortex, where they follow a vertical course in company with the interlobular arteries. On the way they communicate with the capillaries of the labyrinth, and ultimately open into the large venous branches situated between cortex and boun- dary layer. 317. (2) In the medulla. From the large arterial trunks short branches come off, which enter the™ boundary. layer, and there split up into a bundle of minute arterioles, which pass in a straight direc- tion vertically through the boundary layer into the papillary portion. These are the arterte recte (Fig. 136). The number of vessels of each bundle is at the outset increased by the efferent vessel of the Malpighian corpuscles nearest to the boundary layer. “On their way through the boundary layer, and through the papillary portion of the medulla, these arterioles give off the capillary network for the urinary tubules of these parts, the network, for obvious reasons, possessing an elongated arrange- ment. From this network originate everywhere minute veins, which on their way towards the cortical margin increase in size and number; they form also bundles of straight vessels—vene recte—and ultimately enter the venous trunks situated between the boundary layer and cortex, Chap. XXX.] A7DWEY, URETER, AND BLADDER. 243 The bundles of the arteries recte and vene recte form severally, in the boundary layer, the transparent strize mentioned on a previous page as alternating with the opaque striz, these latter being bundles of urinary tubules. At the apex of each papilla there is a network of capillaries around the mouth of each duct. 318. The outer capsule of the kidney contains a network of capillary blood-vessels; the arterial branches leading into them are derived from two sources: (a) from the outrunners of the interlobular arteries of the cortex, and (b) from extrarenal arteries. The veins lead (a) into the venz stellate, and (b) the extrarenal veins. The lymphatic vessels form a plexus in the capsule of the kidney. They are connected with lymph es between the urinary tubes of the cortex. The large blood-vessels are surrounded by a plexus of lymphatics, which take up lymph spaces between the ~ urinary tubules, both in the cortex and the boundary layer. 3 319. The wreter is lined with stratified transi- tional epithelium. Underneath this is the mucosa, a connective tissue membrane with capillary blood- vessels: The submucosa is a loose connective tissue Then follows a muscular coat composed of non- striped muscular tissue, arranged as an inner and . outer longitudinal and a middle circular coat. Then follows an outer limiting thin fibrous coat or adventitia. In this last have been observed minute ganglia in connection with the nerve branches. ’ 320. The biadder is similar in structure, but the mucous membrane and muscular coat are very much thicker. In the latter, which consists of non-striped fibres, are distinguished an inner circular, a middle oblique, and an outer longitydinal stratum, The _ last is best developed in the fundus. 244 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XXXI. Numerous sympathetic ganglia, of various sizes, are found in connection with the nerve branches un- derneath the adventitia (peritoneal covering), and in the muscular coat (F. Darwin). The epithelium lining the bladder is stratified transitional, and it greatly varies in the shape of its cells and their stratification, according to the state of expansion of the bladder. CHAPTER XXXI THE MALE GENITAL ORGANS. 321. (1) THE testis of man and mammals is en- veloped in a capsule of white fibrous tissue, the tunica adnata. -This is the visceral layer of the tunica vaginalis. Like the parietal layer, it is a serous membrane, and is therefore covered with endo- thelium. Minute villi are occasionally seen pro- jecting from this membrane into the cavity of the tunica vaginalis. These villi are generaily © covered with germinating endothelium (see par. 33). Inside the tunica adnata, and firmly attached to it, is the tunica albuginea, a fibrous connective © tissue membrane of lamellar structure. Towards the posterior margin of the human testis its thick- ness increases, and forms there a special accumu-_ lation—in cross section more or less conical, with posterior basis—the mediastinum testis, or corpus — Highmori. Between the tunica adnata and tunica albuginea is a rich plexus of lymphatics, which, on the one hand, — takes up the lymphatics of the interior, and on the SS a Chap. XXX1.] THz Mazz GENITAL ORGANS. 245 other leads into the efferent vessels that accompany the vas deferens. The testis of the dog, cat, bull, pig, rabbit, &., have a central corpus Highmori; that of the mole, hedgehog, and bat a peripheral one; while that of the rat and mouse have none (Messing). 322. The framework.— From the anterior margin of the corpus Highmori spring numerous septa of connective tissue, which, passing in a radiat- ing direction towards the albuginea, with which they form a continuity, subdivide the testis into a large number of long, conical compartments, or lobules, . the basis of which is situated at the tunica albu- ginea, the apex at the corpus Highmori. Kdlliker mentions that non-striped muscular tissue occurs in these septa. From these septa thin connective tissue lamelle pass into the compartments, and they form the sup- porting tissue for the blood-vessels and also represent the interstitial connective tissue between the seminal tubules. This intertubular or interstitial tissue is distinctly lamellated, the lamelle being of different thicknesses, and consisting of thin bundles of fibrous connective tissue—arranged more or less as fenestrated mem- branes—and endotheloid connective plates on their surface. Between the lamelle are left spaces, and these form, through the fenestre or holes of the lamelle, an intercommunicating system of lymph spaces—being, in fact, the rootlets of the lymphatics (Ludwig and Tomsa). Within the lamella are found peculiar cells, which are much larger than lymph-cells, and which, in some instances (¢g., guinea-pig), include pigment granules. They contain a spherical nucleus. In man, in dog, cat, sheep, especially boar, these cells form large, continuous groups—plates and cylinders—and 246 ELemMeNTS OF HttsTOLOGY. [Chap. XXX1. the cells are polyhedral, and exactly similar to epithe- lial cells. They are separated from one another within the group by a thin interstitial cement-substance. Their resemblance with epithelium is complete. They are remnants of the epithelial masses of the Wolffian body of the fcetus. 323. The seminal tubules (Fig. 137). — Within each compartment, above mentioned, lie Fig. 137.—From a Section through the Testis of Dog. panies three seminal tubules in cross section. In two of these the lining epithelium—seminal cells—is shown, and bundles of spermatozoa project it into the lumen of the tubules. Between the tubules is connective ssue containing groups of polyhedral epithelial-like cells. numerous seminal tubules, twisted and convoluted in many ways, and extending from the periphery to near the corpus Highmori. The tubules, as a rule, are rarely branched; but in the young state, and especially towards the periphery, branching is not un- common. Each seminal tubule consists of a membrana pro- pria, a lining epithelium, and a lumen. The mem- brana propria is a hyaline membrane, with oval nuclei at regular intervals. In man it is thick and lamel- lated, several such nucleated membranes being super: Chap. XXX1.1 ZTuwz Marz GENITAL ORGANS. 247. imposed over one another. The lumen is in all tubes distinct and relatively large. The lining epithelium, of the seminal cells, differ in the adult in different twhules, and even in different parts of the same tubule, being dependent on the state of secretion, 324. Before puberty all tubules are uniform in this respect, being lined with two or three layers of polyhedral epithelial cells, each with a_ spherical nucleus. After puberty, however, the following different types can be distinguished :— (a) Tubules or parts of tubules similar to those of the young state—viz., several layers of polyhedral epithelial cells lining the membrana propria. These — are considered as (a) the outer and (6) the inner seminal cells. The former are next to the membrana propria ; they are polyhedral in shape, transparent, and the nucleus of some of them is in the process of karyokinesis or indirect division (see par. 8) ; others include an oval transparent nucleus. The inner seminal cells generally form two or three layers, . and are more loosely connected with one-another than the outer seminal cells, and therefore possess a more rounded appearance. Between these a nucleated reti- culum of fine fibres is sometimes noticed, the germ reticulum of von Ebner. But this is merely a support- ing tissue, and has nothing to do with the germina- tion of the cells or the spermatozoa (Merkel). The inner seminal cells show very abundantly the process of indirect division or karyokinesis, almost all being seen in one or other phase of it, 325. In consequence of this, numerous small spherical daughter-cells are formed ; these lie nearest the lumen, and are very loosely connected with one another. It is these which are transformed into sper- matozoa, and hence are appropriately called spermato- blasts (Fig. 137). Amongst the seminal cells, especially of cat and 248 L£remeENTS OF HisTotocy. [Chap. XXXL dog, are found occasionally, but not very commonly, large multinuclear cells, the nuclei of which are also in one or the other stage of karyokinesis. | (b) The innermost cells, i.c., the spermatoblasts, become pear-shaped, the nucleus being situated at the Fig. 138,—From a Section through the Testis fe Dog, showing portions of three Seminal Tubules A, ig epithelial cells and numerous small cells sdoekie arranged ; B, the small cells or spcrmatoblasts converted into spermatozoa; ©, groups of these in a further stage of development. (Atlas.) thinner extremity, becoming at the same time flattened and homogeneous (Fig. 138). The elongation of the spermatoblasts gradually proceeds, and in consequence of this we find numerous elongated, club-shaped sper- matoblasts, each with a flattened nucleus at the thin end, These are the young spermatozoa, the nucleated extremity being the head. (c) At the same time these young spermatozoa become grouped together by an interstitial granular substance, in peculiar fan-shaped groups; in these — ee a ~ a ee Chap. XXX1.] Tae Mark Genwifat ORGANS. 346 groups the head,—.e., the thin end containing the flattened homogeneous nucleus,—is directed towards the inner seminal cells, while the opposite extremity is directed into the lumen of the tube. Meanwhile the inner seminal cells continue to divide, and thus the groups of young spermatozoa get more and more buried, as it were, between them. 326. The original cell-body of the spermatoblasts goes on elongating until its proteplasm is almost, but not quite, used to form~the rod-shaped middle piece (Schweigger Seidel) of the spermatozoa; from the distal end of this, a thin long hair-like filament, called the tail, grows out. Where this joins the end of the middle piece, there is, even for some time afterwards, a last remnant of the granular cell-body of the original spermatoblast to be noticed. When the granular interstitial substance holding together the spermatozoa of a group has become dis- integrated, the spermatozoa are isolated. While this development of the spermatozoa goes on, the inner seminal cells continue to produce spermatoblasts, which in their turn are converted into spermatozoa. 327. Spermatozoa (Fig. 139).—Fully formed spermatozoa of man and mammals consist of a homo- geneous flattened and slightly convex-concave head (the nucleus of the original spermatoblast), a rod-shaped middle prece (derived directly from the cell body of the spermatoblast), and a long hair-like tai/. While living, the spermatozoa show very rapid oscillatory and propelling movement, the tail acting as a flagellum or cilium ; its movements are spiral. In the newt there is a fine spiral thread attached to the end of the long, curved, spike-like head, and by a hyaline membrane it is fixed to the . middle piece ; it extends beyond this as the long thin tail. Also in the mammalian and human sperma- tozoa, a similar spiral thread, closely attached to the 250 LremMENTS oF HisToLocy. (Chap. XXXi, middle piece, and terminating as the tail, has been ob- served (H. Gibbes). 328. The seminal tubules of each compartment or lobule empty themselves into a short, more or less straight, tubule—the vas rectum. -# This is narrower a Fig. 139.—Various kinds of Spermatozoa, 4 Spermatozoon < of E puinca-pig not yet ecm plesely <8; B, the same seen side- ays, t he spermatozoon is flattened fro A side to ace: c, a spermatozoon of the horse; D, a spermatozoon y-3 thenew than the seminal tubule, and is lined with a single layer of polyhedral or short columnar epithelial cells. The vasa recta form, in the corpus Highmori, a dense network of tubular channels, which are irregular in diameter, being at one place narrow clefts, at another wide tubes, but never so wide as the seminal tubules ; ¥ this network of channels is the rete testis. 329. (2) The epididymis.—From the rete testis We pass into the vasa efferentia, each being a tube Chap. XXXI.] Tue Mare GeniraL ORGANS. 251 wider than those of the rete testis, and each leading into a conical network of coiled tubes. These are the conz vasculost. The sum total of all the coni vasculosi forms the globus major or head of the epididymis. 330. The vasa efferentia and the tubes of thie coni vasculosi are about the size of the seminal tubules, but, unlike them, are lined with a layer of beautiful columnar epithelial cells, with a bundle of cilia (Fig. 140). Outside | fe these is generally a layer, more or less continuous, of small polyhedral cells. The substance of the columnar cells is distinctly longitudi- nally fibrillated. The mem- brana propria is thickened by the presence of a cir- cular layer of- non-striped muscular fibres. The rest, =z ¢., the globus minor, or Fig. 140.—A tubule of the epi- tail of the epididymis, is _ ‘idymis in cross section. — made up of a continuation 73° ihick Taper of concentrically an of the tubes of the globus alayer of columnar epithelial celle major, the tubes diminish- dng ince the lunten ofthe tube. ing gradually in number by fusion, and at the same time thereby becoming larger. The columnar epithelial cells, facing the lumen of the tubes of the globus minor, are possessed of cilia of unusual length. The tubes of the epididymis are separated from one another by a larger amount of connective tissue than those of the testis. The tubes of the organ of Giraldé, situated in the beginning of the funiculus spermaticus, are lined with columnar ciliated epithelium. So is also the pedunculated hydatid of Morgagni attached to the globus major. 252 Exements or Hisroroéy. [chap. XxX. 331. The seminal tubules and the tubes of the epididymis are entwined by a rich network of capillary blood-vessels, Between the tubes of the testis and epididymis are lymph spaces, forming an intercommunicating system, and emptying themselves into the superficial networks of lymphatics, 7.e., those of the albuginea; the arrangement of these networks is somewhat different in the testis and epididymis. 332. (3) Vas deferens and vesiculz semi- males.—The tubes of the globus minor open into the vas deferens. This is of course much larger than the former, and is lined with stratified columnar epithelium. Underneath this is a dense connective tissue mucosa, containing a rich network of capillary blood-vessels. Beneath this mucosa is a thin sub- mucous tissue, which in the Ampulla is better de- veloped than in other parts, and therefore allows the mucous membrane to become folded. Outside the sub- mucous tissue is the muscular coat, which consists of non-striped muscular tissue, arranged as an inner circular and an outer longitudinal stratum. At the commencement of the vas deferens there is in addition an inner longitudinal layer. There is finally a fibrous tissue adventitia. This contains longitudinal bundles of non-striped muscular tissue, known as the cremaster internus (Henle). A rich plexus of veins—plexus pampiniformis—and a rich plexus of lymphatic trunks, are situated in the connective tissue of the spermatic cord. The plexus spermaticus consists of larger and smaller nerve-trunks, with which are connected small groups of ganglion cells and also large ganglionic swellings. 333. In the vesicule seminales we meet with exactly the same layers as constitute the wall of the vas deferens, but they are thinner. This refers espe- cially to the mucosa and the muscular coat. The former is placed in numerous folds. The latter con- =< ay Chap.XXX1L] Zz MALE GENITAL ORGANS. 253 sists of an inner and outer longitudinal and a middle circular stratum. The ganglia in connection with the nerve-trunks of the adventitia are very numerous. 334. In the ductus ejaculatori we find a lining of columnar epithelial cells; outside of this is a delicate . mucosa and a muscular coat, the latter consisting of an inner thicker longitudinal and an outer thinner circular stratum of non-striped muscular tissue. When passing into the vesicula prostatica the columnar epithelium is gradually replaced by stratified pavement epithelium. 335. (4) The prostate gland. — Like other glands, the prostate consists of a framework and the gland tissue proper or the parenchyma. The framework, unlike that of other glands, is essentially muscular, being composed of bundles of non-striped muscular tissue, with a relatively small admixture of fibrous connective tissue. The latter is chiefly limited to the outer capsule and the thin septa passing inwards, whereas the non-striped mus- cular tissue surrounds and separates the individual gland alveoli. 336. The parenchyma consists of the chief ducts, which open at the’base of and near the colliculus seminalis, and of the secondary ducts, minor branches of the former, which ultimately lead into the alveoli. These are longer or shorter, wavy or convoluted | branched tubes with numerous saccular or club-shaped branches. The alveoli and ducts are limited by a membrana propria, have a distinct lumen, and are lined with columnar epithelium. In the alveoli there is only a single layer of beautiful columnar epithelial © cells, the substance of which is distinctly and longi- tudinally striated. In the ducts there is an inner layer of short columnar cells, and an outer one of small cubical, polyhedral or spindle-shaped cells. At the mouth of the ducts the stratified pavement 254 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXXI. epithelium of the pars prostatica of the urethra passes a short distance into the duct. The alveoli are surrounded by dense networks of capillary blood-vessels. In the peripheral portion of the gland numerous ganglia are interposed in the rich plexus of nerves. Also Pacinian corpuscles aré to be met with. 337. (5) The urethra.—The mucous membrane _of the male urethra is lined with simple columnar epithelium, except at the commencement—the pars prostatica—and at the end—the fossa navicularis— where it is stratified pavement epithelium. The mucous membrane is fibrous tissue with very numerous elastic fibres. Outside of it is a muscular coat composed of non-striped muscular tissue, and arranged as an inner circular and an outer longitudinal stratum, except in the pars prostatica and pars membranacea, where it is chiefly longitudinal. In the latter portion the muscular bundles pass also into the mucous mem- brane, where they follow a longitudinal course between large veins arranged in a longitudinal plexus. These veins empty themselves into small veins outside. This plexus of large veins with the muscular tissue between represents a rudiment of a cavernous tissue (Henle). The mucous membrane forms peculiar folds sur- rounding the lacune Morgagni. There are small mucous glands, lined with columnar epithelium, embedded in the mucous membrane ; they open into the cavity of the urethra and are known as Littré’s glands, 338. (6) The glands of Cowper.—Each gland of Cowper is a large compound tubular gland, which, as regards structure of ducts and alveoli, resembles a mucous gland. The wall of the chief ducts possesses a large amount of longitudinally-arranged non-striped muscular tissue. The epithelium lining the ducts is composed of columnar cells. The alveoli possess a large lumen and are lined with columnar mucous Ciap. XXXI.]) Tove ALALE GENITAL ORGANS. 255 cells, the outer portion of the cell being distinctly ' striated (Langerhans). In the cell the reticulum is also distinct. In this respect the alveoli completely resemble those of the sub-maxillary of the dog, but there are no real crescents in the alveoli of Cowper’s gland. 339. (7 ) The corpus "spongiosum. —The cor- pus spongiosum of the urethra is a continuation of the rudimentary corpus cavernosum above-mentioned in connection with the pars membranacea of the urethra, It is essentially a plexus of large veins arranged chiefly longitudinally and leading into small efferent veins. Between the large veins are bundles of non-striped muscular tissue. The capillary blood- vessels of the mucous membrane of the urethra open into the veins of the plexus. The outer portion of the corpus spongiosum, including the bulbus urethre, shows, however, numerous venous sinuses, real caver- ne, into which open capillary blood-vessels. 340. The glams pemis is of exactly the same structure as the corpus spongiosum. The outer surface is covered with a delicate fibrous tissue membrane, which on its free surface bears minute papille, extending into the stratified pavement epithelium. At the corona glandis exist small sebaceous follicles, the glands of Tyson; they are continued from the inner lamella of the prepuce, where they abound. The papille of the glans contain loops of capillary blood- vessels. Plexuses of non-medullated nerve-fibres are found underneath the epithelium of the surface of the glans. With these are connected the end bulbs described in a former chapter as the genital nerve-end corpuscles. 341. (8) The corpora cavernosa penis.—Each corpus cavernosum is enveloped in a fibrous capsule, the albuginea, made up of lamelle of fibrous con- nective tissue. Numerous Pacinian corpuscles are 2556 ELEMENTS OF HiSTOLOGY. (Chop. XXXL met with around it. The matrix of the corpus cavernosum consists of trabecule of fibrous tissue, between which pass bundles of non-striped muscular tissue all in different directions. Innumerable cavern or sinuses, intercommunicating with one another, are present in this matrix, capable of such. considerable repletion, that in the maximum degree of this state the sinuses are almost in contact, and the trabecule compressed into very delicate septa. The sinuses are lined with a single layer of flattened endothelial plates, and their wall in many places is strengthened by the bundles of non-striped muscular tissue. The sinuses during erection become filled with blood, being directly continuous with capil- lary blood-vessels. These are derived from the arte- rial branches which take their course in the above trabecule of the matrix. The blood passes from the sinuses into small efferent veins. But the blood passes also directly from the capillaries into the efferent veins, and this is the course the blood takes under passive conditions, while during erection it passes chiefly into the above sinuses. 342. In the peripheral part of the corpus caver- nosum there exists a direct communication between the sinuses and minute arteries (Langer), but in the rest the arteries do not directly communicate with the sinuses except through the capillary blood-vessels. In the passive state of the corpus cavernosum, the muscular trabecule forming part of the matrix are contracted, and the minute arterial branches embedded in them are therefore much coiled up; these are the arteriz helicine, ‘ Se a sr TET te Chap. XXXII.] 257 CHAPTER XXXII. THE FEMALE GENITAL ORGANS. 343. (1) Tue ovary (Fig. 141.)—In the ovary, as in other glands, the framework is to be distinguished from the paren- chyma. In the part of the ovary next to the hilum there are numerous blood- vessels, in a loose fibrous connective tissue, with nu- merous longitudinal bundles of non- striped muscular tissue directly con- tinuous with the same tissues of the ligamentum latum. This portion of the ovary is the zona vasculosa (Wal- deyer). All parts of the zona vasculosa —i.e., the bundles of fibrous , connec- tive tissue, the blood - vessels, and the bundles of non- striped muscular a, The albuginea ; the germinal epithelium is not distinguishable owing to the low power under which the section is supposed to be viewed; b, the layer of smallest Graafian follicles an ova; c, the medium-sized follicles : d, the layer of large follicles ; ¢, the zona vasculosa. (Atlas.) tissue—are traceable into the parenchyma. The stroma of this latter, however, is made up of bundles of shorter R—|] 258 ExiemenrTSs OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXX. or longer transparent spindle-shaped cells, each with an ‘oval nucleus. These bundles of spindle-shaped cells form, by crossing and interlacing, a tolerably dense tissue, in which lie embedded in special arrangements the Graafian follicles. Around the larger examples of the latter the spindle-shaped cells form more or less concentric layers. In the human ovary bundles of fibrous tissue are also met with. The spindle-shaped cells are most probably a young state of connective tissue. Between these bundles of spindle-shaped cells occur cylindrical or irregular streaks. or groups of polyhedral cells, each with a spherical nucleus ; they correspond to the interstitial epithelia] cells men- tioned in the testis, and they are also derived from the foetal Wolffian body. 344. According to the distribution of the Graafian follicles, the following layers can be distinguished in the ovary :— (a) The albuginea. This is the most peripheral layer not containing any Graafian follicles. It is composed of the bundles of spindle-shaped cells, inti- mately interwoven. In man, an outer and inner longitudinal, and a middle circular, layer can be made out (Henle). In some mammals an outer longitudinal, an inner circular, or slightly oblique layer can be distinguished in the albuginea. The free surface of the albuginea is covered with a single layer of polyhedral, or short columnar granu- lar-looking epithelial cells, the germinal epitheliwm (Waldeyer). This epithelium, in its shape and aspect, forms a marked contrast to the transparent, flattened, endothelial plates covering the ligamentum latum. 345. (b) The cortical layer (Schrén). This is a layer containing the smallest Graafian follicles, either aggregated as a more or less continuous layer (cat and rabbit), or in small groups (human), separated by the Chap. XXXII] FEMALE GENITAL ORGANS. 259 stroma. These follicles are spherical or slightly oval, of about 54,5 inch in diameter, and each of them is limi- ted by a delicate membrana propria. Inside of this is a layer of flattened, transparent, epithelial cells, each with an oval, flattened nucleus; this is the mem-_ brana granulosa. The space within the follicle is occupied by, and filled up with, a spherical cell—the ovum cell, or ovwm. This is composed of a granular- looking protoplasm, and in this is a big spherical, or slightly oval, nucleus—the germinal vesicle. The substance of this is either a fine reticulum, limited by a delicate membrane, with one or more nucleoli or germinal spots, or it is in one of the phases of indirect division or karyokinesis, thus indicating division of the ovum. - 346. (c) From this cortical layer to the zona vasculosa we find embedded in the stroma isolated Graafian follicles, of various sizes, increasing from the former to the latter. The biggest follicles measure in diameter about sa inch. Those of the middle layers are of medium size (Fig. 142). In them we find inside the membrana propria the membrana granulosa, made up of a single layer of transparent, columnar, — epithelial cells, The ovum, larger than "isatiai “tolliete, in the small cortical follicles, fills out Ga" '"® wey the cavity of the follicle, and is The, follicle ts lined limited by a thin hyaline cuticle—the yy spithelial cells zona pellucida. This appears as an Thott ‘the excretion of the cells of the membrana 2uath Vy 2 thin granulosa. The protoplasm of the inciudes a germinal ovum is fibrillated. The part sur- with theintrannclear rounding the germinal vesicle is more ew transparent, and stains differently in osmic acid than the peripheral part. The big nucleus, or germinal . vesicle, is limited by a distinct membrane, and inside 260 ELEMENTS OF HisSTOLOGY. [Chap. XXXII. this membrane is a reticulum with generally one big nucleolus or germinal spot. Between these medium-sized follicles and the small follicles of the cortical layer we find all inter- mediate degrees as regards size of the follicle and the ovum, and especially as regards the shape of the cells of the membrana granulosa, the intermediate. sizes of follicles being lined by a gran- ulosa made up of a layer of polyhedral epi- thelial cells. 347. The deeper Graafian follicles, 2e., those that are to be regarded epee) LOI), as big follicles, ree rs contain an OY, ovum—occa- sionally, two or = even three ova Fig. 143.—A large Graafian ‘Follicle of the —-Wwhich is simi- habe Sip cteaass lar to that of The follicle is limited by a capsule, the theca folliculi; the membrana granulosa_is composed of severa the previous fol- layers of epithelial cells. The ovum with its distinct Bao Be Y NORE 3 Cy 89998, adngasagautoos Er co. ped oa DF Lh 3s: pe et $ a 2} fh) A’) a >) 2 “34 20, Re tety Sab hyaline zona ae is embedded in the epithelial licles, except cells of the discus proligerus. The cavity of the “8 follicle is filled with fluid, the liquor follieuli. that it is larger, and its zona pel- lucida thicker. The ovum does not fill out the whole cavity of the follicle, since at one side, between it and the membrana granulosa, there is an albuminous fluid, the rudiment of the liquor folliculi. 348. The largest or most advanced follicles are of great size, easily visible by the naked eye, and con- tain a large quantity of this liquor folliculi (Fig. 143). In fact, the ovum occupies only a small part of the Chap. XXXII.] FEMALE GENITAL ORGANS. 261 cavity of the follicle. The ovum is big, surrounded by a thick zona pellucida, is situated at one side, sur rounded by the discus proligerus. This consists of layers of polyhedral cells, except the cells immediately _ around the zona pellucida, which are columnar. The ovum with its discus proligerus is connected with the membrana granulosa. This latter consists of stratified pavement epithelium forming the entire lining of the follicle. The outermost layer of cells is columnar. The membrana propria of these big follicles is strength- ened by concentric layers of the stroma cells, and this represents the twnica fibrosa (Henle) or outer coat of the follicle—theca folliculi externa. Numerous blood capillaries connected into a network surround the big follicles. In those follicles that contain a greater or smaller amount of the liquor folliculi, we notice in the fluid a variable number of detached granulosa cells in various stages of vacuolation, maceration, and disintegration. 349. In connection with the medium-sized and large Graafian follicles are seen occasionally smaller — or larger solid cylindrical or irregularly-shaped out- growths of the membrana granulosa and membrana propria ; they indicate a new formation of Graafian follicles, some containing a new ovum. When these side branches become by active growth converted into larger follicles, they may remain in continuity with the parent follicle, or may be constricted off altogether. - In the first case, we have one large follicle with two or three ova, according as a parent follicle has given origin to one or two new outgrowths. Amongst the epithelial cells constituting the strati- fied membrana granulosa of the ripe follicles we notice a nucleated reticulum. Many follicles reach ripeness, as far as size and constituent elements are concerned, long before puberty, and they are subject to degeneration ; but 262 E-LEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXXII. this process of degeneration involves also follicles of smaller sizes. 350. Before menstruation, generally one, occasion- ally two or more, of the ripe follicles become very hyperemic. They grow, in consequence, very rapidly in size ; their liquor folliculi increases to such a degree that they reach the surface of the ovary ; finally— z.¢., during menstruation—they burst at a superficial point ; the ovum, with its discus proligerus, is ejected, and brought into the abdominal ostium of the oviduct. The cavity of the follicle collapses, and a certain amount of blood, derived from the broken capillaries of the wall of the follicle, is effused intoit. The follicle is converted into a corpus luteum, by an active multi- plication of the cells of the granulosa. New capilla- ries with connective tissue cells derived from the theca folliculi externa gradually grow into the interior, «¢., between the cells of the granulosa. This growth gradually fills the follicle, except the centre; this contains blood-pigment in the shape of granules, chiefly contained in large cells, and -a few new blood-vessels, the blood-pigment being the remains of the original blood effused into the follicle. But, ultimately, the pigment all disappears, and a sort of gelatinous tissue occupies the centre, while the periphery—.e., the greater part of the follicle —is made up of the hypertrophied granulosa, with young capillary vessels between its cells. The granulosa cells undergo fatty degeneration, becoming filled with several small fat globules, which gradually become confluent into a big globule. In this state the corpus luteum is complete, and has reached the height of its progressive growth. The tissue is then gradually absorbed, and cicatrical tissue is left. When this shrinks it produces a shrinking of the corpus luteum. This represents the last stage in the life of a Graafian follicle. The corpus luteum of Graafian Chap. XXXII.] FEMALE GENITAL ORGANS. 263 follicles, of which the ovum has been impregnated, grows to a much larger size than under other condi- tions, the granulosa becoming by overgrowth much folded. 351. Development of the ovary and Graa- fian follicles.—The germinal epithelium of the surface of the fetal ovary at an early stage undergoes rapid multiplication, in consequence of which the epi- thelium becomes greatly thickened. The vascular stroma of the ovary at the same time increases, and permeates the thickened germinal epithelium. The two tissues in fact undergo mutual ingrowth, as is the case in the development of all glands—viz., the epithe- lial or glandular part suffers mutual ingrowth with the vascular connective tissue stroma. In the case of the ovary, larger and smaller islands or nests (Balfour) of epithelial cells are thus gradually differentiated off from the superficial epithe- lium. These nests are largest in the depth, and smallest near the surface. They remain in connection with one another and with the surface for a considerable period. Even some time after birth some of the superficial nests are still connected with the surface epithelium, and with one another (Fig. 1434). These correspond to the ovarial tubes (Pfliiger). While in the rabbit these nests are solid collections, in the dog they soon assume the character of tubular structures (Pfliiger, Schiffer). The cells constituting the nests undergo multiplication (by karyokinesis), in conse- quence of which the nests increase in size, and even new nests may be constricted off from old ones (see also above). 352. At the earliest stages we notice in the germinal epithelium some of the cells becoming en- larged in their cell-body, and especially their nu- cleus; these represent the primitive ova. When the germinal epithelium undergoes the thickening above ~ 264 ELEMENTS OF HisTOLOGY. (Chap. XXXII. mentioned, and when this thickened epithelium sepa- rates into the nests and ovarial tubes, there is a continued formation of primitive ova—ie., cells of the nests undergo the enlargement of cell-body and Py ie eA vent ¥ I ay 2 Fig. 143a.—F rom a Vertical Section through the Ovary of a new-born Child. a, Germinal epithelium; b, ovarian tube; c, primitive ova; d, longer tubes be- coming constricted off into several Graafian follicles; e, large nests; /, ee 5 gigi oy Graafian follicles; g, blocd-vessels. (Waldeyer, in Stricker’s anual, nucleus, by which they are converted into primitive ova. Like the other epithelial cells, the primitive ova of the nests and ovarial tubes undergo division into two or even more primitive ova after the mode of karyokinesis (Balfour). Thus each nest contains a series of ova. 353. The ordinary small epithelial cells of the nests and ovarial tubes serve to form the membrana granulosa of the Graafian follicles. According to Chap. XXXII.] FEMALE GENITAL ORGANS. 265 the number of ova in a nest or in an ovarial tube a subdivision takes place in so many Graafian follicles, each consisting of one ovum with a more or less complete investment of small epithelial cells—z.e., a membrana granulosa. This subdivision is brought about by the ingrowth of the stroma into the nests. The superficial nests being the smallest, as above stated, form the cortical layer of the small Graafian follicles ; the deeper ones give origin to larger follicles. Thus we see that the ovum and the cells of the membrana granulosa are derived from the primary germinal epithelium; all other parts—membrana propria, theca externa, stroma, and vessels—are derived from the foetal stroma. There is a good deal of evidence to show that’ ova and Graafian follicles are, as a rule, reproduced after birth (Pfliiger, Kolliker), although other ob- servers (Bischoff, Waldeyer) hold the opposite view. 354. (2) The oviduct.—The oviduct consists of a lining epithelium, a mucous membrane, a muscular coat, and an outer fibrous coat—the serous covering, or peritoneum. The epithelium is columnar and ciliated. The mucous membrane is much folded ; it is a connective tissue membrane with networks of capillary blood-vessels. Im man and mammals there are no proper glands present, although there are seen appearances in sections which seem to indicate the existence of short gland tubes; but these appear- ances are explained by the folds of the mucous membrane. ‘The muscular coat is composed of non- striped muscular tissue of a pre-eminently circular ‘ arrangement; in the outer part there are a few oblique and longitudinal bundles. The serous cover- ing contains numerous elastic fibrils in a connective tissue matrix. - 355, (3) The uterus.—The epithelium lining the cavity of the uterus is a single layer of columnar 266 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. Xi X11 cells, each with a bundle of cilia on their free surface. These are very easily detached, and therefore difficult to find in a hardened and preserved specimen. But — in the fresh and well-preserved human uterus (Fried- : lander), as well as in that of mammals, the cells are distinctly ciliated. The whole canal of the cervix is also lined with ciliated epithelium, but in children, according to Lott, only beginning from the middle. The surface of the portio vaginalis uteri is, like that of the vagina, covered with stratified pavement epithe- lium. 356. The mucous membrane of the cervix is different from that of the fundus. In the former it is a fibrous tissue possessed of permanent folds—the ‘palmee plicate. Few thin bundles of non-striped mus- cular tissue penetrate from the outer muscular coat into the mucous membrane. Between the palme — plicatz are the openings of minute gland-tubes, more or less cylindrical in shape. They possess a mem- brana propria and a distinct lumen lined with a single layer of columnar epithelial cells, which, according to some, are ciliated in the new-born child, but, ac- cording to Friedlander, non-ciliated. Goblet-cells are met with amongst the lining epithelium. Several observers (Kélliker, Hennig, Tyler Smith, and others) maintain the existence of minute, thin, and long vascular papille projecting above the general surface of the mucous membrane in the lower part of the cervix ; these apparent papille are, however, only due to sections through the folds of the mucous membrane. ~ The mucous membrane of the fundus is a spongy . plexus of fine bundles of fibrous tissue, covered or lined respectively with numerous small endothelial plates, each with an oval flattened nucleus. The spaces of this spongy substance are lymph-spaces, and contain the glands and the blood-vessels (Leopold). 357. The glands —glandule wterinz — are Chap. XXXIIl.] FEMALE GENITAL ORGANS. 267 short tubular glands. They occur in the new-born child chiefly at the sides ; during puberty their number and their size increase. considerably, new glands being formed by the ingrowth of the surface epithelium into the mucous membrane (Kundrat and Engelmann). During menstruation, and especially during pregnancy, they greatly increase in length. “They are more or less wavy and branched at the bottom. A delicate membrana propria forms the boundary of the tube; a distinct lumen is seen in the middle, and this is lined with a single layer of ciliated columnar epithelium (Allen Thomson, Nylander, Friedlander, and others). 358. During menstruation the thickness of the mucous membrane increases, the epithelium of the surface and of the greater part of the glands being destroyed by fatty degeneration, and finally alto- gether detached. Afterwards its restitution takes place from the remnant in the depth of the glands. But according to J. Williams and also Wyder, the greater part of the mucous membrane, in addition to the epithelium, is destroyed during menstruation. The muscular coat forms the thickest part of the wall of the uterus ; it is composed entirely of the non- striped variety. In the cornua uteri of mammals the muscular coat is generally composed of an inner thicker circular and an outer thinner longitudinal stratum, a few oblique bundles passing from the latter into the former. In the human uterus the muscular coat is composed of an outer thin longitudinal, a middle thick layer of circular bundles, and an inner thick ‘one of oblique and circular bundles. Within these layers the bundles form plexuses. } 359. The arterioles in the cervix and their capil- laries are distinguished by the great thickness of their wall, The mucous membrane contains the capillary networks. These discharge their blood ‘nto veins 268 ZELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXXI1i, situated in the muscular coat. There the veins are very numerous, and arranged in dense plexuses, those of the outer and inner stratum being smaller than those of the middle stratum, where they correspond to huge irregular sinuses, the bundles of muscular tissue of the muscular coat giving special support to these sinuses. Hence the plexus of venous sinuses of the middle stratum represents a sort of cavernous tissue. 360. The lymphatics are very numerous; in the intermuscular connective tissue of the muscular coat are lymph sinuses and lymph clefts forming an intercommunicating system ; they take up the lymph sinuses of the mucous membrane above mentioned, and on the other hand lead into a plexus of lymphatic vessels with valves, situated in the subserous connec- tive tissue. The merves entering the mucous membrane are connected with ganglia, According to Lindgren, there is in the mucous membrane a plexus of non-medullated nerve-fibres, which, near the epithelium, break up into their constituent primitive fibrille. 361. (4) The wagima.—The epithelium lining the mucous membrane is a thick, stratified, pavement epithelium. The superficial part of the mucous mem- brane—i.e., the mucosa—is a dense, fibrous, connective tissue with numerous networks of elastic fibres; it projects into the epithelium in the shape of numerous long, single or divided papille, each with a simple or complex loop of capillary blood-vessels. The mucosa with the covering epithelium projects above the gene- ral surface in the shape of longer or shorter, conical or irregular, pointed or blunt, permanent folds—the ruge. These contain a plexus of large veins, between which are bundles of non-striped muscular tissue ; hence they resemble a sort of cavernous tissue, Outside of the mucosa is the loose submucosa containing a second venous plexus; its meshes are Chap. XXXIL.] FEMALE GENITAL ORGANS. 269 elongated and parallel to the long axis of the vagina. Outside of the submucous tissue is the muscular coat, consisting of an inner circular and an outer longitu- dinal stratum of non-striped muscular tissue. Oblique bundles pass from one stratum into the other. From the circular stratum bundles may be traced into the submucosa and mucosa. A layer of fibrous tissue forms the outer boundary of the wall of the vagina, and in it is the most conspicuous plexus of veins, the plexus venosus vaginalis. This plexus also contains bundles of non-striped muscular tissue, and therefore resembles a cavernous tissue (Gussenbaur.) It is not quite definitely ascertained whether or not there are secreting glands in the mucous membrane of the vagina. Von Preuschen and also Hennig described .tubular glands in the upper part of the fornix and in the introitus. The lymphatics form plexuses in the mucosa, sub- mucosa, and the muscular coat. The first are small vessels, the second are larger than the third and possess valves. The efferent vessels form a rich plexus of large trunks with saccular dilatations in the outer fibrous coat. : There are in the mucous membrane solitary lymph follicles and diffuse adenoid tissue (Loevenstein). Numerous ganglia are contained in the nerve plexus belonging to the muscular coat. End bulbs in connection with the nerve-fibres of the mucosa have been mentioned in Chapter XV. 362. (5) The urethra.—tThe structure of the female urethra is similar to that of the male, except ‘that the lining epithelium is a sort of stratified tran- sitional epithelium, the superficial cells being short, columnar, or club-shaped ; underneath this layer are several layers of polyhedral, or cubical cells. Near the orificium externum the epithelium is stratified pavement epithelium. 270 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XXXIII. The muscular coat is composed of an inner longi- tudinal, and an outer circular, layer of non-striped muscular tissue. 363. (6) The nymphz, clitoris, and vesti- bulum.—These are lined with thick stratified epi- thelium, underneath is a fibrous connective tissue mucous membrane, extending into the epithelium in the shape of cylindrical papille with capillary loops and nerve-endings (end bulbs). The nymphe contain large sebaceous follicles, but no hairs. The nymphe contain a plexus of large veins with bundles of non-striped muscular tissue ; hence it re- sembles a cavernous tissue (Gassenbaur). The corpora cavernosa of the clitoris, the glans clitoridis, and the bulbi vestibuli, correspond to the analogous parts in the penis of the male. The glands of Bartholin corre- spond in structure to the glands of Cowper in the male, CHAPTER XXXIIL THE MAMMARY GLAND. 364. Tuts, like other glands, consists of a frame- work and parenchyma. The former is lamellar fibrous connective tissue subdividing the latter into lobes and lobules and containing a certain amount of elastic fibres. In some animals (rabbit, guinea-pig) there are also small bundles of non-striped muscular tissue. From the interlobular septa fine bundles of fibrous tissue with branched connective tissue corpuscles pass between the alveoli of the gland substance. The amount of this interalveolar tissue varies in different places, but in the active gland is always relatively scanty. Chap. XXXII] THe Mammary GLAND. 271 Migratory or lymph corpuscles are to be met with in the interalveolar connective tissue of both active and resting glands. In the latter they are more numerous than in the former. According to Creighton, they are derived, in the resting gland, from the epi- thelium of the gland alveoli. - Granular large yellow (pigmented) nucleated cells occur in the connec- tive tissue, and also in the alveoli of the resting gland, and Creighton considers them both identical, and derived from the alveolar epithelium. And according to this author, the production of these cells, would constitute the principal function of the resting gland. The large ducts as they pass from the gland to the nipple, acquire a thick sheath, containing bundles of non-striped muscular tissue. These latter are de- rived from the bundles of non-striped muscular tissue present in the skin of the nipple of the breast. The small ducts in the lobules of the gland tissue possess a membrana propria, and a lining—a single layer of longer or shorter columnar epithelial cells. The terminal branches of the ducts, 7.¢., just before these latter pass into the alveoli; are lined with a single layer of flattened pavement epithelium cells; _ they are analogous to the intermediary portion of the ducts of the salivary glands (see Chap. XXIT.). 365. Each of these terminal branches divides and takes up several alveols (Fig. 144). These are wavy tubes, saccular or flask-shaped. The alveoli are larger in diameter than the intralobular ducts. Each alveolus in the active gland has a relatively large ' cavity, varying in different alveoli; it is lined with a single layer of polyhedral, granular-looking, or short columnar epithelial cells, each with a spherical nucleus ; a membrana propria forms the outer limit. This mem- brana propria, like that of the salivary, lachrymal and other glands, is a basket-work of branched cells." (272 ELEMENTS OF HisTOLoGY. (Chap. XXXII. In the active gland each epithelial cell is capable of forming in its interior one or more smaller or larger oil globules. These may, and generally do, become confluent, and, pressing the nucleus towards one side of the cell, give to the latter the resemblance of a fat- cell. The oil globules are finally ejected by the cell- protoplasm into the lumen of the alveolus, and repre- fi Fig. 144.—From a Section through the Mammary Gland of Cat in a late stage of Pregnancy. a tee epithelial cells lining the gland-alveoli, seen in fren; ; 5, the same, see m the surface. Many epithelial cells contain an oil globule. In the Cavite sy ncane of the alveoli are milk globules and granular matter. (Atlas.) sent now the milk globules. The cell resumes its former solid character, and commences again to form oil globules in its protoplasm. The epithelial cells, as long as the secretion of milk lasts, go on again and again forming oil globules in the above manner without being themselves destroyed (Langer). These milk globules, when in the lumen of the alveoli, are Chap. XXXII.) Zaz Mammary GLAND. 273 enveloped in a delicate cuticle—the albumin mem- brane of Ascherson. This membrane they receive from the cell protoplasm. According to the state of secretion, most epithelial cells lining an alveolus may be in the condition of forming oil globules, or only some of them; and according to the rate in which milk globules are formed and carried away, the alveoli differ in the number of milk globules they contain. According to Schmid, the epithelial cells, after having secreted milk globules for some time, finally break up, and are replaced by new epithelial cells derived by the division of the other still active epithelial cells. 366. The resting gland, «e., the gland of a non- pregnant or non-suckling individual, contains, compara- tively speaking, few alveoli, but a great deal of fibrous connective tissue ; the alveoli are all solid cylinders, containing within the limiting membrana propria masses of polyhedral granular-looking epithelial cells. During pregnancy these solid alveoli undergo rapid multiplication, elongation, and thickening, owing to the rapid division of the epithelial cells. Finally, when milk secretion commences, the cells occupying the central part of the alveolus undergo the fatty degeneration just. like the peripheral cells, but they, i.¢., the central cells, are eliminated, while the peripheral ones remain. ‘These central cells are the colostrum corpuscles, and consequently they are found in the milk of the first few days only. __ 3867. Ordinary milk contains no colostrum corpus- cles, but only milk globules of many various sizes, from the size of a granule to that of a globule several times as big as an epithelial cell of an alveolus of the milk gland. These large drops are produced by fusion of small globules after having passed out of the alveoli. Each milk globule is an oil globule surrounded, as s—l ; - 274 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXXIV. stated above, by a thin albuminous envelope—Ascher- son’s membrane. The small bits of granular substance met with here and there, are probably the remains of broken-down protoplasm of epithelial cells. 368. Each gland alveolus is surrounded by a dense network of capillary blood-vessels. The alveoli are surrounded by lymph spaces like those in the salivary glands (Coyne) and these spaces lead into networks of lymphatic vessels of the interlobular connective tissue. | CHAPTER XXXIV. THE SKIN. 369. Tue skin consists of the following layers (Fig. 145) :—(1) the epidermis; (2) the corium, or cutis vera, with the papille; (3) the subcutaneous tissue, with the adipose layer or the adipose tissue. 370. (1) The epidermis (Fig. 14), in all its constituent elements, has been minutely described in Chapter III. Its thickness varies in different parts, and is chiefly dependent on the variable thickness of the stratum corneum. This is of great thickness in the palm of the hand and the sole of the foot. The stratum Malpighii fits into the depressions between the papille of the corium as the interpapillary pro- cesses. The presence of prickle cells, of pigment granules, and of branched interstitial nucleated cells, &c., has been mentioned in Chapter III. There occur in the stratum Malpighii migratory cells of granular aspect ; they appear to migrate from the papillary layer of the corium into the stratum Malpighii (Biesiadecki). 371. (2) The cerium is a dense feltwork of bundles of fibrous connective tissue, with a large - hap. XXXIV.] THE SKIN. 275 admixture of networks of elastic fibres. From the surface of the corium project small conical or cylin- drical papille. These are best developed in those parts where the skin is thick, eg., volar side of hand and foot, scalp, lips of mouth, &c. Between the surface of the corium and the epidermis there is a basement membrane. Migratory cells, with and : SW SSI ere WSS S77, Ws M SSSass~ ZN x Fig. 145.—Vertical Section through the Skin of Human Finger. a, Stratum corneum ; 3, stratum lucidum; ec, stratum Malpighii;: d@, Meissner’s, os Boe corpuscles ; e, blood-vessels cut across; 7, a sudoriferous canal or uct. without pigment granules in their interior, are met with, especially in the superficial part of the corium ; they, as well as the fixed or branched connective tissue corpuscles (see par. 40), and other structures, as vessels and nerves, lie in the-interfascicular spaces. 372. (3) The superficial part of the subcuta- neous tissue insensibly merges into the deep part of the corium ; it consists of bundles of fibrous connective tissue aggregated into trabecule crossing one another 276 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXXIV. and interlacing in a complex manner. Numerous elastic fibres are attached to these trabecule. It con- tains groups of fat cells, in many places arranged as more or less continuous lobules of fat tissue, forming the stratum adiposum. ‘'These lobules are. separated by septa of fibrous connective tissue ; their structure and development, and the distribution of the blood- vessels amongst the fat cells, have been described in par. 45. The deep part of the subcutaneous tissue is loose in texture, and contains the large vascular trunks and the big nerve branches. 373. The superficial part of the subcutaneous tissue, or, as some have it, the deep part of the corium, contains the sudoriparous or sweat glands. Each gland is a single tube coiled up into a dense clump of about 4, of an inch in diameter—in some places, as in the axilla, reaching as much as six times this size. From each gland a duct—the sudori- ferous canal—passes through the corium in a slightly wavy and vertical direction towards the epidermis ; it penetrates more or less spirally through the inter- papillary process of the stratum Malpighii and the rest of the epidermis, and appears with an open mouth on the free surface of the skin. The total number of sweat glands in the human skin has been computed by Krause to be over two millions ; but it varies greatly in different parts of the body, the largest number occurring in the palm of the hand, the next in the sole of the foot, the next on the dorsum of the hand and foot, and the smallest in the skin of the dorsum of the trunk. 374. The sudoriferous canal and the coiled tube possess a distinct lumen; this is lined with a delicate cuticle, especially marked in the sudoriferous canal and in the commencement of the coiled tube. In the epidermis the lumen bordered by this cuticle is all that is present of the sudoriferous canal. It receives Chap. XXXIV.) Tre SKIN. 277 a continuation from the middle layer of the stratum Malpighii and from the basement membrane; the - former is the lining epithelium, the latter the limiting membrana propria of the sudoriferous canal. The epithelium consists of two or three layers of small polyhedral cells, each with a spherical or oval nucleus. a Fig. 146,—From a Section through Human Skin, showing the Sweat gland tubes cut in various directions. ; a, First part of the coiled tube seen in longitudinal section ; 6, the same seen in cross section ; ¢, the distal part seen in longitudinal section ; d, the same seen in cross section. (Aflas.) 375. The structure of the sudoriferous canal is then—a limiting membrana propria, an epithelium composed of two or three layers of polyhedral cells, an internal delicate membrane, and, finally, the central cavity, or lumen. The first part—about one-third or one-fourth— of the coiled tube (Fig. 146) is of the same struc- ture, and is directly continuous with the sudoriferous canal, with which it is identical, not only in structure, but in size. The remainder of the coiled tube—~e., the distal part—is larger in diameter, and differs in + 278 ELremenrs or Historocy. (Chap. XXXIV. these essential respects, that its epithelium is a single layer. of transparent columnar cells, and that there is between this and the limiting membrana propria ' a layer of non-striped muscle cells (Kolliker) arranged - parallel with the long axis of the tube. In some places, as in the palm of the hand and foot, in the scrotum, the nipple of the breast, the scalp, but especially in the axilla, this distal portion of the coiled tube is of very great length and breadth, and its epithelial cells contain a variable amount of granules. It appears to me that the cells resemble in this respect those of the serous salivary glands and the chief cells of the gastric glands (Langley), inasmuch as they produce in their interior larger or smaller granules which are used up during secretion, from the periphery towards the lumen. 376. The cerumimous glands of the meatus auditorius externus are of the same structure as the distal portion just described, except that the inner part of the cell protoplasm of the epithelium contains yellowish or brownish pigment, found also in their secretion, 7.¢., in the wax of the ear. Around the anus there is an elliptical zone, in the skin of which are found large coiled gland tubes—the _ ewreumanal glands of A. Gay—which are identical in structure with the distal portion of the sweat gland tubes. 377. The sweat glands develop as a solid cylin- drical outgrowth of the stratum Malpighii of the epidermis, which gradually elongates till it reaches the superficial part of the subcutaneous tissue, where it commences to coil. The lumen of the tube is of later appearance. The membrana propria is derived from the tissue of the cutis, but the epithelium and muscular layer are both derived from the original outgrowth of the epidermis. 378. The hair-follicles (Fig. 147)—The skin Chap. XXXIV.] almost everywhere contains cylindrical follicles, planted more or less near to one another, and in groups. each of them is fixed the root of a haw; that part ee Pry) " veges Sy S ‘S y Cy tn dae Urata l= ¢ [2 Pars asa: 2S ya" ©. Te a Ln Ct Ses ire (1 at YY = _of the hair which projects beyond the general surface of the skin is the shaft. A very few places contain no hair-follicles, such, for instance, as the volar side of the hand and foot, and the skin of the penis. In size, the hairs and hair-follicles differ in diffe- rent parts. Those of the scalp, the cilia of the eyelids, <0 eee SOUS ks RS. stieitiy Gs THE SKIN. x ms Petes 3 PROF Nye Fig. 147.—Longitudinal Section through a Human Hair. 1, Epidermis; 2, mouth of hair follicle; 3, sebaceous follicle; 4, musculus arrector pili; 5, papilla of hair ; 6, adipose tissue. (Atlas.) HOSS Cas ~~ aus gets eats) sb 280 E[LEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXXIV. the hairs of the axilla and pubic region, those of the male whiskers and moustache, are coarse and thick, while the hairs of other places—e.g., the skin- surface of the eyelids, the middle of the arm and forearm, &c.—are very minute: but, as regards struc- ture, they are.all very much alike. : 379. A complete hair and hair-follicle—that is, the papillary hair of Unna—shows the following struc- ture :— The hair-follicle. Each hair-follicle commences on the free surface of the skin with a funnel- shaped opening or mouth; it passes in an oblique direction through the corium into the subcutaneous tissue, in whose middle strata—i.e., in the stratum adiposum—it terminates with a slightly enlarged extremity, with which it is invaginated over a rela- tively small fungus-shaped papilla. This latter is of fibrous tissue, containing numerous cells and a loop of capillary blood-vessels. Minute hairs do not reach with their follicles to such a depth as the large coarse hairs, the former not extending generally much farther than the deep part of the corium. Degenerating and imperfect hairs (see below) also do not reach to such a depth as the perfect large hair-follicles. In individuals with ‘woolly ” hair—e.g., the negro race (O. Stewart), and in animals with “ woolly” hair, such as the fleece of sheep—the deep extremity of the hair-follicle is curved, sometimes even slightly upwards. 380. The structure of a hair-follicle is as follows (Fig. 148): There is an outer coat composed of fibrous tissue; this is the fibrous coat of the hair- sac. It is merely a condensation of the surround- ing fibrous tissue, and is continuous with the papilla at the extremity of the hair-follicle. About the end of the hair-follicle, or sometimes as much as in the lower fourth, there is inside of this "= Chap. XXXIV.] THE SKIN: 281 fibrous layer of the hai-sac a single continuous layer of transversely or circularly-arranged spindle- shaped cells, each with an oval flattened or staff shaped nucleus, completely resembling, and generally considered to be, non-striped mus- cle cells. Inside of this layer of the hair-sac is a glassy-looking, hyaline, basement membrane, which is not very dis- @-7jr tinct in minute hairs, but is sufti- ciently conspicu- ous in large adult hair - follicles. ses glassy pore Fig. 148.—Cross Section through a Human Hair ane, aS it 1s and Hair Follicle. called, is a direct a, Marrow of hair; 5, cortex of hair; c, cuticle of continuation of ¢Hénie’s layer of inner root-sheath ; 7, outer roots sheath ; g, giassy membrane ; hk, fibrous coat of hair the basement sac; 7, lymph spaces in the same. ~' membrane of the surface of the corium, and it‘can be traced as a delicate membrane also over the surface of the hair-papilla. 381. Next to the glassy membrane is the outer root-sheath, the most conspicuous part of the hair-fol- licle. It consists of a thick stratified epithelium of exactly the same nature as the stratum Malpighii of the. epidermis, with which it is directly continuous, and from which it is developed. In the outer root- sheath the layer of cells next to the glassy membrane is columnar, just like the deepest layer of cells in the stratum Malpighii ; then follow inwards several layers of polyhedral cells; and, finally, flattened nucleated ‘scales form the innermost boundary of the outer root- 282 Ecements or HisTotoGy. [Chap. XXXIV. sheath. The stratum granulosum of the stratum Malpighii is not continued beyond the mouth of the hair-follicle, but there it is generally very marked. The outer root-sheath becomes greatly attenuated at the papilla—in fact, is there continuous with the cells constituting the hair-bulb. 382. The centre of the hair-follicle is occupied by the root of the hair, which terminates with an en- larged extremity—the hair-bulb; this grasps the whole papilla. The hair-bulb is composed of poly- hedral epithelial cells, separated from one another by cement substance, and continuous with the cells of the extremity of the outer root-sheath, from which they originate in the first instance ; just over the papilla there is a special row of short columnar cells, which are in an active state of multiplication, and by which continuously new cells are formed. Thus a gradual shifting of the cells of the hair- bulb upwards into the cavity of the hair-follicle— i.e., the hair—takes place; but at the same time these progressing cells become elongated, spindle- shaped, and constitute the cells of the hair substance, except in the very centre, where they remain poly- hedral, so as to represent the cells of the marrow of the hair, and in the periphery, where they remain more or less polyhedral, so as to form the inner root- sheath. 383. The root of the hair, except at the hair- bulb, shows the following parts: The substance of the hair, the cuticle, and the inner root-sheath. The substance of the hair is composed of the hair fibres, i.e., long thin fibres, or narrow long scales, each com- posed of hyaline horny substance, and possessed of a thin staff-shaped remnant of a nucleus. These are held together by a certain amount of interstitial ‘cement substance. Towards the bulb they gradually change into the spindle-shaped cells above men- a Chap. XXXIV.] - THE SKIN. 283 tioned. They can be isolated by strong acids and alkalies. In pigmented hairs there occur numerous pigment granules between the hair fibres, but also diffused pigment in their substance. The same is noticed with reference to the hair-bulb—viz., pigment granules being present in the intercellular cement, and pigment also in the cell substance. In the centre of many hairs is a cylindrical space, containing gene- rally one row of polyhedral cells, which are, to a great extent, filled with air, and, in pigmented hair, also with pigment granules. 384. On the surface of the hair substance is a thin cuticle, a single layer of horny non-nucleated hyaline scales arranged more or less transversely ; they are imbricated, and, according to the degree of imbrica- tion, the cuticle shows more or less marked projections, which give to the circumference of the hair the appear- ance of minute teeth, like those of a saw. 385. The inner root-sheath in well- formed, thick hairs, is very distinct, and consists of a delicate cuticle next to the cuticle of the hair; then an inner, or Hualey’s, layer, which is a single, or sometimes double, layer of horny cubical cells, each with a rem- nant of a nucleus; and, finally, an outer, or Henle’s, layer—a single layer al View of the of non-nucleated horny cubical cells. mental Ween The shaft of the hair (Fig. . ewe oe tar: 149), or the part projecting over %,fbres of hair sab- the free surface of the skin, is of exactly the same structure as the root, except that it possesses no inner root-sheath. _ 886. As mentioned above, at the hair-bulb the polyhedral cells constituting this latter gradually pass into the different parts of the hair—ze., marrow-sub- Fig. 149. — Longitu- in Sh _ 384 Exemenrs oF HisToLocy. (Chap. XXXIV. stance, cuticle, and inner root-sheath—and the con- tinual new production of cells over the papilla causes a Fig. 150.—From a Section through Human Scalp, showing a degenerating Hair, a, The epidermis; b, the hair: c, the outer root-sheath of the hair folli- cle ; d, the sebaceous follicle; e, the arrector pili; f,a cyst grown out of the outer root-sheath; g, the nair-knob; h, the new outgrowth of the outer root-sheath; ¢, the “vw papilla. (Atlas,) gradual progression and con- version of the cells, and a corresponding growth in length of the hair shaft. Pigmented hairs, as men- tioned above, contain pig- ment granules between—2.e., in the interstitial substance cementing together — the hair fibres, and diffuse pig- ment in their substance. According to the amount of these pigments, but es- pecially of the interstitial pigment granules (Pincus), the colour of the hair is of a greater or lesser dark tint. In red hairs there is chiefly diffuse pigment. In white or fair hairs neither the one nor the other pigment is present ; in grey there is air at least in the superficial layers of the hair substance, besides ab- sence of pigment. Sleek hairs are circu- lar, curly oval, in cross-sec- tion. 387. New formation of haw (Fig. 150). — Every hair, be it fine and short or thick and long, under normal conditions, has only a limited exis- rs Chap. XXXIV.] THE SKIN. 285 tence, for its hair-follicle, including the papilla, sooner or later undergoes degeneration, and subsequent to this a new papilla and a new hair are formed in its place. What happens is this—the lower part of the hair-follicle, including the papilla and hair-bulb, degenerates and is gradually absorbed. Then there is left only the upper part of the follicle, and in the centre of this is the remainder—+ze., non-degene- rated portion—of the hair root. The fibres of this are at the extremity fringed out and lost amongst the cells of the outer root-sheath of the follicle. This represents the haw-knob (Henle). Now, from the outer root-sheath a cylindrical outgrowth of epithe- lial cells into the-depth takes place; against the extremity of this a new papilla is made. In con- nection with this new papilla, and in the centre of that cylindrical outgrowth, a new hair and hair-bulb are formed, and as these gradually grow outwards towards the surface they lift, or rather push, the old hair—i.e., the hair-knob—out of the follicle. The outer part of the follicle of the old hair persists. Thus we find in all parts of the skin where hairs occur, complete or papillary hairs side by side with degenerating hairs, or hair-knobs. 388. Development of hair.—In the human foetus the hair-follicles make their first appearance about the end of the third month, as solid cylindrical out- growths from the stratum Malpighii. This is the rudi- ment of the outer root-sheath. After having pene- trated a short distance into the corium, this latter be- comes condensed around it as the rudiment of the hair- sac, and at the distal extremity forms the papilla growing against the outer root-sheath and inva- ginating it. In connection with the papilla a rapid multiplication of the epithelial cells of this extremity of the outer root-sheath takes place, and this forms the hair-bulb, by the multiplication of whose cells the hair 286 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXXIV. — and the inner root-sheath are formed. As growth and multiplication proceed at the hair-bulb, so the new hair, with its distal-pointed end, gradually reaches the outer surface. It does not at once penetrate the epidermis, but remains growing and burrowing its way for some time in the stratum corneum of the epidermis in a more or less horizontal direction. 389. In many mammals occur, amongst ordinary hairs, special large hairs, with huge hair-follicles planted deeply into the subcutaneous tissue ; such are the big hairs in the skin about the lips of the mouth in the dog, cat, rabbit, guinea-pig, mouse and rat, &e., These are the tactile hawrs. Their hair-follicle pos- sesses a thick hair-sac, in which are contained large sinuses intercommunicating with one another and with the blood system ; these sinuses are separated by trabecule of non-striped muscular tissue, and repre- sent, therefore, a cavernous tissue. The papilla is — very huge, and so is the outer root-sheath and the ~ hair-root in all its parts. There are vast numbers of nerve-fibres, distributed and terminating amongst the cells of the outer root-sheath (Arnstein). 390. With each hair-follicle is connected one or two sebaceous follicles. These consist of several flask- shaped or oblong alveoli, joining into a common short duct opening into the hair-follicle near the surface— 7.e., that part called the neck of the hair-follicle. The alveoli have a limiting membrana propria; next to this is a layer of small polyhedral, granular- looking, epithelial cells, each with a spherical or oval nucleus ; next to this, and filling the entire space of the alveolus, are large polyhedral cells, each with a spherical nucleus; the cell-substance is filled with minute oil-globules, between which is left a sort of honeycombed reticulated stroma. The cells nearer to the centre of the alveolus are the largest. To- wards the duct they become shrivelled up into an Chap. XXXIV.] THE SKIN. 287 amorphous mass. The duct itself is a continuation of the outer root-sheath. As multiplication goes on in the marginal layer of epithelial cells—+z.e., those next the membrana propria —the products of this multiplication are gradually shifted forward towards the duct, and through this into the neck and mouth of the hair-follicle, where they constitute the elements of sebwm. There is a very characteristic misproportion be- tween the size of the hair-follicle and that of the sebaceous gland in the embryo and new-born, the sebaceous gland being there so large that it forms the most conspicuous part, the minute hairs (lanugo) being situated, as it were, in the duct of the sebaceous follicle. 391. In connection with each hair-follicle, espe- cially where they are of good size—as in the scalp— there is a bundle, or rather group of bundles, of non- striped muscular tissue ; this is the arrector pili. It is inserted in the hair-sac near the bulbous portion of the hair-follicle, and passes in an oblique direction towards the surface of the corium, grasping, as it were, on its way the sebaceous follicle, and terminating near the papillary layer of the surface of the corium. The arrector pili forms with the hair-follicle an acute angle—this latter being planted into the skin in an oblique direction, as mentioned above—and conse- quently, when the arrector contracts, it has the effect of raising the hair follicle and hair (cutis anserina— “ goose’s skin”), and of making the hair assume a more upright position (causes it, as we say, to ‘stand -on end”), At the same time, it compresses the sebaceous follicle, and thus facilitates the discharge ot the sebum. 392. The corium of the scrotum, of the nipple of the breast, of the labia _pudendi majora, and of the penis, contains numbers o Saudia: al of non-striped 288 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. {Chap. XXXIV. muscular tissue (Kolliker), independent of the hairs ; these run in an oblique and horizontal direction, and form plexuses. 393. The mails (Fig. 151).—We distinguish the body of the nail from the free margin and from the —_—_— —_——_— = ere Fig. 151.—Vertical Section through the Human Nail and Nail-bed, a, Stratum Malpighii of nail-bed; 4, stratum granulosum of nail-bed; ¢, the deep layers of the nail substance; d, the superficial layers of same. voot ; the body is the nail proper, and is fixed on to the nail-bed, while the nail-root is fixed on the nail- matrix—.e., the posterior part of the nail-bed. The nail is inserted, with the greater part of its lateral and the posterior margin, in the nazl-groove, a fold Chap. XXXIV.] THE SKIN. 289 by which the nail-matrix passes into the surrounding skin, 394, The substance of the nail is made up of a large number of strata of homogeneous horny scales— the nail-cells—each with a panetiness remnant of a nucleus. The corium of the. nail- bids is highly vascular ; it is firmly fixed by stiff bands of fibrous tissue on the subjacent periosteum; it is covered with a stratum Malpighii of the usual description, except that the stratum granulosum is absent in the nail-matrix, but is present in a rudimentary state in the rest of the nail-bed. The nail itself represents the stratum lucidum, of course of exaggerated thickness, situated over the stratum Malpighii of the nail-bed. There is no stratum corneum over the nail. The stratum Malpighii and corium of the nail-bed are placed into permanent minute folds, and the nail possesses on its lower surface corresponding linear indentations. 395. In the feetal nail-bed the stratum Malpighii is covered with the usual stratum lucidum and stratum corneum, but the former is the larger; by a rapid multiplication of the cells of the stratum Malpighii, and a conversion of its superficial cells into the scales of the stratum lucidum, the fcetal nail is produced. At this early stage the nail is covered by stratum corneum. By the end of the fifth month the margin breaks through this stratum corneum, and by the _seventh month the greater part has become clear of it. 396. The blood-vessels of the skin.—The blood-vessels are arranged in different systems for the different parts of the skin (Tomsa) :— (a) There is, first, the vascular system of the adipose tissue, differing in no way from the dis- tribution of blood-vessels in fat tissue of other places. T—1 290 Eremenrs or HisTotocy. (Chap. XXXIV. (b) Then there is the vascular system of the hair- ‘follicles. The papilla has a capillary loop, or rather a minute arteriole, a capillary loop, and a descending vein, and the fibrous tissue of the hair-sac possesses capillaries arranged as a network with elongated meshes, with its afferent arteriole and efferent vein. (c) The sebaceous follicle has its afferent arteriole and efferent vein, and capillary networks surrounding the alveoli of the gland. The arrector pili and other bundles of non-striped muscular tissue possess capil- lary networks with elongated meshes. (d) The sweat-glands have an afferent arteriole, from which proceeds a very rich network of capil- laries, twining and twisting round the gland-tube. The duct possesses its separate afferent arteriole and capillaries, forming elongated meshes. (e) The last arterial branches are those that reach the surface of the corium, and there break up into a dense capillary network with loops for the papille. In connection with these capillaries is a rich plexus of veins in the superficial layer of the corium. (f) In the nail-bed are dense networks of capil- laries, with loops for the above-named folds. 397. The lymphatics.—There are networks of lymphatic vessels in all strata of the skin; they are, more or less, of horizontal expansion, with oblique branches passing between them. Their wall is a single layer of endothelial cells, and some of them possess valves.. Those of the surface of the corium take up lymphatics of the papille. The subcutaneous lymphatics are the biggest. The fat tissue, the sweat- glands, and the hair-follicles possess their own lym- phatic clefts and sinuses. The interfascicular spaces of the corium and subcutaneous tissue are directly continuous with the lymphatic vessels in these parts. 398. The nerves.—The nerve-branches break up ~ Chap. XXxV.] Cony¥UNCTIVA AND ITS GLANDS. 201 into a dense plexus of fine nerve-fibres in the super- ficial layer of the corium. This plexus extends hori- zontally, and gives off numerous elementary fibrils to the stratum Malpighii, in which they ascend verti- cally and in a more or less wavy fashion towards the stratum lucidum (Langerhans, Podkopaeff, Eberth, Eimer, Ranvier, and others). According to some, they terminate with a minute swelling ; according to others, they form networks; but they always remain between the epithelial cells. The subcutaneous nerve-branches of some places —palm of hand and foot and skin of penis—give off single medullated nerve-fibres, terminating in a Pacinian corpuscle, mentioned in a former chapter. In the volar side of the fingers and toes there occur in some of the papille of the corium the tactile or Meissner’s corpuscles, each connected with one or two medullated nerve-fibres, as described in a previous chapter. The outer root-sheath of the hair-follicles contains the terminations of fine nerve-fibres, in the shape of primitive fibrille (Jobert, Bonnet, and Arnstein). According to Jobert, the nerve-fibres entwine the hair-follicle in circular turns. The tactile hairs possess a greater supply of nerves than the ordinary hair-follicles, CHAPTER XXXYV, THE CONJUNCTIVA AND ITS GLANDS. 399. (1) THe eyelids.—The outer layer of the eyelids is skin of ordinary description ; the inner is a delicate, highly vascular membrane—the conjunctiva palpebre. This includes a firm plate—the tarsal-plate 202 Exrements or Hrsrorocy. [Chap. XXXV —which is not cartilage, but very dense, white, fibrous tissue. In it lie embedded the Meibomian glands. These extend in each eyelid in a vertical direction from the distal margin of the tarsal-plate to the free margin of the eyelid; in the posterior angle of this margin lies the opening or mouth of each of the Meibomian glands. The duct of a Meibomian gland. is lined with a continuation of the stratified pavement epithelium, lining the free margin of the lid; it passes in the tarsal-plate toward its distal margin, and takes up on all sides short minute ducts, each of which becomes _ enlarged into a spherical, saccular, or flask-shaped alveolus. This is identical in structure and secretion with the alveoli of the sebaceous follicles of the skin. 400. The conjunctival layer is separated from the subcutaneous tissue of the skin-layer of the eyelid by the bundles of the sphincter orbicularis—striped mus- cular tissue. Some bundles of this extend near the free margin of the lid, and represent what is known as the musculus ciliaris Riolani. This sends bundles around the mouth of the Meibomian ducts. 401. At the anterior angle of the free margin of the lid are the eyelashes or cilia, remarkable for their thickness and rapid reproduction. Near the cilia, but towards the Meibomian ducts, open the ducts of pecu- liar large glands—the glands of Mohl. Each of these is a wavy or spiral tube, passing in a vertical direction from the margin of the lid towards its distal part; it completely coincides in structure to the large portion of asweat gland—~.e., that part containing a columnar epithelial lining, and between this and the membrana propria a longitudinal layer of non-striped muscular cells. The free margin is covered, as mentioned above, with stratified pavement epithelium, into which the _ t Chap. XXXV.] Cowy¥UNCTIVA AND ITS GLANDS. 293 mucous membrane extends in the shape of minute papille, In the conjunctiva palpebre the epithelium is thin, but stratified pavement epithelium; there are no papille, but the sub-epithelial mucosa—that is, the layer situated between the epithelium of the surface and the tarsal-plate—contains a dense network of capillary blood-vessels. 402. Passing from the eyelids on to the eyeball, we have the continuation of the conjunctiva palpebree —i.e., the fornix conjunctive—and, further, the con- junctiva fixed to the sclerotic, and terminating at the . margin of the cornea—the conjunctiva bulbi. The epithelium covering the conjunctiva fornicis and con- junctiva bulbi is stratified epithelium, the superficial cells being short columnar; next to the fornix the superficial cells are beautiful columnar, and the mucosa underneath the epithelium is placed in regular folds (Stieda, Waldeyer). Towards the cornea the epithelium of the conjunctiva assumes the character of stratified pavement epithelium, and minute papille extend into it from the mucosa. 403. The mucous membrane is fibrous tissue, containing the networks of capillary blood-vessels. Into the fornix lead minute mucous glands, em- bedded in the conjunctiva fornicis ; they are the glands of Krause. Similar glands exist in the distal portion of the tarsal-plate. 404, The bleod-vessels of the conjunctiva ter- minate as the capillary network of the superficial layer of the mucosa, and as capillary networks for the Meibomian glands, Krause’s gland, &. Around the corneal margin the conjunctival vessels are particu- larly dense, and loops of capillaries extend from it into the very margin of the cornea. 405. The lymphatics form a superficial and deep network. Both are connected by short branches. The deep vessels are possessed of valves, The super- 204 ELEMENTS OF HisTOLoGY. [Chap. XXXV. ficial plexus is densest at the limbus cornez, and they are in direct connection with the interfascicular lymph clefts, both of the sclerotic and cornea. In the margin of the lid the superficial lymphatics of the skin anastomose with those of the conjunc- . tiva. : Lymph follicles occur in groups in the conjunctiva of many mammals about the inner angle of the eye. In the lower eyelid of cattle they are very con- spicuous, and known as the glands of Bruch. They are also well-marked in the third lid of many mammals. According to Stieda and Morano, isolated lymph follicles occur also in the human conjunctiva. 406. The merves are very numerous in the con- junctiva ; they form plexuses of non-medullated fibres underneath the epithelium. From these plexuses fine fibrils pass into the epithelium of the surface, between whose cells they terminate as a network (Helfreich, Morano). End bulbs of Krause occur in great num- bers in man and calf. They have been mentioned in a former chapter. 407. (2) The lachrymal glands are identical in structure with the serous or true salivary glands. The arrangement of the connective tissue stroma, the nature and structure of the ducts—espe- cially of the intralobular ducts—and alveoli, the dis- tribution of blood-vessels and lymphatics, are exactly the same as in the true salivary glands. Reichel has found that the epithelial cells lining the alveoli are well defined, conical or cylindrical, trans- parent and slightly granular during rest; but during secretion they grow smaller, more opaque and granular, their outlines not well defined, and the nucleus becomes more spherical and placed more centrally. 408. In most mammals there is in the inner Chap. XXXVI.] THE CORNEA. 205 angle of the eye, and closely placed against the sur- face of the eyeball, a gland, called Harder’s gland. According to Wendt, this is either a true serous gland, like the lachrymal—as in. the ox, sheep, and pig—or it is identical in structure with a sebaceous gland, as in the mouse, rat, and guinea-pig; or it consists of two portions, one of which (white) is identical with a sebaceous, while the other (rose- coloured) is a true serous gland; such is the case in the rabbit and hare. According to Giacomini, a rudiment of Harder’s gland exists also in the ape and man. . CHAPTER XXXVI. THE CORNEA, SCLEROTIC, LIGAMENTUM PECTINATUM, AND CILIARY MUSCLE, 409. I. Tur cormea (Fig. 152) of man and many mammals consists of the following layers, counting from front to back :— (1) The epithelium of the anterior surface (see Fig. 15); this is a very transparent, stratified, pave- ment epithelium, such as has been described in par. 22. It is directly continuous with the epithelium of the conjunctiva, but it is more transparent; in dark pigmented eyes of mammals the epithelium of the conjunctiva is also pigmented. In these cases the pigment, as a rule, does not pass beyond the margin of the cornea. 410. (2) Next follows a homogeneous elastic mem- brane, Bowman’s membrane, or elastica anterior. It is best shown in the human eye, but is present, even though only rudimentary, in the eye of mammals. ~.w. a 296 ' (3) Then follows the grownd substance, or sub-— ELEMENTS. OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XXXVI. stantia propria, of the cornea. Fig. 152.—From a Vertical Section through the Membranes of the Eye of a Child. a, Cornea; 4, sclerotic; ¢, iris; d, processus ciliaris; e, ligamentum. pectinatum; J, ciliary muse choroid mem serrata ; s ction, by aa le, its meridional bundles; g, brane ; h, the retina of the ora t he sphincter pupillz in cross las. This is composed of lamelle of bundles of fibrous connective tissue. Neighbouring lamelle are connected with one another by oblique bundles. The fibre bundles within each lamella run parallel to the sur- ~ face of the cornea, but may cross one another under various angles, In the anterior layer of the ground substance some of the bundles pass through several lamelle in an > oblique manner ; they represent the fibre_ arcuatee. The fibrils within the bundles, and the bundles, and the la- melle of bundles are held together by an interstitial, albumin- ous, semi-fluid, cement substance, which, like other similar intersti- tial substances, be- longs to the globulins, and is soluble in 10 per cent. saline solu- tion (Schweigger Sei- del). A few elastic Chap. XXXVI] THE CORNEA. 297 fibrils are seen here and there. Between the lamelle are left the lacunze and canaliculi for the branched, flattened, nucleated corneal corpuscles, described in a previous chapter (Figs. 25, 26). They anasto- mose with one another within the same plane, and- also, to a limited degree, with those of neighbouring planes. 411. (4) The membrana Descemeti, or elastica posterior, is a resistent elastic membrane, conspicuous by its thickness in all cornee. (5) The posterior surface of this membrane is covered with a mosaic of beautiful polygonal endo- thelial cells, each with an oval nucleus—the en- dothelium of Descemet’s membrane. Under stimu- lation these cells contract. At first they appear slightly and numerously branched, but gradually their processes become longer and fewer, and ultimately they are reduced to minute clumps of nucleated protoplasm, each with a few long pro- cesses. There are no blood-vessels in the normal cornea, except in feetal life, when there is underneath the anterior epithelium a plexus of capillaries. The lymphatics are represented as the inter. communicating lymph-canalicular system—.e., the lacunz and canaliculi of the corneal corpuscles ; and in connection with these are lymph channels lined with a continuous endothelium and containing the nerve bundles. 412. The merves (Figs. 68, 69, 70) are distri- buted as the nerves of the anterior layers, and as ‘those of the Descemet’s membrane. The first form rich plexuses of fibrillated axis cylinders, with trian- gular nodal points (Cohnheim), in the anterior layers of the ground substance ; from this plexus pass obliquely through Bowman’s membrane short branches—the rami perforantes (Kolliker)—and these immediately 298 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. | (Chap. XXXVI. underneath the epithelium break up into their con- stituent primitive fibrils, the latter coming off the former brush-like (Cohnheim). These primitive fibrille ultimately ascend into the antezior epithelium (Hoyer, Cohnheim, and others), where they branch, and nearly reach the surface. They always run between the epithelial cells, and are connected into a network. According to some observers, they termi- nate with free ends, pointed or knobbed ; but according to others, with whom I agree, these apparent free ends are not in reality free endings. 413. The nerves of Descemet’s membrane form also a plexus of non-medullated fibres in the posterior layers of the ground substance; from them come off vast numbers of primitive fibrille, running a more or less straight and long course, crossing one another often under right angles; they give off very fine fibrils, which are closely associated with the corneal corpuscles, without, however, really becoming con- tinuous with their protoplasm. 414, II. The sclerotic consists of lamelle of tendinous tissue. The bundles of fibrous tissue are opaque as compared with those of the cornea, although they pass insensibly into them. There are lymph clefts between the lamelle and trabecule, and in them lie the flattened connective tissue corpuscles, which, in the dark eyes of some mammals only, contain pigment granules. Numerous elastic fibrils are met with in the inner layers of the sclerotic. 415. Between the sclerotic and choroid membrane is a loose fibrous tissue, which acts also as the sup- porting tissue for the blcod-vessels passing to and from the choroid. The- part of this loose tissue next to the sclerotic, and forming part, as it were, of the sclerotic, contains, in dark eyes of mammals, numerous pigmented connective tissue corpuscles ; it ig then called lamina fusca. The rest—i.e., next Chap. XXXVI.] L/GAMENTUM PECTINATUM. 296 to the choroid membrane—is the supra-choroidal tissue. : 416. There are blood-vessels in the sclerotic, which - belong to it: they are arterioles, capillaries, and veins ; in addition to these are the vascular branches passing to and from the choroid. 417. III. The ligamentum pectinatum iridis (see Fig. 152) isa conical mass of spongy tissue, joining firmly the cornea and sclerotic to the iris and ciliary processes. It formsan intimate connection, on the one hand, with the junction of cornea and sclerotic, and on the other, with that of the iris and ciliary pro- cesses. This ligament is composed of trabecule and lamellee of stiff elastic fibres, forming a continuity, on the one hand, with the lamina Descemeti of the cornea and the elastic fibres of the sclerotic, and on the other, with the tissue of the ciliary border of the iris. The trabecule anastomose, so as to form a honeycombed ‘plexus, and the spaces in this plexus are lined with a layer of flattened endothelial cells, directly continued from the endothelium of Descemet’s mem- brane, on the one hand, and with the layer of endo- thelial cells covering the anterior surface of the iris, on the other hand. In some mammals, the spaces in the ligamentum pectinatum at the iris end. are very considerable, and are called the spaces of Fontana. The interlamellar- and interfascicular lymph- spaces of the sclerotic form an intercommunicating system. _ The nerves form a dense plexus of non-medullated fibres in the tissue of the sclerotic (Helfreich). At the point of junction of the cornea and sclerotic, but belonging to the latter, and in the immediate neighbourliood of the ligamentum pectinatum iridis, is a circular canal—the canal of Schlemm; this is lied with endothelium, and is considered by some 300 ELEMENTS OF FTISTOLOGY. [(Chap. XXXVII. (Schwalbe) as a lymphatic canal; by others (Leber) as a venous vessel. 418. IV. The ciliary muscle (Fig. 152) or tensor choroidex, is fixed to this ligamentum pecti- natum; it is composed of bundles of non-striped muscular tissue. This muscle consists of two parts: (a) one of circular bundles nearest to the iris—this is the portio Miilleri ; (4) the greater part is composed of radiating bundles, passing from the ligamentuin pectinatum in a meridional direction for a consider- able distance backwards into the tissue of the choroid membrane. It occupies the space between the liga- mentum pectinatum, sclerotic, ciliary processes, and the adjoining portion of the choroid membrane. The bundles of the muscle are arranged more or less in lamelle; within each lamella they form plexuses. ; A rich plexus of non-medullated nerve-fibres, with groups of ganglion cells, belongs to the ciliary muscle. CHAPTER XXXVII. THE IRIS, CILIARY PROCESSES, AND CHOROID. 419, I. Tue iris consists of the following layers :— (1) The endothelium of the anterior surface : trans- parent, flattened, or polyhedral cells, each with a spherical or slightly oval nucleus; in dark-coloured eyes of man and mammals brown pigment granules are contained in the cell-substance. (2) A delicate hyaline basement membrane: it is continuous through the trabecule of the ligamentum pectinatum, with the membrana Descemeti of the cornea. Chap. XXXVII.] THe Iris. 301 (3) The substantia propria: this is the ground- substance ; it consists of fibrous connective tissue in bundles, accompanying the blood-vessels, which are very numerous in the tissue of the nis. Many connective tissue corpuscles are found in the sub- stantia propria ; they are more or less branched, and many of them contain, in all but albino and blue eyes, yellowish-brown pigment granules. The colour of the iris varies according to the number of these pigmented connective tissue cells, and to the amount _of the pigment granules present in them. (4) A hyaline delicate basement membrane limits the substantia propria at the posterior surface ; this is an elastic membrane, and is continued over the ciliary processes and choroid as the lamina vitrea. 420. (5) The last layer is the epithelium of the posterior surface : this is a layer of polyhedral cells, filled with dark pigment granules, except in albinos, where there are no pigment granules. This endo- thelium is called the uvea, or tapetum nigrum. The interstitial cement substance between the cells is not pigmented, but transparent. The name “uvea” is sometimes applied to the whole of the iris, ciliary processes, and choroid mem- brane. In blue eyes the posterior epithelium is the only pigmented part of the iris, and so it is also in the iris of new-born children ; hence, their eyes are blue. Such iris appears blue because its dull tissue is viewed on dark ground—z.e., on the pigmented epithelium of the posterior surface. 421. Near the pupillary border the posterior sec- tion of the substantia propria contains a broad layer of circular bundles of non-striped muscular tissue : this is the sphincter pupille. In connection with this are bundles of non-striped muscular fibres, passing in a radiating direction towards the ciliary margin of the ~ 302 Evements oF HiIsToLocy. (Chap. XXXVIi. iris: these are the bundles of the dilatator pupille, forming a sort of thin membrane near the posterior surface of the iris (Henle and others). Fig. 153. — Blood-vessels Uiniegted) of the Iris Choroid Membrane of the Eye of a Child. a, Capillaries of the choroid; b, ora serrata; c, blood- vessels deriv ed from 4d, those of the ciliary pro- cesses, and from e, those of the iris; 7, capillary net- work of the pupillary bor- der. (Killiker, after Arnold.) At the ciliary margin the bundles take a circular direction, and form a plexus (Ivanoff). 422. The blood-vessels (Fig. 153) of the iris are very numerous. The arteries are derived from the circulus arteriosus iridis major, situated at the ciliary margin of the iris, and from the arteries of the ciliary processes. These arteries run in a radiating direction towards the pupillary margin, where they terminate in a dense network of capillaries for the sphincter pupille. But there are also numerous capil- lary blood-vessels of a more or less longitudinal direction near the posterior surface of the iris. The veins accompany the arte- ries, and both are situated in the middle stratum of the substantia propria. In the sheath of the blood- vessels are lymph clefts and lymph sinuses ; there appear to be no other lymphatics. 423. The merve- fibres are very numerous (Arnold, - Formad), and in the outer or ciliary portion of the iris form a rich plexus, from which are derived, (a) networks of non-medullated fibres for the dilator pupille ; (6) a network of fine. ————~o- = " Ghap. XXXVI Ze Crrrary Process. 303 non-medullated fibres for the anterior surface; and (c) a network of non-medullated fibres for the sphincter pupille. The capillary blood-vessels are also accompanied by fine nerve-fibres (A. Meyer), and, according to Faber, there exist ganglion cells in these nerve net- works. 4924, II. The ciliary processes are similar in structure to the iris, except, of course, that they do not possess an anterior endothelium or an anterior basement membrane. The substantia propria is fibrous tissue with elastic fibres and numerous branched cells, pigmented in dark (but not in blue) eyes. The posterior basement membrane is very thick, and is called the lamina vitrea ; in it may be detected bundles of fine fibrils. It possesses perma- nent folds arranged in a network (H. Miller). The inside of it is covered with a layer of pigmented poly- hedral epithelium, the tapetwm nigrum. the cells are polygonal when viewed from the surface. The in- dividual cells are separated by thin lines of a trans- parent cement substance. This pigmented epithelium is covered with a layer of transparent columnar epitheloid cells, each with an oval nucleus. These are closely fixed on the tapetum nigrum, and represent a continuation of the retina over the ciliary processes : this is the pars ciliaris retine (Fig. 154). 425. The arterial branches for the ciliary processes and muscle are chiefly derived from the circulus arte- riosus iridis major, and form a dense network of capillaries for the former; to each of these corre- ‘sponds a conical group of capillaries (Fig. 153). 426. III. The choroid membrane consists— counting from outwards, 7.¢., from the sclerotic, inwards, z.¢., towards the retina—of the following layers :— (1) The membrana supra-choroidea. This is a continuation of the sclerotic, with which it is identical 304 Evements or Hisrorocy. (Chap. XXXVI. in structure; the spaces between its lamelle are lined with endothelium, and represent lymph spaces (Schwalbe). (2) Next follows an elastic layer which contains networks of elastic fibres, the branches of the arteries Dik CANCUR Fig. 154.—From a Vertical Section’ through the Ciliary Processes of the Ox’s Eye. a, Fibrous tissue with pigmented cells; 5, loose fibrous tissue forming the proper membrane of the ciliary process ; ¢, the pigmented epithelium covering the posterior surface of the ciliary process; @, the epitheloid cells, forming the pars ciliaris retine covering the back of the ciliary processes ; e, Zonula Zinnii, with bundles of fibres. (Atlas.) and veins, and, in its outer portion, pigmented cells (Fig. 155). 427. (3) Then follows the membrana chorio- capillaris, a dense network of capillary blood-vessels embedded in a tissue containing numerous branched Chap. XXXVIIL.J THE Lens. 305 and unbranched pigmented and unpigmented connec- tive-tissue cells. (4) The laniina vitrea ; and, finally, (5) The tapetum nigrum, or the pigmented epithe- _ lium, which, however, is considered part of the retina. In the region of the ora serrata of the retina also—z.e., next to the ciliary processes —this zone of the choroidea is lined with a layer of trans- parent, columnar, epitheloid cells, re- presenting the pars FESS i 3 Baste ee Pegot ne - ig. 155.—Pigmented Connec ciliaris retine. a Cells of the Choroid Coat. (Atlas.) 428. The arteriz ciliares breves and recurrentes, situated in the outer part of the choroidal tissue, form ultimately the dense networks of capillaries for the chorio-capillaries. The veins derived from this pass into the outer part of the choroid, where they anastomose so as to form the peculiar large veins, which are called the vene vorticose. CHAPTER XXXVIII. THE LENS AND VITREOUS BODY, 429. (1) Tue lems consists of a thick, firm, elastic capsule and of the lens substance. ‘The former shows ’ fine longitudinal striz, and diminishes in thickness towards the posterior pole of the lens. The surface of the capsule facing the anterior surface of the lens! substance is lined with a single layer of polyhedral, granular-looking, epithelial cells, each with a spherical or oval nucleus. This epithelium stops as such at the u—1 306 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XXXVIT1. margin of the lens, where its cells, gradually elonga- ting, pass into the lens-fibres. The nuclei of these lie in a curved plane belonging to the anterior half of the lens : this is the nuclear zone. The lens-substance consists of the lens-fibres. These are band-like, hexa- gonal in transverse section ; their outline is heset with numerous fine ridges and furrows, which in neighbouring fibres, fitting the one into the other, form a firm connection between the fibres (Valentin, Henle, Kolliker, and others). The fibres of the peripheral portion are broader and thicker, and their substance less firm than those of the centre—i.e., of the lens-nucleus. The substance of the lens-fibres is - finely granular and delicately and longitudinally striated. 430. The lens = (Eig 156) are arranged in i a single layer of by their broad h fibre is slightly the extremities ; h lamella the fibres m the anterior to the r surface. ‘Their ex- same lamella in the sutwres, or the rays of the so-called lens Fig. 156.—From.a Section stars. In the lens of the new- throngh the Lens of born child, the stars of both og : ‘ anterior and posterior lamelle “onch, qbe component tens: ‘ fibres Ke cut across; they Possess three such rays, while appear as, flattened hexa- in the adult each of these rays has secondary rays. In these rays there is a homogeneous thin layer of an albu- minous cement substance ; a similar substance in minute quantity is also present between the lamelle, aud in it occur smaller or larger clefts and channels, Chas XXXVIIL] ZHz Virreovs Bony. 307 ‘wligcls evidently carry the nutritious fluid for the lens- fibres. 431. (2) The vitreous body isa fluid substance enclosed in a delicate hyaline capsule—the membrana hyaloidea. This membrane, at the margin of the fossa patellaris of the vitreous body—.e., the fossa in which the lens is lodged—but without covering it, passes as the zonula ciliaris, or zonula Zinnii, or suspensory ligament of the lens, to the margin of the latter, to which it is firmly adhering. So it adheres also to the surface of the ciliary processes. The zonula Zinnii is hyaline and firm, and is strengthened by numbers of bundles of minute stiff fibrils. Between the suspensory ligament of the lens, the margin of the lens and of the fossa patellaris is a circular lymph space, called the canalis Petiti. Beneath the membrana hyaloidea are found iso- lated nucleated granular-looking cells (the subhyaloid cells of Ciaccio), possessed of amceboid movement (Ivanoff). 432. The substance of the corpus vitreum appears differentiated by clefts, concentric in the peripheral, radiating in the central, part (Briicke, Hannover, Bowman, Ivanoff, Schwalbe). But these do not contain any distinct membranous structures (Stilling, Ivanoff, Schwalbe). The canalis hyaloideus, or canal of Stilling, extends from the papilla nervi optici to the posterior capsule of the lens, and is lined with a continuation of the membrana, hyaloidea. 433. In the substance of the corpus vitreum occur isolated nucleated cells; they have ameboid move- ments, and some contain vacuoles, from commencing degeneration. They are all identical with white blood-corpuscles (Lieberkiihn, Schwalbe). Fine bundles of fibrils are occasionally seen in the + substance of the vitreous body. 2 — 308 [Chap. XXXIX, CHAPTER XXXIX. THE RETINA. 434, Tux retina (Fig. 157) consists of the following layers, counting from inwards towards the choroid mem- i — ‘Fig. 157.—From a Transverse Section ugh the Eye of Sheep; Peripheral Portion of Retina. a, The inner part of the sclerotic 4, the supra- choroidal (pigmented) lamelle ; +, d, the layers of the choroid coat; e, the pigmented epithe- lium of the retina; /, the layer of rods: g, the cones; h, the layer of outer nuclei ; i, the outer molecular layer; j, the layer of inner nuclei; k, the inner molecular layer ; 7, the layer ganglion cells, with the ial or Muller's oprce pEHeDCS 3 m, the layer of nerve-fibres. as. brane: — (1)- The membrana limitans interna, which is next to the mem- brana hyaloidea of the vitreous body ; (2) the nerve-fibre layer; (3) the layer of ganglion cells; (4) the inner gran- ular or inner mole- cular layer; (5) the layer of inner nuclei; (6) the outer granular, or outer molecular, or internuclear layer ; (7) the layer of outer nuclei; (8) the membrana limitans externa ; (9) the layer of rods and cones; and (10) the pig- mented epithelium of the retina, or the tapetum nigrum mentioned above, which forms, at the same time, the inner lining epithe: lium of the choroid membrane, Chap. XXXIX.] THe RETINA. = 309 435. From this arrangement is excepted—(a) the papilla nervi optici, (6) the macula lutea and fovea centralis retin, and (c) the ora serrata of the retina. (a) The papilla nervi optici, or the blind spot of ha | z f Ae 1 pCO 00 Oe 5 Fig. 158.—Diagram of the Ner- Fig. 159.—Diagram of the Connective vous Elements of the Retina. Tissue Substance of the same. 2, Nerve-fibres ; 3, ganglion cells; 4, inner molecular layer; 5, inner nuclear layer; 6, outer molecular layer; 7, outer nuclear layer: 8, the membrana limitans externa; 9, the rods and cones, (Max Schultze.) the retina, represents the entrance of the optic nerve- fibres into the retina; thence, as from a centre, they spread out in a radiating direction into the saucer-shaped retina, of which they form the internal 310. ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXXIX. layer.. No other elements of the retina are present at the papilla, except a continuation of the limitans interna. At the papilla nervi optici the arteria and vena centralis nervi optici also enter, and spread out with their branches in the inner layers of the retina. A large lymph space is also found there. (6) The macula lutea and fovea centralis will be considered after the various layers of the retina have been described. (c) At the ora serrata all cellular and nuclear elements of the retina—except the pigmented epithe- lium—and the nerve-fibres, come to an end; but the limitans interna, with its peculiar radial or Miiller’s fibres, is continued over the ciliary processes in the shape of columnar epitheloid nucleated cells men- tioned above : this is the pars ciliaris retine. 436. Structure of the layers of the retina (Figs. 158, 159). (1) The membrana limitans interna is composed of more or less polygonal areas, which are the ends or bases of pyramidal, finely-striated fibres —the radial fibres of Miiller. Each radial fibre passes from the limitans interna in a vertical direction through all layers to the limitans externa, and on its way gives off numerous lateral branchlets, fibrils, and membranes, which anastomose with one another so as to form a honeycombed stroma or matrix for all cellular and nuclear elements of the retinal layers. In the nerve-fibre layer the radial fibres are thickest, this being, in fact, the pyramidal basis ; in the inner nuclear layer each possesses an oval nucleus. 437. (2) The layer of nerve-fibres.—The optic nerve-fibres at their entrance into the eyeball lose their medullary sheath, and only the transparent axis cylinder is prolonged into the retina. In man, medullated nerve-fibres in the retina are very excep- tional ; in the rabbit there are two bundles, whose Chap. XXXIX.] . TwHeE RETINA. 311 fibres retain their medullary sheath in the retina (Bowman). . The nerve-fibres remain grouped in bundles in the retina, and even form plexuses. For obvious reasons, the number of nerve-fibres in the nerve-fibre layer diminishes towards the ora serrata. 438, (3) The layer of ganglion cells.—There is one stratum of these cells only, except in the macula lutea, where they form several strata. Each cell is multipolar, and possessed of a large nucleus. One process is directed inwards and becomes con- nected with a fibre of the nerve-fibre layer. . Several processes pass from the opposite side of the cell, and enter the next outer layer, z.¢., the inner molecular layer. According to Max Schultze and others, they break up there into a reticulum of fibrils which is part of this molecular layer ; but according to Retzius, Mans, and Schwalbe, they simply pass through the inner molecular layer. The ganglion cells are separated from one another by the radial fibres of Miiller. 439. (4) The immer molecular layer is a fine and dense reticulum of fibrils, with a small amount of granular matter between: The fibrils are connected with lateral branchlets of the radial fibres of Miiller. This layer is, on account of its thickness, a conspicuous part of the retina. In lower vertebrae it appears stratified. 440. (5) The immer nuclear layer contains in a honeycombed matrix of a hyaline stroma numerous nuclei, in two, three, or four layers. In the am- phibian retina these form a larger number of layers. Some oblong nuclei of this layer belong, as has been mentioned above, to the radial fibres of Miiller. Next to the molecular layer are small nuclei belonging to flattened branched cells (Vintschgau). But the great majority of the nuclei of this layer are slightly 312 Erements of HistToLocy. (Chap. XXXIX. oval, with a reticulum in their interior.. Each belongs to a spindle-shaped cell, with a small amount of proto- plasm around the nucleus ; it is, in fact, a bipolar gang- lion cell (Max Schultze), of which one process (the inner) passes as a fine varicose fibre into and through the inner molecular layer, to become connected with the outer processes of the ganglion cells (Retzius, Schwalbe), while the other or outer process passes into and through the next outer layer of the retina. (6) The outer molecular layer is of exactly the same structure as the inner molecular layer—+e., a fine reticulum of fibrils—but is considerably thinner than the latter. 441, (7) Whe outer nuclear layer contains, in a honeycombed matrix, a large number of oval nuclei. In the retina of man and mammals these nuclei are always present in considerably greater numbers or layers than those of the inner nuclear layer, but in the amphibian animals the reverse is the case. They are smaller than the nuclei of the inner nuclear layer, and show often a peculiar transversely-ribbed differ- entiation of their contents (Henle, Krause). The honeycombed matrix of this layer is in connection with lateral branchlets of the radial fibres of Miiller, with which it forms a sort of limiting delicate mem- brana propria at the outer surface of the layer ; this is 442, (8) The limitans externa.—The nuclei of the outer nuclear layer next to this limitans externa are connected, in the retina of man and mammals, with the cones, while the nuclei farther inwards from the limitans externa are connected with the rods. In both instances the connection is established through holes in the limitans externa. Each nucleus of the outer nuclear layer is, in reality, that of a spindle-shaped cell with a minute amount of proto- plasm ; this is prolonged outwards, as the outer part Chap. XXXIX.] - LHe REerina: 313 of the rod- or cone-fibre, to become connected with a rod or cone respectively, while inwards it passes into a longer, more conspicuous fibre, the inner part of the ‘rod- or cone-fibre. This branches, and penetrating into the outer molecular layer, is lost with its branchlets among the fibrils of this layer. 443,-(9) The rods and cones.— Each rod is of cylindrical shape, with rounded or conical outer extremity ; it consists of an outer and inner member, joined by linear cement. Its substance is bright and glistening, and that of the outer member is composed of the neurokeratin of Kiihne and Ewald. In the fresh state the outer member shows a more or less fine and longitudinal striation, due to longitudinal fine ridges and furrows (Hensen, Max Schultze). After certain reagents, such as serum, liquor potasse, the outer rod-member disintegrates into numerous transverse, thin, homogeneous-looking dises( Hannover). The inner member in the human rods is slightly broader than the outer ; it is pale or finely and longi- tudinally striated, and contains in many instances a peculiar lenticular structure; in the human and mammalian retina this is absent, but in its stead is a mass of longitudinal fibrils (Max Schultze). The inner member passes through a hole in the limitans externa, and becoming thinner, represents the outer part of the rod-fibre. _ 444, Each cone is composed of an outer, short, pointed, conical member, and an inner larger member with convex surface: this is the body of the cone. _ The outer member of the cone separates under certain conditions also into thin transverse discs. The body of the cone is longitudinally and finely striated. The outer extremity of the body of the cones in many birds, reptiles, and amphibia contains a spheri- cal corpuscle of red, orange, yellow, green, or even blue colouration. 314 ELEMENTS oF HisToLocy. [Chap. XXXIX. The cones are shorter than the rods, the pointed Fig. 160.—Verfical Section through the Frog’s Retina. cones between them;c, the inner members of the rods fibres are well shown. (Atlas.) end of ‘the former not reaching much farther than the junction between the outer and inner members of the rods. In the macula lutea and fovea centralis of man and most mammals there are pre- sent cones only, and towards the peripheral portion of the retina they gradually de- crease in numbers; in the peripheral part there are only rods. But in birds the cones exceed the rods everywhere. In the bat and mole the macula lutea possesses no cones, and in the owl, rat, mouse, guinea-pig, and rabbit, they are few and small. 445. The outer members of the rods (only) contain in the fresh and living state a peculiar diffuse purplish colour (Leydig, Boll, Kiihne): this is the visual purple or Rhod- opsin of Kithne. When exposed to sunlight it passes through red, orange, and yellow, and finally. disappears altogether — be- comes bleached. There is no visual purple in the rods of Rhinolophus hipposideros, fowl and pigeon; in those retine in which the cones contain coloured globules (see Chap. XXXIX.] THE RETINA. 315 above) the surrounding rods are wanting in the visual purple. The visual purple stands in an intimate relation to the pigmented epithelium of the retima, since a retina regains its visual purple after bleaching, when replaced on the pigmented epithelium (Kihnej. This holds good, of course, only within certain limits. 446. (10) The pigmented epithelium (Fig. 160), or tapetum nigrum, is composed of polygonal pre- toplasmic cells, which, when viewed from the surface, appear as a mosaic, in which they are separated from one another by a thin layer of cement substance. Each -cell shows an outer non-pigmented part, containing the slightly-flattened oval nucleus, and an inner part next to the rods and cones, which is full of pigmented crystalline rods (Frisch). This part is prolonged into yumerous fine fibrils, each containing a row of the pigmented particles, and these fibrils pass between the outer members of the rods, to which they closely adhere, and which in reality become almost entirely ensheathed in them (M. Schultze). Each cell supplies a number of rods with these fibrils. Sunlight causes a protru- sion of these fibrils from the cell body, whereas in the dark they are retracted (Kiihne), in a manner similar to what takes place in pigmented connective tissue cells. (See par. 43.) The tint of this pigment is darker in dark than in light eyes. It is bleached by the light in the presence of oxygen (Kiihne), but it persists in the absence of oxygen (Mays). 447, The macula lutea (Fig. 161) of man and ape contains a diffuse yellow pigment, between the ele- ments of the retina (M. Schultze). In mah and most mammals, as mentioned above, there are hardly any rods here, but cones only; these are longer than in other parts, and in the fovea centralis they are longest, and, at the same time, very thin. Since there are few rods here, the nuclei of the outer nuclear — 316 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XXXIX, layer are limited to a very few layers (generally about two) next to the membrana limitans externa. For this reason, the rest of the outer nuclear layer is occupied by the cone-fibres only, which in the fovea centralis pass in a slanting, or almost horizontal, } ary vale TE Hel Tig wS ————— Fig. 161.—From a Vertical Section through the Macula Lutea and ? Fovea Centralis. a, Nerve-fibres; 6, ganglion cells; c, inner molecular layer; d, inner nuclei; e, outer molecular layer ; 7, cone-fibres ; g, cones. (Diagram by Max Schultze.) direction sideways into the outer molecular layer. The ganglion cells form several strata in the macula lutea. In the fovea centralis are present the cones (very long and thin), the limitans externa, the few - nuclei representing the outer nuclear layer, a thin continuation of the inner molecular layer, and the limitans interna. 448, In the embryo, the primary optic vesicle becomes invaginated so as to form the optic cup, which consists of two layers—an outer, giving origin to the pigmented epithelium ; and an inner, the retina Chap. XXXIX.] THE RETINA. 317 proper. In this the rods and cones, with their fibres and the nuclei of the outer nuclear layer, corre- spond to columnar epithelial cells (the sensory epithe- lium), while all the other layers—+.e., the outer mole- cular, inner nuclear, inner molecular layer, ganglion cells, nerve-fibres, and limitans interna—represent Briicke’s tunica nervea or Henle’s stratum nerveum. 449, The blood-vessels of the retina. The branches of the arteria and vena centralis of the optic nerve can be traced into the retina in the layer of nerve-fibres and ganglion-cells, while the capillaries connecting the arteries with the veins extend through the layers up to the outer molecular layer. The lymphaties of the retina exist as perivascular lymphatics of the retinal veins and capillaries (His). Lymph channels are present in the nerve-fibre layer. 450. The lamina cribrosa is the part of the sclerotic and choroid membrane through which the optic nerve-fibres have to pass in order to reach the papilla nervi optici. In the optic nerve the fibres are grouped in larger or smaller groups—not bundles, in the sense of those present in other nerves and surrounded by perineurium (see a former chapter)—but surrounded by septa of connective tissue, and these groups pass through corresponding holes of the sclerotic and choroid. 451. The optie merve possesses three sheaths, composed of fibrous connective tissue—(a#) an outer, or the dural; (6) a middle, or arachnoidal ; and (ce) an inner, or pial, sheath—which are continuations of the respective membranes of the brain. The pial sheath is, in reality, the perineurium, the whole optic nerve being comparable to a compound nerve-bundle as de- scribed in a former chapter. The dural sheath of the optic nerve, at its entrance into the lamina cribrosa, passes into the outer strata of the sclerotic, while the arachnoidal and pial sheaths pass into the inner strata of the sclerotic. Outside the dural sheath is a lymph 318 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. [Chap. XL. space—the supravaginal space ; and also between these various sheaths are lymph spaces—the subdural or subvaginal space of Schwalbe, and the subarachnoidal space, ‘The supravaginal and subvaginal spaces anas- tomose with one another (Michel). 452. Around the sclerotic is a lymph space limited by a fibrous membrane—the TZenonian capsule: the space is called the Zenonian space. The supravaginal space anastomoses with this Tenonian space, and into * it pass also the lymph clefts in the suprachoroidal tissue (Schwalbe), by means of the lymph canalicular system of the sclerotic (Waldeyer). The supracho- roidal lymph spaces communicate also with the sub- arachnoidal space of the optic nerve. CHAPTER XL. THE OUTER AND MIDDLE EAR. 453. Tue meatus auditorius externus is lined with a delicate skin, in structure identical with, but thinner than, the skin of other parts. The ceruminous glands have been mentioned and described before. The cartilage of the auricula and its continuation into the meatus auditorius externus is elastic, cartilage. 454. The membrana tympani separating the outer from the middle ear has for its matrix a firm stratum of stiff trabecule of fibrous connective tissue, with numerous elastic fibrils and elastic membranes. This is the middle and chief stratum of the membrane : outwards it is covered with a delicate continuation of the skin of the meatus auditorius externus, and inwards with a continuation of the delicate mucous membrane lining the cavum tympani. In the middle stratum of. the membrana tympani the trabecule radiate more or less from the junction of the manubrium mallei with the membrane ; but towards the periphery many are Chap. XL.) Zaz OuTER AND MipDLeE Ear. 319 also arranged in a circular direction. The former belong to the outer, the latter to the inner, portion of the middle stratum. — The mucous membrane lining the tympanic surface of the membrane is delicate connective tissue, covered with a single layer of polyhedral epithelial cells. The blood-vessels form capillary networks for all three layers—i.e., a special network for the skin layer, a second for the middle stratum, and a third one for the mucous layer; the lymphatics are also arranged in this way. An intercommunicating system of lym- phatic sinuses and clefts (Kessel) is left between the trabecule. The non-medullated nerve-fibres form plexuses for the skin and mucous layer; from these pass off fine fibrils, which form a sub-epithelial net- work, and from this the fibrils pass into the epithelium. 455, The tuba Eustachii is lined with a mucous membrane, which is a continuation of that lining the upper part of the pharynx, and therefore, like it, is covered on its inner or free surface with columnar ciliated epithelium. As in the pharynx, so also here, we find a good deal of adenoid tissue in the mucous membrane, The cartilage of the tuba Eustachii in the adult ap- proaches in structure the elastic cartilages of other parts. 456. The cavum tympani, including the cellule mastoidez and the surface of the ossicula auditus, is lined with a delicate connective tissue membrane. Its free surface is covered with a single layer of poly- hedral epithelial cells in the following regions: on the promontory of the inner wall of the cavity, on the -ossicula auditus, on the roof of the cavity, and in the cellule mastoidez; in all other parts it is columnar cili- ated epithelium, like that lining the tuba Eustachii. 457. The three ossicula auditus are osseous ‘substance covered with periosteum, which is covered with the delicate mucosa just described, The liga- 320 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. {Chap. XLI. ments of the bones are, like other ligaments, made up of straight and parallel bundles of fibrous connective tissue. The articulation surface of the head of the malleus, of the incus, of the extremity of the long process of the incus, and of the stapes, are covered with hyaline (articular) cartilage. CHAPTER XLI. THE INTERNAL EAR, 458. Tue osseous labyrinth consists of the vesti- bule, prolonged on one side into the cochlea, and on the other into the three semicircular canals, each of which possesses an ampulla at one extremity. The vestibule shows two divisions—the fovea hemispherica next to the cochlea, and the fovea hemielliptica next to the semicircular canals. The cochlea consists of two and half turnings twisted round a bony axis—the modiolus. From this a bony lamina extends towards the outer wall for each turn, but does not reach it: this is the lamina spiralis ossea. It extends through all turns, and it subdivides the cavity of each turn into an upper passage, or scala vestibuli, and a lower, or scala tympani. At the top of the cochlea the two scalee pass into one another by the helicotrema. The scala vestibuli opens into the fovea hemispherica, while the scala tympani at its commencement—i.¢., at the proximal end of the first turn—would be in communication, by the fenestra rotunda, with the cavum tympani, were it not that this fenestra rotunda is closed by a membrane—the secondary membrane. 459. The semicircular canals start from, and return to, the fovea hemielliptica of the vestibule. The fenestra ovalis leads from the cavum tympani into the vestibule—its hemispheric division ; and this Chap. XL] THE INTERNAL EAR. 321 _ fenestra ovalis is, in the fresh condition, filled out by a membrane, in which the basis of the stapes is fixed, the circumference of this being nearly as great as that of the fenestra. — 460. The osseous labyrinth in all parts consists of ordinary osseous substance, with the usual periosteum lining its outer surface and its inner cavities. These cavities contain the albuminous fluid called perilymph. But they are not filled out by this, since, in each of the two divisions of the vestibule, in each of the semicircular canals, and in the cochlea, is a mem- branous structure, analogous in shape to the corre- sponding division of the labyrinth. These membranous structures possess a cavity filled with the same albu- minous fluid as above, called the endolymph. These structures are disposed thus—in the fovea hemispherica is a spherical sac, called the saccule; in the fovea hemielliptica is an elliptical sac, the wtricle; in each of the three semicircular canals is a membranous semi- circular tube, which possesses also an ampulla corre- sponding to the ampulla of the bony canal. 461. In the cochlea is a membranous canal, tri- angular in cross-section—the scala media or cochlear duct—which also twists two and half times from the basis to the apex.of the cochlea, and is placed against the end of the lamina spiralis ossea so as to occupy a position between the peripheral part of the scala vesti- buli and scala tympani. 462, The different divisions of the membranous labyrinth are connected with one another in this manner: the three semicircular (membranous) canals - open into the utricle ; this does not form a direct con- tinuity with the saccule, but a narrow canal comes off both from the saccule and utricle; the two canals join into one minute membranous tube situated in the aqueductus vestibuli. At its distal end it enlarges into the saccus endolymphaticus, situated in a cleft of yv—l 322 ELremenrs or HisToLocy. — [Chap. XL. the dura mater, covering the posterior surface of the petrous bone. The saccule is in communication with the cochlear canal or scala media, by a short narrow tube—the canalis reuniens of Reichert. Thus the vavity of the whole membranous labyrinth is in direct communication throughout all divisions, and it represents the inner lymphatic space of the labyrinth. There is no communication between the perilymph and endolymph, and the cavity of the membranous labyrinth stands in no diréct relation to the cavum tympani, since the fenestra ovalis and fenestra rotunda both separate the perilymphatic space, or the cavity of the bony labyrinth, from the cavum tympani. The vibrations of the membrana tympani, transferred by the ossicula auditus to the fenestra ovalis, directly affect, therefore, only the perilymph. The fluctuations of this pass from the vestibule, on the one side, towards and into the perilymph of the semicircular canals; and on the other side, through the scala vestibuli, to the top of the cochlea, then by the heli- cotrema into the scala tympani, and find their conclu- sion on the membrana secundaria closing the fenestra rotunda. On their way they affect, of course, the membrane of Reissner (see below) separating the scala . media from the scala vestibuli; and the vibrations of . this membrane naturally affect the endolymph of the scala media and the terminations of the auditory nerve-fibres (see below). 463. Structure of Semicircular canals, utricle and saccule.—The membranous semi- circular canals are fixed by stiff bands of fibrous tissue to the inner periosteum of the one (convex) side of the osseous canal, so that towards the concave side there is left the space for the perilymph. A similar condition obtains with regard to the saccule and utricle, which are fixed by the inner periosteum to one side of the bony part. —" - ae | Chap. XLI.] THE INTERNAL EAR. 323 The structure of the wall is the same in the semi- circular canals, utricle and saccule. The above-men- tioned fibrous ligaments of the periosteum form an outer coat; inside this is a glassy-looking twnica propria. At one side (the one away from the bone) ° this tunica propria forms numerous papillary projec- tions. The internal surface of the mem- brane is covered with a single layer of poly- hedral epithelial cells. 464, Each of the ‘branches of the nervus vestibuli—z.e., one for the saccule, one for the utricle, and three for the three ampulle— possesses a ganglionic swelling. The nerve- branch, having passed through the membra- nous wall, enters special thickenings of the tunica propria, on Fig. 162.—From a Transverse Section through the Macula Acustica of the that part of the mem- branous wall next to the bone; in the sac- cule and utricle the thickening is called macula acustica, in the Utricle of the Labyrinth of a Guinea- pig. a, Medullated nerve fibres, forming plex- uses; 6, nuclei of the membrane; ec, the sensory epithelium (diagrammati€) ; the gpindlesheped sensory-cells possess long auditory hairs projecting between the conical epithelial cells beyond the free surface. (Atlas.) : ampulle crista acustica (Fig. 162) (M. Schultze). This thickening is a large villous or fold-like projection of the tunica propria, into which pass the nerve-fibres of the several branches. These fibres are all medullated nerve- fibres, and, ascending towards the internal or free surface of that projection, form a plexus. In 324 ELEMENTS OF HisTOLOGY. (Chap. X11. this plexus are interspersed numerous nuclei. From the medullated fibres pass off minute bundles of primitive fibrille, which enter the epithelium that covers the free surface of the projection. 465. This epithelium is composed of a layer of columnar or conical cells, between which are wedged in spindle-shaped cells; both kinds possess an oval nucleus. According to Max Schultze and others, each of the spindle-shaped cells is connected by its inner process with the nerve-fibrille coming from under- neath ; whereas, towards and beyond the free surface, its outer process is prolonged into a long, thin, stiff, auditory hair. Max Schultze, therefore, calls the columnar cells epithelial; the spindle-shaped ones, sensory. Retzius, on the other hand, maintains that, in the case of fishes at any rate, the epithelial cells are those which are connected each with a bundle of nerve- tibrille, and that each sends out over the internal free surface a bundle of fine stiff hairs—the auditory hairs. The spindle-shaped cells of Max Schultze, according to this theory, are only supporting cells. The free surface of the epithelium is covered with a homo- geneous cuticle, perforated by holes which correspond to the epithelial cells and the auditory hairs. On the internal surface of the macula and crista acustica are found the ofoliths, rhombic crystals, and amorphous masses, chiefly of carbonate of lime, em- bedded ina gelatinous or granular-looking basis. 466. The cochlea (Fig. 1€3), as has been men- tioned above, consists also of a bony shell and a membranous canal, the former surrounding the latter in the same way as the bony semicircular canal does the membranous—.¢., the latter is fixed to the outer or convex side of the former. The difference between the cochlea and the semicircular canals is this, that in the cochlea there is a division of the perilymphatie Chap. XLI.] Fig. 163.—From a Vertical Section through the Cochlea of a Guinea- pig’s Ear, seen in the long axis of the Modiolus. a, The seala vestibuli ; 4, the scala tympani; c, the scala media; d, the membrana tectoria ; e, the cells of Claudius; /, the u ] per outer angle of the scala media; , the region of the outer hair cells on the membrana basilaris ; kh, the mem- rane of Reissner; i, the epithelium lining the sulcus spiralis (internus) ;7, the tunnel of Corti’s arch; k, the stria vascularis; J, the ligamentum spirale; m, the crista spiralis; n, the nerve-fibres in the lamina spiralis ossea ; o, the ganglion spirale ; p, the nerve-fibres in the modiolus ; g, channels in hone con- eres blood-yessels ; 7, masses of bone in the modiolus ; s, the bony capsule. 326° Evemenrs or HisrotoGy. — (Chap. Xu. space by an osseous projection—the lamina spiralis ossea—and by the scala media into two scale, viz., the (upper) scala vestibuli, and the (lower) scala tympani. 467. In the osseous modiolus are numerous paral- lel canals for bundles or groups of the fibres of the cochlear branch of the auditory nerve ; these canals open into the porus internus, in which lies a large ganglion connected with the nerve. The nerve bundles situated in the canals of the . modiolus, corresponding to the lamina spiralis ossea, are connected with ganglionic masses—composed of bipolar ganglion cells—called the ganglion spirale of Corti. From this ganglionic mass the nerve-fibres (all medullated) can be traced into the lamina spiralis ossea, in which they form rich plexuses extending to the margin of this lamina—z.e., to the membrana basilaris of the scala media (see below). 468. From the margin of the lamina spiralis ossea to the external bony shell extends the membrana basi- laris (Fig. 163), forming the lower and chief wall of the scala media, while the upper wall of the canal is formed by the membrane of Reissner, extending under an acute angle from near the margin of the lamina spiralis ossea to the outer bony shell. On a transverse section through the scala media we see the following structures :— 469. (1) Its outer wall is placed close against the periosteum lining the internal surface of the bony shell; it consists of lamellar fibrous tissue, with numerous stiff elastic bands, and is the vestibular part of a peculiar ligament—the hgamentum spirale (Kélliker)—semi-lunar in cross section, and with its middle angular projection fixed to the outer end of the membrana basilaris. 470, (2) Its immer wall is represented by an exceedingly delicate membrane—the membrane of Reissner ; this is also its upper wall, extending under Chap. XLI.] THE Inrernat EAr. 327 an acute angle from the upper outer angle of the scala media to the lamina spiralis ossea. But there it is not fixed on the osseous substance, but on a peculiar pro- - jection on this latter—the crista spiralis (Fig. 163, m), which is a sort of tissue intermediate between fibrous and osseous tissue, and added to the vestibular surface of the lamina spiralis ossea. This crista spiralis has on its inner surface—z.e., that directed towards the scala media—a deep sulcus, called the swlews spiralis, or sulcus spiralis internus; so that of the crista-spiralis there are two labia to be distinguished—the labium vestibulare and the labium tympanicum; the former being the upper, the latter the lower, boundary of the sulcus spiralis. 471. (3) Between the labium tympanicum of the crista spiralis and the above-mentioned projection of the» ligamentum spirale extends, in a straight direction, the membrana basilaris, forming the lower wall of the scala media. The scala media is lined on its whole internal surface with epithelium, this only being derived from the epithelium forming the wall of the auditory vesicle of the embryo, peculiarly modified in certain places. The scala tympani and scala vesti- buli are likewise lined with a continuous layer of flattened cells—an endothelium, which only on the lower (tympanic) surface of the membrana basilaris is somewhat modified, being composed of granular looking irregular cells. 472. As regards the scala media, the epithelium lining its internal surface is of the folllowing aspect : . Starting with the lower outer angle—i.e., where the membrana basilaris is fixed to the ligamentum pirale—we find it a single layer of polyhedral or short’ columnar transparent cells, lining this outer angle—the cells of Claudius ; ascending | on the liga- mentum spirale, the cells become shorter, more squa- mous ;~such are found over a slight projection on 328 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XL. the outer wall—z.e., the ligamentum spirale accesso- rium—caused by a small blood-vessel, the vas pro- minens. 473. Then we come to the stria vascularis, lining nearly the upper two-thirds of the outer wall of the scala media. It consists of a layer of columnar and spindle-shaped epithelial cells, between which extend capillary blood-vessels from the ligamen- tum spirale, and in some animals (guinea-pig) clumps of pigment granules are found between them. 474. Then we pass from the upper angle of the scala on to the membrane of Reissner. This consists of a homogeneous thin membrana propria, covered on its outer vestibular surface with a layer of flattened endothelium, and on its inner surface—i.ec., that facing the scala media—with a layer of less flattened, smaller, polyhedral, epithelial cells. 475. We come next to the vestibular labium of the crista spiralis, on which peculiar cylindrical horizontal projections anastomose with one another : these are the auditory teeth (Huschke). The epi- thelium of Reissner’s membrane is continued as small polyhedral cells into the grooves and pits between the auditory teeth, but over the teeth as large, flattened, squamous cells, which pass on, lining the suleus spiralis, and, as such, cover also the tympanic labium of the crista spiralis. Now we arrive at the mem- brana_ basilaris, on which the epithelium becomes modified into the organ of Corti. 476. The membrana basilaris consists of a hyaline basement membrane, on which the organ of Corti is fixed ; underneath this is the tunica propria, a continuation of the tissue of the ligamentum spirale, composed of fine parallel stiff fibrils (Hannover, Henle) stretched in a very regular and beautiful manner in the direction from the ligamentum spirale to the crista spiralis (Nuel). On the tympanic side Chap. XLI.] THE INTERNAL EAR. 329 there is also a hyaline basement membrane. The endothelial cells covering this on the tympanic surface have been mentioned above. 477. The organ of Corti (Fig. 164).—Passing outwards from the epithelium lining the sulcus spiralis, we meet with small polyhedral epithelial cells in the region of the termination of the lamina spiralis ossea, next which are columnar-looking cells—the «ier supporting cells ; next to these is the inner hawr-cell— Fig. 164,—Organ of Corti of the Cochlea of a Guinea-pig. a, — red or pillar of Corti ; 4, inner rod or pillar of Corti; c, tunnel of Corti’s rch; d, outer hair-cells ; é inner hair-cell ; t outer supporting cells contain- ne fat globules; g, inner supporting cells: , cells of epee © é, epithelial cells quning. fhe, sulcus spiralis internus; /, Werveainees ; , part of crista spiralis a columnar, or conical, epithelial cell, with a bundle of stiff hairs, or rods, extending beyond the surface. The inner hair-cells form a single file along the whole extent of the two and a half turns of the scala media. 478. Next to the inner hair-cell is the inner rod, or inner pillar; of Corti, and next to this the outer rod, or outer pillar, of Corti. Each forms a single file for the whole extent of the two and a half turns of the scala media. The two rods are inclined towards one another, and in contact with their upper extremity, or head ; whereas their opposite extremity, the foot, rests under an acute angle on the membrana basilaris, on which it is firmly fixed. The rest of the rod isa slender, more or less cylindrical, piece—the body. The 330 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY, (Chap. X11. outer rod is larger and longer than the inner, the latter being slightly bent in the middle. Owing to the position of the rods, the two files form an arch— the arch of Corti. Between it and the corresponding part of the basilar membrane is a space—the twnnel of the arch, triangular in cross section. 479. The substance of the rods, or pillars, of Corti is bright, -highly refractive, and slightly and longitu- dinally striated. The head of the inner rod is triangular, a short process extending inwards towards the inner hair-cell, a long process extending outwards over the head of the outer pillar. Outwards, the triangular head pos- sesses a concave surface grasping the convex surface of the head of the outer rod. This latter possesses a process directed outwards, and firmly applied to the outer process of the head of the inner rod, the two together forming part of the membrana reticularis -(see below). . The relation between the outer and inner rods is such that the head of one outer rod fits into those of about two inner rods. . 480. At the foot, each rod has, on the side directed towards the tunnel, a granular, nucleated, lump of protoplasm, probably the remnant of the epithelial cell from which the lower half of the rod is derived ; the upper part sometimes possesses a similar remnant, proving that this also has been formed by an epithelial cell, so that each rod is in reality derived from two epithelial cells (Waldeyer). 481. Next follow three or four rows of outer hair- cells, similar in size and structure to the inner hair- cells, Each of the outer hair-cells represents a file of hair-cells, extending on the membrana _basilaris along the whole extent—i.e., two and a-half turns— of the scala media. Each hair-cell possesses an oval nucleus and a number of stiff rods, or hairs, disposed —— SS ee —— Chap. XUI.] THE INTERNAL EAR. 331 in the shape of a horseshoe in the outer part of the free surface of the cell. Four, and even five, rows of hair-cells (Waldeyer), arranged in an alternating manner, are found in man. The outer hair-cells are also called the cells of Corti; they are conical, and more or less firmly con- nected with a nucleated spindle-shaped cell—the cell of Deiters. The two cells are more or less fused together in their middle part (Nuel). The cell of Corti is fixed by a branched process to the membrana basilaris, while the cell of Deiters sends a process towards the surface, where it joins the membrana reticularis (see below). 482. Farther outwards from the last row of outer hair-cells are columnar epithelial cells, called the outer supporting cells of Hensen ; they form the transition to the epithelium lining the outer angle of the scala media, 2.¢., to the cells of Claudius. In the guinea-pig, the outer supporting ceiis in- clude fat globules. 483. The medullated nerve-fibres, which we traced in a former page to the margin of the lamina spiralis ossea, make rich plexuses ‘in this, and pass through holes in it, in order to reach the organ of Corti on the membrana basilaris. Looking from the surface on this part, we notice a row of holes—the habenula perforata of Kolliker—a little to the inside of the region of the inner hair-cells, Numerous primitive fibrille pass there among small nucleated . cells situated underneath the inner hair-cells: these are the granular cells. Some of these nerve-fibrille —the inner bundle of spiral nerve-fibres—become con- nected with the inner hair-cells; while others—the three outer bundles of spiral fibrils (Waldeyer)—pass, between the inner rods of Corti, right through the - tunnel ; and, further, penetrating between the outer 332 ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. (Chap. XLI rods of Corti, they reach the outer hair-cells, with which they become connected (Gottstein, Waldeyer). 484, In connection with the outer process of the head of the inner and outer rods of Corti, mentioned above, is an elastic hyaline membrane—the lamina or membrana reticularis. It extends outwards over the organ of Corti to the supporting cells of Hensen, and possesses holes for the tops of the outer hair-cells and their hairs. The parts between the rods of Corti and between the outer hair-cells appear of the shape of phalanges—phalanges of Deiters. A short cuticular membrane extends from the head of the inner rod of Corti inwards to the inner supporting cells : it possesses holes for the tops of the inner hair-cells. 485. From the vestibular labium of the crista spiralis to the outer hair-cells of the organ of Corti extends a peculiar fibrillated membrane—the mem- brana tectoria. By means of it the sulcus spiralis - internus is bridged over, and so converted into a canal, 486. As we ascend towards the top of the cochlea, all parts in the scala media decrease gradually in size. The organ of Corti, being of an epithelial nature, possesses no blood-vessels. From the anatomical relations of the organ of Corti, it appears most pro- bable that the pillars, or rods, of Corti act as the supporting tissue, or framework, around which the other elements are grouped; and it seems likely that the hair-cells, with their rod-like hairs projecting freely into the endolymph, are the real sound-perceiving elements of the organ of Corti. Their connection with the terminal fibrille of the nerves points in the same direction Chap. XLII] 333 CHAPTER XLII. THE NASAL MUCOUS MEMBRANE. 487. Tue lower part of the nasal cavity is lined with a mucous membrane, which has no relation to the olfactory nerve, and therefore is not connected with the organ of smell. It is covered with a strati- fied, columnar, ciliated epithelium of exactly the same nature as that of the respiratory passages—e.g., the larynx and trachea. Large numbers of mucous secret- ing goblet-cells are met with in it. Below the epi- thelium is a thick hyaline basement membrane, and underneath this is a mucosa of fibrous tissue, with . numerous lymph corpuscles in it. In many places this infiltration with lymph corpuscles amounts to diffuse adenoid tissue, or to perfect lymph follicles. 488, The mucosa contains in its most superficial layer the network of capillaries, but in the rest it includes a rich and conspicuous plexus of venous vessels. In the deeper parts of the mucous membrane— z.¢., in the submucosa—are embedded smaller and larger glands, the ducts of which pass through the mucosa, and open on the free surface. Some of the glands are mucous; others are serous. In some cases (e.g., guinea-pig) almost all glands are serous, and of exactly the same nature as those of the back of . the tongue. In some places the mucous membrane is much thicker than in others, and then it contains larger glands, and between them bundles of non-striped muscular tissue. 489. In the upper or olfactory region (Fig. 165) of the nasal cavity, the mucous membrane is of a 334 Exvemenrs or HISTOLoGy. (Chap. XLM. different tint, being more of a brownish colour; it contains the ramifications of the olfactory nerve, and is the seat of the organ of smell. 490. The free surface is covered with a columnar Fig. 165.—From a Section through the Olfactory Region of the Guinea-pig. ¢, Thick olfactory epithelium; 2, thin olfactory epithelium; c, ciliated non- olfactory epithelium; d, bone. The transverse sections of the o nerve bundles and the tubular glands of Bowman are well seen. (Atlas.) epithelium, composed of the following kinds of cells (Fig. 166) :— (2) A superficial layer of long columnar, or rather Chap. XLI1.] MWasaz Mucous MEMBRANE. 335 conical, epithelial cells, each with an oval nucleus. In some places the free surface of these cells is covered with a bundle of cilia, similar to the superficial cells Fig. 166.—From a Vertical Section through the Olfactory Mucous Membrane of the Guinea-pig. a, The conor cells; 5, the sensory or olfactory cells; c, the deep epithelial eels; ; ad, the bundles of olfactory nerve-fibres; e, the alveoli of serous (Bowman’s) glands. (Atlas.) of the respiratory part of the nasal cavity ; in most places, however, the cilia are absent; the former condition obtains in those places which are in close proximity to the respiratory region. (6) Between the epithelial cells extend spindle- shaped cells, each with a spherical, or very slightly 330 E:LEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. ‘{Chap. XLII. oval, nucleus—the sensory cells (Max Schultze). Each cell sends one broad process towards the free surface, over which it projects in the shape of a small bundle of shorter or longer rods;. whereas a fine varicose filament passes from the cell body towards the mucosa, and, as shown first by M. Schultze, be- - comes connected with a fibrilla of the network of the olfactory nerve-fibres. (c) In some places there is a deep layer of epithe- ial cells, each with a spherical nucleus, of an inverted cone in shape, their pointed extremity passing be tween the other cells. just mentioned and their broad basis resting on the basement membrane. Von Brunn has shown that there is on the free surface of ~ the epithelium a sort of cuticle—a delicate limitans externa. 491. The mucous membrane is of loose texture, and contains a rich plexus of bundles of olfactory nerve-fibres, extending chiefly in a direction parallel to the surface. Each olfactory nerve-fibre is non- medullated, 2.¢., is an axis cylinder composed of minute or primitive fibrillee, and invested in a neurilemma with the nuclei of the nerve corpuscles. Near the surface the fibres of the plexus are thin, and they split up into the constituent fibrils which form a network ; into this pass the fine varicose processes of the sensory cells above named. 492. The blood-vessels supply with capillary net- works the superficial part of the mucous membrane and the numerous glands. These are the glands of Bowman, extending through the thickness of the mucous membrane. They are tubes, slightly branched, — and gradually enlarging towards their distal end; in some parts they are more or less straight. In struc ture they are identical with serous glands, possessing a minute lumen, and being lined with a layer of columnar albuminous cells. The duct is a very fine Chap. XLIL] MWasAaL JZucous MEMBRANE. 337 canal; it is that part of the gland that is situated in the epithelium of the free surface; it passes verti- cally through this, and consists of a fine limiting membrane, the continuation of the membrana _ propria of the gland-tube, and a layer of very flattened epi- thelial cells. 493. There is a definite relation between the size and number of the bundles of the olfactory nerve- fibres, the thickness of the olfactory epithelium, and the length of the gland-tubes. The size and number of the bundles of the nerve-fibres are determined by the thickness of the epithelium—ze., by the number of the sensory cells ; the number and thick- ness of the olfactory nerve bundles determine the thickness of the mucous membrane, and the thicker it is, the longer are the glands of Bowman. . 494. The organ of Jacobson is a minute tubular organ present in all mammals, and, as has been shown by Dursy and Kélliker, alsoin man. In mammals it is a bilateral tube, compressed from side to side, and situated in the anterior lower part of the nasal septum. Each tube is supported by a hyaline cartilage, in the shape of a more or less — plough-shaped capsule—the cartilage of Jacobson —and opens in front directly into the nasal furrow (guinea-pig, rabbit, rat, &c.) ; or it leads into the canal of Stenson (dog), which passes through the canalis naso-palatinus, and opens immediately behind the incisor teeth on the palate. In all instances, how- ever, it terminates posteriorly with a blind ex- tremity,. ' _ 495, The cavity of the tube is lined with stratified columnar epithelium, which on the lateral wall is ciliated in the guinea-pig and dog, and non-ciliated in the rabbit. The median wall—z.e¢., the one next to the middle line—is lined with olfactory epithelium, identical with that of the olfactory region of the nasal w—l 338 ELEMENTS OF FITSTOLOGY. [Chap. XLII1. cavity. Branches of olfactory nerve-fibres also pass into the median wall, and behave in exactly the same manner as in the olfactory region. Numerous serous glands—belonging chiefly to the upper and lower wall—open into the cavity of the organ of Jacobson. In the lateral wall there is in many instances a plexus of veins, extending in a longitudinal direction, and between the vessels are bundles of non-striped muscular tissue, thus constituting a sort of cavernous tissue. CHAPTER XLIIIL THE DUCTLESS GLANDS. 496. I. The hypophysis cerebri.—The upper or smaller lobe belongs to the central nervous system. The lower or larger lobe is surrounded by a fibrous capsule, which sends numerous minute septa into the interior. These split up into numerous trabecule of fibrous tissue, which, by dividing and re-uniting, form a dense plexus, with smaller and larger, spherical or ob- long, or even cylindrical spaces—the alveoli. In these lie spherical or oblong masses of epithelial cells. These epithelial cells are columnar, pyramidal, or polyhedral, each with an oval or spherical nucleus. Between the epithelial cells of the same group are found here and there small branched or spindle-shaped cells, with a small flattened nucleus. In some of the groups or alveoli of epithelial cells is a cavity, a sort of lumen, filled with a homogeneous gelatinous substance, The interalveolar connective tissue contains a network of capillaries. Between the alveoli and the interalveolar tissue there are lymph sinuses, like those around the alveoli of other glands—e.g., the salivary glands, mers Chap. XLI0.]) THe Ducrress GLANDS. 339 497, II. The thyroid gland (Fig. 167).—The framework of this gland is in many respects similar to that of other glands, there being an outer fibrous capsule, thicker and thinner septa, and finally the fine trabecule forming the septa between the gland alveoli. _ These are closed vesicles of a spherical or oval shape, and of various sizes. Each vesicle is lined with a single layer of polyhedral or columnar epithelial cells, each with a spherical or oval nucleus. There is a cavity, which differs in size according to the size of the vesicle. It contains, and is more or less filled with, a homogeneous, viscid, albu- minous fluid—the so-called colloid. In this often oc- cur degenerating nucleated lymph - corpuscles and coloured blood - corpuscles “Ehrong — From a Section rp the Thyroid Gland a, as epigeatiydl lining the vesi- if *cles; 6, the “ colloid” contents of (Baber) 5 the vesicles; ec, a lymphatic filled 498. The vesicles are with the same material as the vesicles; d, the fibrous tissue be- surrounded by networks of _ tween the gland vesicles. blood capillaries. In the connective tissue framework lie networks of lym- phatics; between the framework and the surface of the vesicles are lymph sinuses lined with endothelium (Baber). The large and small lymphatics are often filled with the same colloid material as the vesicles, .and it is probable that this colloid material is produced in the vesicles, and carried away by the lymphatics, to be finally discharged into the circulating blood. 499. Its formation in the vesicles is probably due to an active secretion by the epithelial cells of the vesicles, and to a mixture with it, or maceration by it, of the effused blood mentioned above. In some 340 ELEMENTS OF FIISTOLOGY. (Chap. XLIM, instances Baber found the amount of blood effused Roe eS Fig. 168.—From a Vertical Section through the Suprarenal Body of Man. 1, Cortical substance; 2, medullary part; a, outer capsule ; 4, zona glomerulosa; c, zona fascicu- lata; d, zona reticularis; e, medulla; 7, a large vein, (Elberth, in Stricker’s Manual.) into the cavity of the. vesicles very considerable, and hence it is justifi. able to assume that the destruction of red _ blood-corpus- cles forms one of the functions of the thyroid gland. 500. IIT. The suprarenal | bodies (Fig. 168). — —The suprarenal body is enveloped in a fibrous cap- sule; in connection with this are septa and trabeculz pass- ing inwards, and they are arranged differently in the cortex and in the medulla of the gland, as will be seen presently. The cortex of the gland consists of an outer, mid- dle, and inner zone, all three be- ing directly con- tinuous with one another. The outer one is the zona glomerulosa; it contains numerous spherical, on . Chap. XLUi.j Dae Ducrizss GLanps. 341 more commonly, elongated, masses of epithelial cells. The cells are polyhedral or cylindrical, each with a spherical or oval nucleus. In some animals—as the dog, horse—the cells are thin and columnar, and arranged in a transverse manner. Occasionally a sort of lumen can be discerned in some of these cell masses. 501. Next follows the middle zone, or zona Jasciculata. This is the. most conspicuous and broadest part of the whole gland. It consists of vertical columns of polygonal epithelial cells, each with a spherical nucleus. The cell substance is trans- - parent, and often contains anoil globule. The columns anastomose with their neighbours. Between the columns are fine septa of connective tissue carrying blood capillaries. Between the cell columns and the connective septa are seen here and there lymph spaces, into which lead fine channels, grooved out between some of the cells of the columns, 502. Next follows the inner zona, or zona reticu- laris, composed of smaller or larger groups of poly- hedral cells, with more or less rounded edges. These cell-groups anastomose with one another. The indi- vidual cells are slightly larger, and their substance is less transparent than those of the zona fasciculata. In the human subject they are slightly pigmented. 503. In the medulla we find cylindrical streaks of very transparent cells ; the streaks are separated by vascular connective tissue. The cells are polyhedral, columnar, or branched. These cell-streaks anasto- mose with one another, and are directly continuous ‘ with the cell-groups of the zona reticularis of the cortex. 504. The cortex is richly supplied with dense networks of capillary blood-vessels ; their meshes are polyhedral in the outer and inner zone, elongated in the middle zone, or zona fasciculata. In the medulla ~~ 342 Exements oF HisToLoGy. {[Chap. XLII. ‘numerous plexuses of veins are met with. In the centre of the suprarenal body lie the large efferent venous trunks. In the capsule (Kdlliker, Arnold), and in the connective tissue around the central veins, are plexuses of lymphatic tubes with valves. The nerves are very numerous, and composed of non- medullated fibres; in the medulla they form rich plexuses. In connection with these and with those of the outer capsule are small ganglia (Holm, Eberth). 505. IV. The glandula coccygea and in- tercarotica.—The first of these is a minute corpuscle situated in front of the apex of the os coccygis, and was discovered by Luschka. The glandula carotica of Luschka (ganglion intercaroticum) is of exactly the same structure as the glandula coccygea, 506. Its framework is of about the same nature as that of other glands—a fibrous capsule and inner fibrous septa and trabecule. Thesepta and trabecul contain in some places bundles of non-striped muscular tissue (Sertoli). 507. The spaces of the framework are occupied by the parenchyma. ‘This consists of spherical or cylin- drical masses of cells connected into networks. The individual cells are polyhedral epithelial cells, each with a spherical nucleus. According to Luschka, in the new-born child they are ciliated. In the centre of each of the cell-masses lies a capillary blood-vessel, much convoluted and wavy. Numerous non-medullated nerve-fibres forming a plexus are situated in the framework of the gland. sh. tN Dix (The numbers indicate pages.) Absorption (see Lymphatics). Achromatin, 9. Acini of glands, 180, 182. — of mews 211. — of reas, 209. Adenoi aa has og 44, 80, 92. Fi Tae lands, 179. g Adventitia of arteries, 76, 78. —— of capillaries, 80, 93. —— of veins, 79. —— lymphatic vessels, 102. Agminated glands, 95. Albuginea of ovary, 258. — membrane of Ascherson, Albuminous cells, 183. Alveolar cavity, 171, 178. —— ducts, 65, 220. Alveoli of glands, 180, 182. — of lung, 220. —— of pancreas, 209. Ameceboid corpuscles, 9 ——- movement, 4, 5, 14, 41, 90, 9: Ampulla, 320, &22 Anterior commissure, 4157. —— nerve-roots from cord, 136. Aorta, 65, 78. Aponeurosis, 32. Aqueductus cochlex, 321 —— Sylvii, 150, 160. —— vestibuli, 321. hnoid membrane of spinal cord, 127. ctee, 242. Arteries, 65, 76. Pe aay Afferent, 40, 51, Arterioles of ovary, 267. Articular , 60. Articulation nerve-corpus¢les,] 21. Arytenoid cartilage, 215. Ascending loop-tube, 238. Aster stage in nucleus, 8, Auditory hairs, 324. —— nerve, Origin of, 149. — ——,, Division of, 148. a teeth, 328. Auerbach’s plexus, 170, 201, 207. Auricle of hi 9 Td. Auriculo-ventricular valves, 75. Axis cylinder, 107. ‘ bis — process of sympa c ” peelion cell, 169. Bartholin’s glands, 270. Basement membranes of skin, 277. Basilar membrane of cochlea, 327, 328. Bellini’s ducts, 239. Bile-duct, 213, O14. Bladder, 64, 243. Blastoderm of chick, 2. Blood, 10. —— corpuscles, 10, 13. — —, their origin, 15. — -glands of His, 92. —— -plates of Bizzozero, 15. —— -vessels in grey matter, I5L Bone, 50. —., Development of, 55. *cartila —— corpuscles, 53. Bowman’s capsule, 234. — elastica anterior, 44, 344 Bronchi, 65, 219. Brownian molecular movement, 189, Bruch, Glands of, 294. Briicke’s elementary organisms, 5. — oikoid and zooid, 12 —— tunica nervea, 317. Brunner’s glands, 208, 209. Buccal glands, 187. Bulbus olfactorius, 159. Biitschli's nuclear spindle, 9. Calcification of bone, 55. Calices of kidney, 230. Canal of Schlemm, 299. Canalis hhyalowious, 307. — Petiti, — reuniens, $22. Canaliculi in bone, 52. —in e, Capillaries of marrow-bone, 81. —— of nerve system, 80. Capillary bile-ducts, 213. —— blood-vessels, 80, 201. aa lymphatics, 86. — network in mucosa, 190. —— sheaths, 228. Capsule, External, of brain, 162. ——, Internal, of brain, 162, 163, co gh Glisson, 2 210. —— of kidney, 65. —— of the spleen, 65, 225. Cartilage, 45. —, ro fe 47, 60. . 215. Cavernous tissues in genital organs, 255. Cavities of tendon sheaths, 88. Cavum 1 tympani, 319. Cells, 5. aa Muscular, of blood-vessels, —— -——, of intestine, 65. -— ——,, of respiratory organs, 65. — —, of rn 65. ary organs, 65, — in teapolt'a s tail, 35. —— of Claudius, 327, 331, Cellule mastoider, 319, Se tee ExLementTs or HisToxocy. Cellular tissue, 33. Cement of teeth, 174, —— substance, 80, 82, 90. — — of endothelium, 25, —— — of epithelium, 17. —— —— of fibrous tissue, 32. Central canal, 128. —— grey nucleus, 134. Centroacinous cells, 210. Centrum ovale, 156, "157. Cerebellum, 149, 152. Cerebrum, 149, 156, 157. Ceruminous glands, 278, 318. Cervix of uterus, 266. Chalice cells, 22. Chondrin, 31, 45. Chondroclasts, 62. Choroidal portion of muscle, 64. Choroid membrane, 303. Chromatin, 9. Chyle, 206, Ciliary muscle, 65, 300. —— nerve, 163 —— processes, 303. Ciliated cells, 21. Circulus arteriosus in iris, 302 Circumana! glands, 278, ciliary Cisterna lymphatica magna; 89. Clarke’s columns, 137, 140. Claustrum, 159, 162. Cleavage of ovum, 2. — of white blood corpuscles, 15. Clitoris, 270. Cochlea, 320, Cohnheim’s areas, 70. Colloid, 339. Colostrum co tes poronte i Coloured blo: corpuscles, 10. Colourless blood corpuscles, 13. Columnar epithelial cells, 17. go foe. Grey, of spinal cord, —.,, White, of spinal cord, 135. Compound lymphatic glands, 98, Conarium, 163. Concentric bodies of Hassall, 97, — lamella, 53. Cone fibre, 316. Cones of retina, 313. Coni vasculosi, 250. Conjunctiva, 291, —— blood-vessels, 293. =o —— lymphatics, 293. —— nerves, 294, pebree, 291, 293, Connective tissue, 31. Contraction wave, 67. INDEX. 345 Contractility of corneal cor- | Cystic duct, 65, puscles, 37. Cytogenous tissue, 92. eee oe vigment oA Convolution in brain ‘ sp aad H —— in nucleus, 8. : : ; maa a enmaty ae — oe projec Bis 94; —— processes, 141,145. - ies S$ of a ae tissue, Demilunes of Heidenhain, 183, Comnea, 20, 505 Dentinal canals, 173. ornea, 20, 295, ; —— fibres, 62, 173. —— nerves in, 297. — sheaths, 173 Corneal cells, 36. —— tubes, 62. — corpuscles, 34, 297. Dentine, 62, 172, 173 Cornu Ammonis, 158, 159. Descemet’s membrane, 4+4. Cornua, uteri, 267. Diapedesis, 82 Corona radiata, 163, Diapbragm 73, 88 Corpora albicantia, 161, 168. Diaster stage in nucleus, 8. _- ptt saw i Diffuse adenoid tissue, 93. —— striata, 161, 162. Dilatator, 65. Corpus callosum, 157. Direst Rivicion, 7, 9. — eee “ Disc tactil,” 121. — luteum, : Discus proligerus, 261. — restiforme, aoe 142. Disdiaclasts, 74, — spongiosum, » 993 Distal convoluted tubes, 238. eae ee 227, 233. Division, Remak’s mode of, 7. Doyere’s nerve-mount, 125. : A Ductless glands, 338. ve Genie ae 36. Ducts of pancreatic gland, 65. —— of salivary gland, — of Herbst, 115, 118. 9 — of lymph, "90, $3. Ductus ejaculatorii, 253, — of bone, 53. Dura mater, coma Moisencr, 115, nee Dural sheath, 317. — of nerv e, 108. — of Pacini, 4g 121, 291. Ear, External, 318, — of Vater, 115. ——, Internal, 320. —, Tactile, 115, 118, Efferent lymphatics, 102. Corti’s arch, 330. ——- range nerve-fibres, 116, — cells, 331, ; —— veins, 40. — ganglion, 326. Elastic fenestrated membrane of — rods, 329. Henle, 44. Cortical layer of ovary, 258. Elastin, 43. — lymph-sinus, 101. Electric nerve, 111. Costal cartilages, 46. Eleidin, 20. — pleura, 89. . Elementary fibrillz, 107. Cowper’s glands, 254, 270. —— fibrils, 32. Cremaster internus, 252. —— organisms, 4, Crescents of me 183. Enamel, 171. Cricoid cartilage, 46. — cap, 175. Crista acustica, 323. — cells, 175, 177. — spiralis, 327, 332. —— organ, 175, 177. Crus cerebri, 142, 161. aaate isms, 171. —, Crusta of, 163. ey ulbs of Krause, 115, 119, Crusta petrosa, 171. Crypts, 95. Bodcoatahets) 74, 76. —— of Lieberkiihn, 203, 209. Endochondral formation of bone, Cuticle of Nasmyth, 172, 177. 55. Cutis anserina, 287, Fundolymph, $21. — vera, 274, Endomysium, 66, 346 Endoneurium, 105. Endothelial cells, PLEO CHAD 25. —— membrane, Endothelium, 35. Endotheloid cell-plates, 92. Imann’s lateral disc, 68. Epiglottis, 49, 83. } _—— Suse of, 24. Epithelium, 19. Epitheloid layer, 56. Eustachian tube, 319. arcuate ig Sie 147. Fascie, 87. Fascicles, 66, Fenestra ovalis, 320, — rotunda, 320. ae aenentee. membrane, 30, 33, —— —— of Henle, 77. Fertilisation of ovum, 2. Fibre arcuate, Fibres, Connective tissue, 31. ——, Elastic tissue, 50. — of muscle, 63, 66, 72. —— of nerves, 103. — of Purkinje, 75. Fibrillx of connective tissue, 32. —— of muscle, 64 —— of nerve, 107. Fibr , 48. vie aco, tissue development, 42. Fissura orbitalis, 65. Fissures of spinal cord, 130, Fetal tooth papilla, 176, Follicles, Lieberkiihn’s, 203. —, Lymph, 92, 94, 100. — , Sebaceous, ; —., Thymus, 96. Fornix conjunctive, 293. ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. Fornix vaginal, 269 Fossa glenoidalis, 48, —— navic —— patillaris, 307. —— Sylvii, 159. Fovea centralis, 310, 314, 315 —— hemielliptica, 320. —— hemispherica, 320, Fundus, 266. Funiculus of Rolando, 144. Gall-bladder, 65. Ganglia, Cerebro-spinal, 138, 141, ——, Sympathetic, 168. Ganglion cells, 138, 164. Gasserian ganglion, 163. Gelatinous tissue, 45. Geniculate ganglion, 163. Genital corpuscles of Krause, 120. —— cnd-comppacion 7H 115. —— organs (male), 244, —— —— (female), 257. Germ reticulum of von Ebner, 247. Germinal endothelial cells, 28. —— epithelium, 258. — spots, 1, 259. —— vesicle, 4 259. Germinating cells, 29. Giraldé’s organ, 251. Gland, Prostate, 253. Glands, Bartholini, 270, hhrymal,.294, , Lieberkiihn’s, 17. ——,, Littré, 254, —— , Lymphatic, 80, re 100. ——, Meibomian, ——, Mohl, 292. —— ’ Mucous, 179, 191. ——, Peptic, 197. ——, Peyer, 95, 205. ——, Pyloric, i99, Glandule agminate, 200, —--— lenticulares, 200. —— Pacchioni, 149 —— uterine Glans clitoridis, 270, —— penis, 255. INDEX. Glassy membrane, 281. Glisson’s capsule, 210. Globulin, 12. Globus maj or, 251 Glomerule, 152. Glycogen, 14. Goblet cells, 18, 22. raafian follicles, 258, 243. Grandry’s corpuscles, 120. Granular formation of Meyne:t, —— layer of Purkinje, 174. Granules in blood, 15. Granulosa. membrana, 259 Grey commissure, 128. Ground lamelle, 53 —— plexus of Arnold, 121. —— substance, 117. Growing capillaries, 82. Habenula perforata, 331. Hematin, 13. Heematoidin, 13. Hematoplasts, 15. Hemin crystals, 13, Hemoglobin, 12. —— , Development of, 285. —— "fibres, F —— follicles, 278, 280. —— knob, 285. ——, Marrow of, 282. —, New formation of; 284. — ‘papilla, 285. ——, Root of, 282. ——’—— -sheath of, 281. —— spaces, 54. Heart and blood-vessels, 74, . Helicotrema, 320. Tomleshaee ¢ of brain, 152. Henle, Fenestrated memitanes -——, Stratum nerveum of, 317, —, , Tubes of, 237 Hensen’ s cells, 831. Hepatic cells, 212. — duct, 65. os lobules, 211, —— veins, 211. Herbst, Cor panties of, 115, 118. 347 Hilum of glands, 98. —— of salivary glands, 180. —— of spleen, 2! Hippocampus, 159. Homogeneous elastic membranes, 44 Howship’s lacune, 62. Hyaline cartilage, 46. Hyaloid membrane, 307. Hypophysis, 161, 338. Tlenm, 205. Incremental lines of Salter, 174. Incus, 320. Indirect division, 7. Infundibula, 65, ié1, 163. — of bronchiole, 920. — of gland, 188. Inner molecular layer, 311. —— nuclear layer, 311. Interarticular cartilages, 48, Interfascicular spaces, 34, 36. a spaces of Czermak, Interlobar ducts, 180. Interlobular bile-ducts, 213, 214. “eee tissue of liver, — ducts, 180. Intermediary cartilage, 48 —— plexus, 121, —— zone, 200. Intermembranous formation of bone, 55, 61. Intermuscular fibrils, 122. Internal capsule of brain, 163. Interstitial lamelle, 53. Intervertebral discs, 48. Intestine, i tee 201 all, 201 Intima of arteries, 76, 77. Intralobular bile-vessels, 213. —— ducts, 180. Intranuclear network, Tris, 300. —, Blood-vessels of, 302. —, Lymph-clefts of, 302. —, Lymph-sinuses of, 302. ——, Nerve-fibres of, 302. Island of Reil, 162. Jacobson’s organ, 337, 338. aren ae 7, 48, 247. ies fferent arterioles of, 240, ao plood- ves , 240, —— glomerulus, 234, 4 348 Kidney lymphatics, 214, 215, 243. — parenchyma, 231. —— vesse Is, 241. Kolliker’s osteoclasts, 62. Labia pudendi majora, 287. Labium tympanicum, 327. —— vesti Lab th, Osseous, "320. mal glands, 294. Lacune Morgagni, 254. —— of bone, 52, 53. — of cartilage, 46 —— of lymphatics, 86. Lamelle of bone, 54, — of cornea, 296, —— of lens, 306. Lamina cribosa, 317. —— elastica of cornea, 295, —— fusca, 299. — reticularis, 332. —— spiralis ossea, 320. —— vitrea, 301, 305. Langerhans’ granular layer, 20. Larynx, 215. Lateral basilar process, 158. —— nucleus, 1 — tract, 143. Lens, 305. —— fibres, 306. — stars, 306. Lenticular glands, 95. eee oe denticulatum, 128, — pectinatum, 299, — pulmonis, 221. —— spirale accessorium, 326, 328. — suspensory of og 307. Limitans externa, 312 — interna, 310. Lines of Schreger, 174. Liquor folliculi, 260. —— sanguinis, 10. Littré’s glands, 254. Liver, 88, 210. — vessels of, 211, 212. Lobes of pancreas, 209. — of salivary gland, 180, — of thymus gland, 96. —— of lung, 220, Lobules ofl liver, 211. — of lung, 220. — of salivary glands, 180. —— of thymus gland, 96. Lung, 88, 219. — pea —_- phatics, Lymph, 90. Lymphatic capillaries, 86. ELemenTs or HISTOLOGY. Lymphatic clefts, 79, 86, — glands, 80,84, 180. — rootlets, 86. — sinuses, 88, 101. —— tissue, 85. —— vessels, 79, 84, 92. Lymphaties, 65, 201. —— in mucosa, 190. Lymph-canal system in cornea, 36, —— -canalicular system,86, 90, » 297. —— cavities, 88. oo corpuscles, 90, 93. —— follicles, 92, 94, —— hearts, 90. Lymphoid cells, 29. Macula acustica, 323. —— lutea, 310, 311, 314, 315. Malleus, 320. Malpighian corpuscles of kiducy, —— —— of spleen, 227. —— pyramids of kidney, 2381. —— stratum of skin, 19, Mammary gland, 270. Manubrium mallei, 318. Marrow of bone, 50. . Matrix of osseous substance, 52, Meatus auditorius externus, ’318. Meckel’s ganglion, 163. Media of arteries, 76. Median lateral fissure, 132, Mediastinum testis, 244, Medulla oblongata, "142. — of gland, 99. Medullary cylinders, 100. —— lymph-sinus, 101, —— ray, 231. — ira ‘of nerve-fibres, 107, Meduitlatea nerve-fibres, 106, 114, Meibomian glands, 292. Meissner’s corpuscles, 191, 291. —— plexus, 170, 201, 207, Membrana basilaris, 327, 328, — chorio-capillaris, 304. — Descemeti, 297. — granulosa, 259. —— hyaloidea, 307. — — secundaria, 322. —— supra-choroidea, 303, —— tectoria, 332, —— tympani, 318. Membranes of Krause, 67, 74, Mesencephalon, 159, Mesentery, 88. Mesogastrium, 30. Migratory cells, 41. INDEX. Milk, 273. — globules, 272.. ca th, 177. Modiolus, 320, 326. Motor ganglion cells, 141. Movement of cilia, 22. - ——, Lymph follicles of, 200. Mucous cells, Muco-salivary elands, 179. - Mucus, formation of, 23. Miiller’s fibres, 310. —— mucose, 64, 195. Musculus ciliaris Riolani, 292, Myeloplax, 6. ° Myeloplaxes of Robin, 51, 62. —— substance, 289. Nasal mucous membrane, 333. — se Nerve endian. 104. —— corpuscles, 108. — end plate, 124. —— endings, 112, 115, —— fibres, 103. —— plexus, 106, 111, 114. Webwaek of fibrille, lil. Neurilemma, 108. Neuroglia, 133. —— fibrils, 133, 150. —— of Virchow, 45. —— tissue, 130. ean neti 107, 109, 135, 313. Nipple, 65. Se ts ag nerve-fibres, 111, ll Norris’s blood corpuscles, 13. -Nuclear layer in bulbus olfac- torius, 159. — zone, Nuclein, 6. Nucleoli, 6. Nucleus, Structure of, 6, 349 Nucleus caudatus, 162. —— cuneatus, 147, —— dentatus, , Laz. — lenticularis, 162. Nuclei, 7; howe of ee a —, Ou ter, 0: retina, Nymphe, 270. Paontoblante Ty 174, 177. agus, Oil-globule, 39, 40. Olfactory cells, 336. —— nerves, 111, 159. Olivary bodies, 148. —— nucleus, 147. Omentum of cat, 29. — of , 89. — of guinea-pig, 40. —— of rat, 32. ——, Structure of, 33. Optic nerve, 317. —— nerve-fibres, 310. —— tract, 162. —— vesicle, 316. — of Jacobson, 337, 338. Ossein, 52. Osseous labyrinth of ear, 321. —— lameliez, 52. —— substance from osteoblasts, 61. Ossicula auditus, 319. Ossifying cartilage, 48. Onc biants forming bone, 50, 57, Gatinclanth 62. Osteogenetic layer, 49. Otoliths, 324. Oval nucleus, 39. Ovary, 65, —— , Development of, 263. ——, Lymphaties of, 268. ——, Nerves of, 268. Oviduct, 65, 265. Pacinian corpuscles, 115, 121, 291. Palate, 187. Rett Palpebre, 293. —— fungiformis, 191. — nervi optici, 309. 350 E.ements or Hisrooey. Papillary hair of Unna, 280. — muscle, 75. Paraglobulin, 12. Parenchyma of testis, 253, Parenchymatous cartilage, 48, Parietal cells, 199. Pars ciliaris retine, 303, 305, 510, _ —— membranacea, 254. —— prostatica, 254. Pedunculated "hydatid of Mor- gagni, 251. Peduncnlus cerebelli, 144, 152. Penis, 255. —— corpora cavernosa, 255. —— nerve endings, 1 Peptic glands, 197. Peribronchial trmphatice, 220, 224. Pericardial cavities, 88. Periceilular space, 141. Perichondrium, 45, 46 Perilymph, 321. Perimysium, 66. Perineurium, 104, 121. Periosteal bone, 59, 61, —— formation, 55. —— processes of Virchow, 55. Periosteum, 50. Peripheral nerve-endings, 112, 115. Peritoneal cavities, 88. Peritoneum, 65. ap ee gy a 89, 224, — -spaces, 151. — spaces of His, 141, Pial sheath, 317. Pigment cells, 23, 37. Plasma, 10. — = Sa 41, 100. Pleura pulmonalis, 65, 220. Pleural cavities, 88. Plexus choroideus, 150. —— myentericus, 173, 201, 217. —— of Meissner, 201, 207. —— venosus vaginalis, 269. Plicee villose, 197, 204. Pons teary 1. "152, 154, 159. Porta hepatis, 21 os Portio Miilleri, 300 —— vaginalis uteri, 266. /Posterior nerve roots from spinal cord, 136 Prickle cells, 23. Primitive dental groove, 175. pn meatal fibrille, 107, 111, 138. Primitive fibrils, 69, 113, 263, Protoplasm, 1. ——,, Structure of, 6. Protoplasmie membrane, 39, Proximal convoluted tubule, 235, Pulp tissue, 227. Pulvinar, 162. Purkinje’s ganglion cells, 152, 154, Pyloric glands, 196, 199. Pyramid of Ferrein, 223. Pyramidal decussation, 142. — tracts, 142, Rami capsulares, 214. Ranvier’s constrictions, 108. —— nodes, 108. Raphe, 147, 156. Red blood corpuscles, 10, 12. Reissner’s membrane, 326, 328. Remak’s fibrous layer, 77. nerve-fibre, 111. Rete Malpighii, 19. —— mucosum, 19. —— testis, 250. Reticular cartilage, 49. —— formation, 156. 308. —, Blind spot of, 309. —_—, Blood-vessels of, 317. — ’ Ganglion cells of, 311. , Lymphaties of, 317. Rhodopsin of Kuhne, 314, Rods and cones, 313. Rollet’s secondary substance, 68, Rosette stage in nucleus, 8. Ruge, 268. Saccules, 321, 322. Saccus endolymphaticus, $21. Saliva, 189. Salivary cells, 182. — glands, 178. —— ——, Blood-vessels of, 186. — —, Ducts of, 180. —— —, Lobes of, 180. —— — ,, Lobules of, 180. — —, Lymphaties of, 186. —— ——,, Nerves of, 186. Sarcode of Dujardin, 5, Sarcolemma, 67, 68, 72. Scala tympani, 320. —— vestibuli, 320. Schultze’s protoplasm, 5. Schwann’s cells, 5. Sclerotic, 298. Scrotum, 64. Sebaceous follicles, 286, INDEX. Fe perornttg fo fibres, 54, chest’, of — of Sekwasihe 108, Simple axis cylinders, 111, 114, a 7 rae glands, 92, Skin, 27 — sce een a —— lymphatics o —— nerves of, 290. Solitary glands, 95. a lym an rine . paces of Fontana, Spermatoblasts, 247, Spermatozoa, 249, Sphincter papille, 301, Spleen, 225. ——, Capsule of, eo a , Lymphaties of —, Nerve-fibres af, a —, ° Trabeculee o , 226, Spongy bone substance, 54. Squamous ocaar eells, 18. Sternal cartilage, 47 Stomata, 29, 82, 89, 224. = columnar epithelium, —— pavement epithelium, 20, Stratum adiposum, 276. —— cinereum, 160. —— torneum, 19, 274. — gelatinosum, 159. — glomerulosum, 159, —— lucidum, 19. — Malpighii, 274, —— opticum, 160. Stria vascularis, 328. Stroma, 12. Subarachnoidal spaces, 88, 127, ~— tissue, 128, 35! Subcutaneous lymphatics, 88. Subcutaneous tissue, 275. Subepithelial endothelium of De- bove, 35. Subhyaloid cells, 307. Submaxillary ganglion, 163. Submucosa, 189. Submucous lymphatics, 88. Subpericardial nerve branches, 76. —— tissue, 74. Substantia gelatinosa, 134. oe nigra, 161. oath ubvaginal space. Sndoriferous can canal, i4 277. cus aga —— spiralis a7 —— pada Rac ath cerebelli, Suprachoroidal tissue, 300. Suprarenal bodies, 340. Supravaginal space, 318. Sweat glands, 65, 276, 290 Sympathetic system, 166. Synovial cavities, 88. Tactile corpuscles, 115, 218. —— hairs, : : ow nigrum, 301, 303, 305, Tarsal plate, 292, 293. Taste buds, 193. —— development, 175. —— pulp, 174. Tegmental cells, 193. Tegmentum, 160, 161. Teichmann’s crystals, 13. Tendon cells, 33. Tendons, 87. Tenonian capsule, 318. Tensor choroidex, 300. Terminal bronchi, 221. Testis, 244, encephalon, 1 Thalamus opticus, 157, 161, 162 Thoracic duct, 84. big or hte follicies, 96. —— serous glands of, 191, $52. ELEMENTS OF HISTOLOGY. Tonsils, 95. Touch-cells of Merkel, 115, 119. — les of Merkel, 120, Trabec earner, 75. — of lymphatics, 65. —— of spleen, 65. Trachea, 46, 65, 217. Tractus olfactorius, 159. —— opticus, 162. Transitional epithelium, 21, Tuba Eustachii, 319. Tuber cinereum, 161, 163. Tubercle of Rolando, 145, Tubes of epididymis, 252. Tunica adnata, 244. —— vaginalis, 244. Tyson’s glands, 255. Ureter, 230, 243. Urethra, Female, 269, —, Male, 254. Urinary tubules, 231, Vascularisation of cartilage, 55. Vater’s corpuscles, 115, Veins, 65. : —, intima of, 79. —., Media of, 79. ——- of the bones, 78. Veins of the brain, cord, gravid yrs: membranes, and retina, wax Valves of, 79. ena axillaris, azygos, cava, cru- ralis, hepatica, intima, iliaca, mesenterica, poplitea, renalis, spermatica, and umbilicalis, 80. —— jugularis, and subclavia, 79. Vene recta, 242. — stellate, 242. —— vorticosex, 305. Venous radicles, 227. —— sinuses, 227.: Ventricle, Fourth, 148. Ventricles, 76. Vesicule seminales, 65, 252. Vestibulum, 270. Virchow’s crystals, 13. Visceral pericardium, 74, —— peritoneum, 194, Vitreous body, 307. White blood corpuscles, 13, 16, — commissure, 135. —— fibrous tissue, 30, 31. — substance of brain, 151. —— — of cord, 110. —— —— of Schwann, 107, 108. Wolffian body, 258. Wreath arrangement of nucleus, &, Yellow elastic cartilage, 49. SS ae tissue, . Zona fasciculata, 341. —— glomerulosa, 340, —— pellucida, 259, — reticularis, 341, —— vasculosa, 257. Zonula ciliaris, 307, CASSELI. AND COMPANY, LIMITED, BELLE SAUVAGE WORKS, LONDON, £.0 20,884, MANUALS Students of Medicine. 1 Gece Series has been projected to meet the demand of Medical Students and Practitioners for com- pact and authoritative Manuals embodying the most recent discoveries, and presenting them to the reader in a cheaper and more portable form than has till now been customary in Medical Works. The Manuals contain all the information required for the Medical Examinations of the various Colleges, Halls, and Universities in the United Kingdom and the Colonies. The Authors will be found to be either Examiners or the leading Teachers in well-known Medical Schools. This ensures the practical utility of the Series, while the introduction of the results of the latest scientific researches, British and Foreign, will recommend them also to Practitioners who desire to keep pace with the swift strides that are being made in Medicine and Surgery. In the rapid advance in modern Medical know- ledge, new subjects have come to the front which - have not as yet been systematically handled, nor the facts connected with them properly collected. The treatment of such subjects forms an important feature of this Series. New and valuable Illustrations are freely intro- duced. The Manuals are printed in clear type, upon good paper. They are of a size convenient for the pocket, and bound in red cloth limp, with red edges. _ They contain from 300 to 540 pages, and are pub- lished at prices varying from 4s. 6d. to 7s. 6d. (For List of Manuals see over.) I M. M.—10 & Manuals for Students of Medicine. I.—_Elements of Histology. By E. Kier, M.D., F.R.S., Joint-Lecturer on General Anatomy and Phy- siology i in the Medical School of St. Bartholomew's Hospital, London. Third Edition. 6s. II. paureiost Pathology. By A. J. Pepper, M.B., M.S., F.R.C.8., Surgeon and Teacher of Practical Surgery at St. Mary’s Hospital. 7s. 6d. Ill._Surgical Applied DEMO. By FREDERICK TREVES, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to and Lecturer on Anatomy at the London Hospital. 7s. 6d. —Clinical Chemistry. By Cuarizes H. RALr¥E, M.D., F.R.C.P., Assistant Physician at the London Hospital. 5s. V.—_The Dissector’s Manual. By W. Bruce CLARKE, M.B., F.R.C.S., and C. B. Lockwoop, F.R.C. g., Demonstrators of Anatomy, St. Bartholomew’s Hospital Medical School. 6s. VI.—Human Physiology. By Henry Powsr, M.B., F.R.C.S8., Examiner in Physiology, Royal College of Surgeons ‘of England. 6s. Vil—Materia Medica and Therapeutics: An Introduction to Rational Treatment. By J. MitcHEeLL Bruce, M.D., F.R.C.P., Lecturer on Materia Medica at Charing Cross Medical School, and Physician to the Hospital. 7s. 6d. VIII.—Physiological Physics. By J. McGrecor-Ropert- son, M.A., M.B., Muirhead Demonstrator of Physi- ology, University of Glasgow. 7s. 6d. IX._Surgical Diagnosis: A Manual for the Wards. By A. Pearce GouLp, M.S., M.B., F.R.C.S., Assistant Surgeon to Middlesex Hospital. 7s, 6d. X.—Operative Surgery. By Epwarp BELLamy, F.R.C.S., Surgeon and Lecturer on Anatomy at Charing Cross Hospital; Examiner in Anatomy, Royal College of Surgeons. XI.—Comparative Physiology and Anatomy. By F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A., Professor of Comparative Anatomy at King’s College. XIIl.—Forensic Medicine. By A. J. Preprrrr, M.S., M.B., F.R.C.S., Examiner in Forensic Medicine to the University of London. XIII. vimenical Applied Anatomy. By Joun Curnow, F.R.C.P., Professor of Anatomy at King’s Col- et ‘Physician at King’s College Hospital. Other Volumes will follow in due course. Cassell & Company, Lim ited, London ; and all Booksellers. 2 Authoritative Work on Health by Eminent Physicians and Surgeons. The Book of Health. A Systematic Treatise for the Professional and General Reader upon the Science and the Preservation of Health . 21s, CHAP. CONTENTS. 1. Introductory. _2.-Food and its Use in Health. By SIR RISDON BENNETT, M.D., F.R.S. 3. The Influence of Stimulants and Narcotics on Health. By T. LAUDER BRUNTON, M.D., F.R.S. 4, Education and the Nervous System. By J. CRICHTON-BROWNE, LL.D., M.D. 5. The Influence of Exercise on Health. By JAMES CANTLIE, F.R.C.S. 6. The Influence of Dress on. Health. By FREDERICK TREVES, F.R.C.S. By W. S. SAVORY, F.R.S. - The Influence of our surroundings on He 7 alth. 3 J. E. POLLOCK, M.D. 8. The Influence of pe reins on ealth. y J. RUSSELL RENE Ds, M.D., F.R.S 9. Health at Home. By peed MURPHY, M.R.C.S. 10. Health in Infancy and Childhoo 204. B. CHEADLE, M.D. 1l. Health at School. By CLEMENT DUKES, M.D. 12. The Eye and Sight. ; By HENRY POWER, F.R.C.S. 13. The Ear and Hearing. By G. P. FIELD,- M.R.C.S. 14. The Throat and Voice, By J. S. BRISTOWE, M.D., F.R.S. 15. The Teeth. , By CHARLES S. TOMES, F.R.S. 16. The Skin and Hair. By MALCOLM MORRIS. 17. Health in India. By SIR JOSEPH FAYRER, K.C.S.I., F.R.S., and J. EWART, M.D. 18, Climate and Health Resorts. By HERMANN WEBER, M.D. Edited by MALCOLM MORRIS. **A volume which deserves high praise throughout, and which will find its uses in every household.”—The Times. ‘The work is what it aims to be—authoritative, and must become a standard work of reference not only with those who are responsible for the health of schools, workshops, and other establishments where there is a large concourse of individuals, but to every member of the community who is anxious to secure: the highest possible degree of healthy living for himself and for his family,” —Lancet. Cassell & Company, Limited, London; and all Booksellers. 3 CLINICAL MANUALS ; FOR Practitioners and Students of Medicine. Complete Monographs on Special Subjects. HE object of this Series is to present to the Practitioner and Student of Medicine original, concise, and complete monographs on all the principal subjects of Medicine and Surgery, both general and special. It is hoped that the Series will enable the Practitioner to keep abreast with the rapid advances at present being made in medical knowledge, and that it will supplement for the Student the comparatively scanty infor- mation on special subjects contained in the general text-books. The Series will form a complete Ency- clopzedia-of Medical and Surgical Science ‘in separate volumes. The Manuals will be written by leading Hospital Physicians and Surgeons, whose work on each special subject may be con- sidered to be authoritative. The Manuals will be printed in clear type upon good paper. They will be of a size convenient for the pocket, substantially bound in blue cloth limp, with blue edges. Each volume will contain about 544 pages, and 4 a will be freely Illustrated by Original Chromo- Lithographs and Woodcuts, when required, and will be published at about 8s. 6d. each. LIST OF MANUALS. 1.—Insanity, including Hysteria. By GEORGE H. Savace, M.D., Medical Superintendent and Resident Physician to Bethlem Royal Hospital, and Lecturer on Mental Diseases at Guy’s Hospital. 8s. 2.—Intestinal Obstruction. By FREDERICK Treves, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to and Lecturer on Anatomy at the London Hospital. 8s. 6d. Se Eph sti. By JONATHAN HuTCHINSON, F.R.S., C.S., Consulting Surgeon to the London Hospital and to the Roval London Ophthalmic Hospital. 4.—Diseases of the Breast. By THomas Bryant, — F.R.C.S., Surgeon to and Lecturer on Surgery at Guy’s Hospital. 5._Surgical Diseases of the Kidney. By Henry Morris, M.B., F.R.C.S., Surgeon to and Lecturer on Surgery at Middlesex Hospital. 6.—The Pulse. By W. H. BroappBent, M.D., F.R.C.P., Physician to and Lecturer on Medicine at St. Mary’s Hospital. 7.—Diseases of the Tongue. By H. T. Burt tin, F.R.C.S., Assistant Surgeon to St. Bartholomew’s Hospital. 8.—Surgical Diseases of Children. By EpMuND OweEN, M.B., F.R.C.S., Surgeon to the Children’s Hospital, Great Ormond Street, and Surgeon to and Lecturer on Anatomy at St. Mary’s Hospital. 9.—Diseases of the Urethra. By CLEMENT » Lucas, B.S., M.B., F.R.C.S., Senior Assistant Surgeon to Guy’s Hospital. 10.—Diseases of Joints. By Howarp Mars, F.R.C.S., Senior Assistant Surgeon to and Lecturer on Anatomy at St. Bartholomew’s Hospital, and Surgeon to the Children’s Hospital, Great Ormond Street. 11.—Fractures and Dislocations. By T. PIcKER- InG Pick, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to and Lecturer on moet at St. George’s Hospital. 12.—Diseases of the Rectum and daa By Cuarves B. Batt, M.Ch. (Dublin), F.R.C.S.E., Surgeon and Clinical Teacher at Sir P. Dun’s Hospital. Other Volumes will follow in due course. CAssELL & COMPANY, Limited, Ludgate Hill, London. 5 Toe YeAR-BooK oF TREATMENT, A Critical Review for Practitioners of Medicine. - Price 5s. HE object of this book is to present to the Prac- titioner not only a complete account of all the more important advances made in the Treatment of Disease, but to furnish also a Review of the same by a competent authority. Each department of practice will. be fully and concisely treated, and into the consideration of each subject will enter such allusions to recent pathological and clinical work as bear directly upon Treatment. The medical literature of all countries will be placed under contribution, and the work will deal with all matters relating to Treatment that have been pub- lished during the year ending September 3oth. A full reference will be given to every article noticed, List OF THE SUBJECTS AND CONTRIBUTORS :— 1. Diseases of the Heart and Circulation. By J. MitcHELL Bruce, M.D., F.R.C.P., Physician to Charing Cross Hospital. 2. Diseases of the Lungs and Organs of Respira- tion. By R. Doucias PowELL, M.D., F.R.C.P., Physician to Middlesex Hospital. 3. Diseases of the Nervous System. By A. pg WATTEVILLE, M.D., B.Sc., Physician to the Electrical Department, St. Mary’s Hospital. Diseases of the Stomach, Intestines, Liver, &c. By T. LAUDER BRUNTON, M.D., F.R.C.P., F.R.S., Assistant Physician to St. Bartholomew’s Hospital. 5. Diseases of the Kidney, Diabetes, &c. By C. H. RALFE, M.D., F.R.C.P., Assistant Physician to the London Hospital. 6. Rheumatism and Gout. By Dyce Duckworru, M.D., F.R.C.P., Assistant Physician to St. Bartholo- mew’s Hospital. 4 ——e | 13. 14. 22. *. . Anemia, Scurvy, &e. By SIDNEY CoupPLAND, M.D., F,R.C.P., Physician to Middlesex Hospital. . Medical Diseases of Children. By A. E. SANsom, M.D., F.R.C.P., Physician to the North Eastern Hos- pital for Children and to the London Hospital. . Continued Fevers. By F. A. MAnHomeED, M.D., F.R.C.P., Physician to the London Fever Hospital and Assistant Physician to Guy’s Hospital. . General Surgery. By THomAs Bryant, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to Guy’s Hospital, and FREDERICK TREVES, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to the London Hospital. . Orthopedic Surgery. By J. WARRINGTON HAWARD, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to St. George’s Hospital. . The Surgery of the Female Pelvic Organs. By J. KNowsLEY THORNTON, M.B. and C.M., Surgeon to the Samaritan Hospital. Diseases of the Genito-urinary Organs. By REGINALD EIARRISON, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to the Royal Infirmary, Liverpool. Surgical Diseases of Children. By EpmMuND OwEN, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to the Children’s Hospital, Great Ormond Street, and to St. Mary’s Hospital. . Venereal Diseases. By ALFRED Cooper, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to the Lock Hospital. . Diseases of Women. By JoHN WILLIAMs, M.D., F.R.C.P., Obstetric Physician to. University College Hospital. . Midwifery. By Francis H. CHAmpNeys, M.B., F.R.C.P., Assistant Obstetric Physician to St. George’s Hospital. . Diseases of the Skin. By Matcorm Morkis, F.R.C.S.Ed., Surgeon to the Skin Department, St. Mary’s Hospital. . Diseases of the Eye. By HENry Power, F.R.C.S., Ophthalmic Surgeon to St. Bartholomew’s Hospital. . Diseases of the Ear. By Gerorce P. FIELD, M.R.C.S., Aural Surgeon to St. Mary’s Hospital. . Diseases of the Throat. By FEL1Ix Semon, M.D., M.R.C.P., Physician to the Throat Department, St. Thomas’s Hospital. Summary of the Therapeutics of the Year. By WALTER G. SMITH, M.D., F.K.Q.C.P.1L, King’s Professor of Materia Medica, School of Physic, Trinity College, Dublin. Cassell & Company, Limited, London; and all Booksellers. 7 Important Work on Sanitation. Our Tomes, and How to M. ake them Flealthy. With numerous Practical Illustrations. _ Edited by SHIRLEY FORSTER MuRPHY, JMedtcal Officer of Health to the Parish of St. Pancras; Hon, Secretary to the Epidemiological Society, and to the Society of Medical Officers of Health. 960 pages. Royal 8vo, cloth Sa - ; p 15s, ; CONTENTS. Health in ane Home. By W. B. RICHARDSON, M.D., LL.D., Architecture. By P. GORDON SMITH, F.R.1.B.A., and KEITH DOWNES YOUNG, A.R.I.B.A, 4 ] Internal Decoration. By ROBERT W. EDIS, F.S.A., and MALCOLM MORRIS, F.R.C.S.Ed. Lighting. By R. BRUDENELL CARTER, F.R.C.S. Warming and Ventilation. By DOUGLAS GALTON, C.B., 191, FR House Drainage. By WILLIAM EASSIE, C.E., F.L.S., F.G.S. Defective Sanitary Appliances and Arrangements. By PROF. W. H. CORFIELD, M.A., M.D. Water. By PROF. F. S. B. FRANCOIS DE CHAUMONT, M.D., F.R.S.; ROGERS FIELD, B.A., M.1.C.E.; and J. WALLACE ; PEGGS, C.E. Disposal of Refuse by Dry Methods. By THE EDITOR. The Nursery. By WILLIAM SQUIRE, M.D., F.R.C.P. House Cleaning. By PHILLIS BROWNE. Sickness in the House. By THE EDITOR. Legal Responsibilities. By THOS. ECCLESTON GIBB. &e. &c. ** A large amount of useful information concerning all the rights, duties, and privileges of a householder, as well as about the best means of rendering the home picturesque, comfortable, and, above all, wholesome.” —7imes. Fourth and Cheap Edition. Price 1s. 6d. ; cloth, 2s. A Handbook of Nursing For the Home and for the Hospital. By CATHERINE J. Woop, Lady Superintendent of the Hospital for Sick Children, Great Ormond Street. CASSELL & CoMPANY’s COMPLETE CATALOGUE, containing particulars of several Hundred Volumes, including Bibles and Religious Works, lilustrated and Fine-Art Volumes, Children’s Books, Dictionaries, Educational Works, History, Natural History, Household and Domestic Treatises, Science, Travels, d&c., together with a Synopsis of their numerous Illustrated Serial Publications, sent post free on application. Cassell & Company, Limited, London; and ali Booksellers, 8 ye roynY SENS SUN RES QERAEMA RE CRS RS Sahn SEED wise. ISEAHANNR 35 SAN SENS S SEN SON wy . SSSA NT s Ses ‘ SASS SAR Saet SENS AAS NG ASS TASS STN VA SNS ae Se ad Svea keh Seta . SNE S SN WAVE S . SERS RS SSA SASS SS TSAO SS ease SS Woe NS ee WENA eC ys S PONE ae SEN AN Sh SSESs sk aN eee LA S SERA Se CAS ee ek x i Gea Se SO VILE Sa Se aah va Set RIVES AG ‘ Nas ' \ SN S Sess} s Te Sy Y “ aS we ~ = Sy OS % ats TERE x Coe AN Sah Se Ss ASS 3S ete SSSA ~) SONS EOE CATA Ree ee - BASS ; Sees LR SS